This is a modern-English version of Line and Form (1900), originally written by Crane, Walter. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.


Line & Form by Walter Crane

LINE & FORM

BY WALTER CRANE

LONDON: G. BELL & SONS, LTD.

First published, medium 8vo, 1900.
Reprinted, crown 8vo, 1902, 1904, 1908, 1912, 1914.
CHISWICK PRESS: CHARLES WHITTINGHAM AND CO.
TOOKS COURT, CHANCERY LANE, LONDON


TRANSCRIBER'S NOTES

In the original of this work, most pages are headed by a topic phrase, so that a topic can be located quickly by riffling the pages of the book. In this etext, the same topic phrases appear in right-aligned boxes near the text that begins that topic. Thus a topic can be found by scrolling the text and scanning the right margin.

In the original version of this work, most pages have a topic phrase at the top, allowing readers to quickly find a specific topic by flipping through the book. In this electronic version, the same topic phrases appear in right-aligned boxes next to the text where that topic begins. This way, you can find a topic by scrolling through the text and looking at the right margin.

The many images of the original are inline here as grayscale graphics in PNG format, scaled to 480 or 512 pixels width. When an image has a pale-gray border, the reader can click on the image to open a higher-resolution version.

The various images of the original are shown here as grayscale graphics in PNG format, resized to 480 or 512 pixels in width. When an image has a light-gray border, the reader can click on it to open a higher-resolution version.

In the original, the requirements of book design often caused the editors to place images some distance from the text that discussed them. In this etext some images are placed closer to the point where they are mentioned and thus not at their original page number. Each image has a number, for example f016. In the List of Illustrations and the Index, references to images by page number have been replaced by these figure numbers, which are linked to the images. Within the body text, references to a figure by its page number are linked to the image, not the specified page.

In the original version, the requirements of book design often led editors to position images far from the text discussing them. In this digital version, some images are placed closer to the relevant text, which means they may not be on their original page number. Each image has a number, for example f016. In the List of Illustrations and the Index, references to images by page number have been replaced with these figure numbers, which are linked to the images. Within the body text, references to a figure by its page number are linked to the image, not the specified page.

Two minor typos were corrected: thing to think on page 10 and intregal to integral on page 197.

Two minor typos were corrected: thing to think on page 10 and integral to integral on page 197.


PREFACE

As in the case of "The Bases of Design," to which this is intended to form a companion volume, the substance of the following chapters on Line and Form originally formed a series of lectures delivered to the students of the Manchester Municipal School of Art.

As with "The Bases of Design," which this is meant to complement, the content of the following chapters on Line and Form was originally a series of lectures given to the students at the Manchester Municipal School of Art.

There is no pretension to an exhaustive treatment of a subject it would be difficult enough to exhaust, and it is dealt with in a way intended to bear rather upon the practical work of an art school, and to be suggestive and helpful to those face to face with the current problems of drawing and design.

There’s no claim to cover every detail of a topic that’s hard to fully address, and it’s approached in a way meant to focus on the practical work of an art school, aiming to be insightful and useful for those dealing with today's challenges in drawing and design.

These have been approached from a personal point of view, as the results of conclusions arrived at in the course of a busy working life which has left but few intervals for the elaboration of theories apart from practice, and such as they are, these papers are now offered to the wider circle of students and workers in the arts of design as from one of themselves.

These have been approached from a personal perspective, based on the conclusions I've drawn during a busy working life that has left little time for developing theories beyond practical experience. As they are, these papers are now shared with a broader audience of students and professionals in the field of design, coming from someone who is part of that community.

They were illustrated largely by means of rough sketching in line before my student audience, as well as by photographs and drawings. The rough diagrams have been re-drawn, and the other illustrations reproduced, so that both line and tone blocks are used, uniformity being sacrificed to fidelity.

They were mostly shown through rough sketches in front of my student audience, along with photographs and drawings. The rough diagrams have been redrawn, and the other illustrations reproduced, so that both line and tone blocks are used, with uniformity sacrificed for accuracy.

WALTER CRANE.

Walt Crane.

Kensington, July, 1900.

Kensington, July 1900.


CONTENTS

  • CHAPTER I
  • Origin and Function of Outline—Silhouette—Definition of Boundaries by—Power of Characterization by—Formation of Letters—Methods of Drawing in Line—The Progressive Method—The Calligraphic Method—The Tentative Method—The Japanese Direct Brush Method—The Oval Method—The Rectangular Method—Quality of Line—Linear Expression of Movement—Textures—Emotion—Scale of Linear Expression 1
  • CHAPTER II
  • The Language of Line—Dialects—Comparison of the Style of Various Artists in Line—Scale of Degrees in Line—Picture Writing—Relation of Line to Form—Two Paths—The Graphic Purpose—Aspect—The Ornamental Purpose—Typical Treatment or Convention—Rhythm—Linear Plans in Pattern Designing—Wall-paper Design—Controlling Forms—Memory—Evolution in Design—Variety in Unity—Counterbalance—Linear Logic—Recurring Line and Form—Principle of Radiation—Range and Use of Line 23
  • CHAPTER III
  • Of the Choice and Use of Line—Degree and Emphasis—Influence of the Photograph—The Value of Emphasis—The Technical Influence—The Artistic Purpose—Influence of Material and Tools—Brushwork—Charcoal— Pencil—Pen 51
  • CHAPTER IV
  • Of the Choice of Form—Elementary Forms—Space-filling—Grouping— Analogies of Form—Typical Forms of Ornament—Ornamental Units— Equivalents in Form—Quantities in Design—Contrast—Value of Variations of Similar or Allied Forms—Use of the Human Figure and Animal Forms in Ornamental Design 73
  • CHAPTER V[viii]
  • Of the Influence of Controlling Lines, Boundaries Spaces, and Plans in Designing—Origin of Geometric Decorative Spaces and Panels in Architecture—Value of Recurring Line—Tradition—Extension— Adaptability—Geometric Structural Plans—Frieze and Field—Ceiling Decoration—Co-operative Relation 108
  • CHAPTER VI
  • Of the Fundamental Essentials of Design: Line, Form, Space—Principles of Structural and Ornamental Line in Organic Forms—Form and Mass in Foliage—Roofs—The Mediæval City—Organic and Accidental Beauty— Composition: Formal and Informal—Power of Linear Expression—Relation of Masses and Lines—Principles of Harmonious Composition 138
  • CHAPTER VII
  • Of the Relief of Form—Three Methods—Contrast—Light and Shade, and Modelling—The Use of Contrast and Planes in Pattern Designing— Decorative Relief—Simple Linear Contrast—Relief by Linear Shading— Different Emphasis in relieving Form by Shading Lines—Relief by means of Light and Shade alone without Outline—Photographic Projection—Relief by different Planes and Contrasts of Concave and Convex Surfaces in Architectural Mouldings—Modelled Relief— Decorative Use of Light and Shade, and different Planes in Modelling and Carving—Egyptian System of Relief Sculpture—Greek and Gothic Architectural Sculpture, influenced by Structural and Ornamental Feeling—Sculptural Tombs, Medals, Coins, Gems—Florentine Fifteenth-century Reliefs—Desiderio di Settignano 165
  • CHAPTER VIII[ix]
  • Of the Expression of Relief in Line-drawing—Graphic Aim and Ornamental Aim—Superficial Appearance and Constructive Reality— Accidents and Essentials—Representation and Suggestion of Natural Form in Design—The Outward Vision and the Inner Vision 204
  • CHAPTER IX
  • Of the Adaptation of Line and Form in Design, in various materials and methods—Mural Decoration—Fresco-work of the Italian Painters—Modern Mural Work—Mural Spacing and Pattern Plans— Scale—The Skirting—The Dado—Field of the Wall—The Frieze— Panelling—Tapestry—Textile Design—Persian Carpets—Effect of Texture on Colour—Prints—Wall-paper—Stained Glass 224
  • CHAPTER X
  • Of the Expression and Relief of Line and Form by Colour—Effect of same Colour upon different Grounds—Radiation of Colour—White Outline to clear Colours—Quality of Tints relieved upon other Tints—Complementaries—Harmony—The Colour Sense—Colour Proportions—Importance of Pure Tints—Tones and Planes—The Tone of Time—Pattern and Picture—A Pattern not necessarily a Picture, but a Picture in principle a Pattern—Chiaroscuro—Examples of Pattern-work and Picture-work—Picture-patterns and Pattern-pictures 256
  • INDEX283

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

The Origin of Outlinef002
Silhouettesf003
Coast and Mountain Lines—Gulf of Naupliaf004
Proportions of Roman Capital Letters and of lower-case German text. From Dürer's "Geometricaf005a
The Progressive Method of Drawing in Linef006a
The Calligraphic Methodf007a
The Tentative Methodf007b
The Oval and Rectangular Methodsf008
Lines of Characterization in the Form and Feature of Flowers: Lily and Poppyf009
Silhouette of Beech Leaves and Line Rendering of the samef010a
Lines of Movementf010b
Effect of Wind upon Treesf011
Line Arrangement in ribbed Sea-sandf012
Lines of different Textures, Structures, and Servicesf013
Lines of Exaltation and Rejoicing in Unison. The Morning Stars, after William Blakef014
Lines of Grief and Dejection: Designs from Flaxman's Homerf015
Landscapef016
Scale of various Degrees of Linear Weight and Emphasisf017
Curvilinear Scale of Directionf018
Rectangular Scale of Directionf018
Picture Writingf019
Olive Branch, from Naturef020
Olive Branch, simplified in Decorative Treatmentf021
Study of Horned Poppyf022
Adaptation of Horned Poppy in Design: Vertical Panel for Needleworkf023
Question and Answer in Linef024, f025
[xi]Diagram showing the Use of a Geometric Basis in Designing a Repeating Patternf026
Use of Controlling Boundaries in Designing Spraysf027
Method of Testing a Repeating Patternf028
Sketch to show how a Pattern of Diverse Elements may be harmonized by Unity of Inclosing and Intermediary Linesf029
The Principle of Counterbalance in different Systems of Designf030
Border Units and Border Motivef031
Recurring Line and Form in Border Motivesf032
Radiating Principle of Line in Natural Formf033
Radiating Lines of the Pectoral Muscles and Ribsf034
Vaulting of Chapter House, Westminsterf035
Lines of Characterization of Feathers and Shellsf036
Pen Drawing of Fruitf037
Effect of different Emphasis in Treatment of the same Designsf038, f039
Effect of different Emphasis in the Drawing of Landscapef040
Example of Page Treatment to show Ornamental Relation between Text and Picturesf041a
Suggestion for a Carpet Pattern and Abstract Treatment of the same on Point Paper as detail of Brussels Carpetf041b
Brush Formsf042
Direct Brush Expression of Animal Formf043
Japanese Drawing of a Bird. From "The Hundred Birds of Bari"f044
Elementary Geometrical Formsf045a
Use of the same Forms in Architecturef045b
Poppy-headsf046
Apple cut to show Position of Seedsf047
Cube and Sphere in Architectural Ornamentf048a
Filling of Square Spacef049a
Filling of Circular Spacef049b
Inlay Design: Pattern Units and Motivesf050
Grouping of Allied Forms: Composition of Curvesf051a
Grouping of Allied Forms: Composition of Anglesf051b
Still-life Group illustrative of Wood-engravingf052
Japanese Diagonal Patternf053
Treatment of Fruit and Leaf Forms: Corresponding Curvaturef054
[xii]Correspondence in General Contour between Leaf and Treef055a
Some Analogies in Formf055b
Tree of Typical Pattern Forms, Units and Systemsf056
Sketches to show Use of Counterbalance, Quantity, and Equivalents in Designingf057
Quantities and Counterchange of Border and Field in Carpet Motivesf058
Sketches to illustrate Value of different Quantities in Persian Rugsf058-f061
Recurrence and Contrast in Border Motivesf062
Use of inclosing Boundaries in Designing Animal Forms in Decorative Patternf063a
Decorative Spacing of Figures within Geometric Boundariesf063b
Simple Linear Motives and Pattern Basesf064
Use of Intervals in Repeating the same Ornamental Unitsf065
Designs of Floral, Human, and Animal Forms, governed by Shape of inclosing Boundaryf066
The Parthenon: Sketch to show Spaces used for Decorative Sculpture in Greek Architecturef067
The Tower of the Winds, Athensf068
Sketch of part of the Arch of Constantine to show spaces for Decorative Sculpture in Roman Architecturef069
Byzantine (Mosaic) Treatment of Architectural Structural Features: Apse, S. Vitale, Ravennaf070
Detail of Canopy of Tomb of Gervaise-Alard, Winchelseaf071
Walberswick Church: West Doorf072
Miserere in St. David's Cathedralf073
Recessed Panel from the Tomb of Bishop John Morgan, St. David's Cathedralf074
Corbel from Bishop Vaughan's Chapel, St. David's Cathedralf075
Gothic Tile Pattern, St. David's Cathedralf076
Surface Pattern Motives derived from Lines of Structuref077a
Repeating Patterns built upon Square and Circular Basesf077b
Plan of a Drop Repeatf078
Sketch Designs to show Relation between Frieze and Field in Wall-paperf079
Principles of Structural and Ornamental Line in Natural Formsf080
[xiii]Radiating, Recurring and Counterbalancing Lines in the Structure of the Skeleton and the Musclesf081a
General Principles of Line and Form in the Branching and Foliage Masses of Treesf081b
Principles of Structure in Foliage Massesf082
Albert Dürer: Detail from "The Prodigal Son"f083
Albert Dürer: St. Anthonyf084
Roof-lines: Rothenburgf085
St. Margaret Street, Canterburyf086
Figure Designs controlled by Geometric Boundariesf087, f088
Expression of Storm and Calm in Landscapef089
Expression of Repose and Actionf090
Controlling Lines of Movement: Movement in a Processionf091a
Lines left by a Watercourse—Lines governing fallen Débris from a Quarryf091b
Relief of Form, (1) by Outline, (2) by Contrast, (3) by Light and Shadef092
Relief of Form and Line in Pattern Design by means of Contrast and the Use of Planesf093
Treatment of Mantling (14th-16th centuries)f094a, f094b
Brass of Martin de Visch, Bruges, 1452f095
Relief in Pattern Design by means of Simple Linear Contrastsf096a
Relief by adding Shading Lines to Outlinef097a
Relief by Diagonal Shadingf097b
Different Method and different Emphasis in Relieving Form by Shading Linesf098
Albert Dürer's Principle in the Treatment of Drapery: From the Woodcut in the "Life of the Virgin" Seriesf099
Albert Dürer: Pen-drawingf100
Filippino Lippi: Study of Draperyf101
Raphael: Studies of Draperyf102
Relief by means of Light and Shade alone, in Pen-drawing without Outlinef103a
Relief by means of White Line on a Dark Ground and vice versâf103b
Relief in Architectural Mouldingsf104
Roman Treatment of Corinthian Order, Forum of Nerva, Romef105
[xiv]Egyptian Relief Sculpture: Thebesf106
Greek Relief: Eleusisf107
Egyptian Relief: Denderahf107
Chartres Cathedral: Carving on West Frontf108
Chartres Cathedral: Tympanum of Central Door of West Frontf109
Medals of the Lords of Mantua, Cesena, and Ferrara, by Vittore Pisanof110
Treatment of Draped Figure in Black on White Ground and vice versâf111a
Treatment of the same Figure in Light and Shadef111b
The Graphic Principle of the Expression of Form by Light and Shade; with and without Outlinef112
Linear Expression of Features, Feathers and Fur: Notes from Naturef113
Sketches to illustrate the Graphic and the Decorative Treatment of Draped Figuresf114
Decorative Treatment of Birdsf115
Floral Designs upon Typical Inclosing Shapes of Indian and Persian Ornamentf116
Dancing Figure with the Governing Lines of the Movementf117a
Lines of Floral Growth and Structure: Lily and Rosef117b
Coast-lines, Gulf of Naupliaf118a
Lines of Movement in Water, Shallow Stream over Sandf118b
Giotto: Chastity (Lower Church, Assisi)f119
Pinturicchio: Mural Painting (Piccolomini Chapel, Siena)f120
Diagram showing the Principal Fundamental Plans or Systems of Line governing Mural Spacing and Decorative Distributionf121
Diagram to show how the apparent Depth of a Space is increased by the Use of Vertical Lines, and its apparent Width by the Use of Horizontal Linesf122
Decorative Spacing of the Wall: Sketches (to half-inch scale) to show different Treatment and Proportionsf123
Figure of Laura, from the Burgundian Tapestries: The Triumphs of Petrarch, in the South Kensington Museumf124
Pinturicchio: Fresco in the Appartimenti Borgiaf125
Portion of Detail of the Holy Carpet of the Mosque of Ardebil: Persian, sixteenth centuryf126
[xv]Sketch to illustrate Treatment of Borders in a Persian Rugf127
Arras Tapestry: Diagrams to show the Principle of Working and Surface Effectf128
Contrasting Surfaces in Warp and Weft in Woven Silk Hangingf129
Indian printed Cotton Cover: South Kensington Museumf130
Stained Glass Treatment: Inclosure of Form and Colour by Lead Linesf131
Sketch to show Effect of the same Colour and Form upon different Coloured Groundsf132
Principle of the Effect of the Blending or Blurring of Colours at their Edgesf133
Use of Black and White Outline to clear the Edges of Coloured Forms upon different Coloured Groundf133
J. Van Eyck: Portrait of J. Arnolfini and his Wifef134
Ver Meer of Delft: Lady at a Spinetf135
Botticelli: The Nativityf136
Holbein: The Ambassadorsf137
Botticelli: Madonna and Childf138
Crivelli: The Annunciationf139
Perugino: The Virgin in Adoration with St. Michael and St. Raphael, and Tobiasf140
Titian: Bacchus and Ariadnef141
Madox Brown: Christ Washing St. Peter's Feetf142


OF LINE AND FORM

CHAPTER I

Origin and Function of Outline—Silhouette—Definition of Boundaries by—Power of Characterization by—Formation of Letters—Methods of Drawing in Line—The Progressive Method—The Calligraphic Method—The Tentative Method—The Japanese Direct Brush Method—The Oval Method—The Rectangular Method—Quality of Line—Linear Expression of Movement—Textures—Emotion—Scale of Linear Expression.

Origin and Function of Outline—Silhouette—Definition of Boundaries by—Power of Characterization by—Formation of Letters—Methods of Drawing in Line—The Progressive Method—The Calligraphic Method—The Tentative Method—The Japanese Direct Brush Method—The Oval Method—The Rectangular Method—Quality of Line—Linear Expression of Movement—Textures—Emotion—Scale of Linear Expression.

Outline, one might say, is the Alpha and Omega of Art. It is the earliest mode of expression among primitive peoples, as it is with the individual child, and it has been cultivated for its power of characterization and expression, and as an ultimate test of draughtsmanship, by the most accomplished artists of all time.

Outline is often considered the beginning and end of Art. It's the first form of expression seen in primitive cultures, just like with young children, and it's been refined for its ability to characterize and convey emotion, serving as a final test of drawing skills for the most skilled artists throughout history.

The old fanciful story of its origin in the work of a lover who traced in charcoal the boundary of the shadow of the head of his sweetheart as cast upon the wall by the sun, and thus obtained the first profile portrait, is probably more true in substance than in fact, but it certainly illustrates the function of outline as the definition of the boundaries of form.

The old, imaginative tale about its origin—where a lover used charcoal to trace the outline of his sweetheart's shadow on the wall created by the sun, leading to the first profile portrait—is likely more significant in meaning than in reality, but it definitely highlights the function of outline as a way to define the edges of form.

Silhouette [2]

Silhouette [2]

As children we probably perceive forms in nature defined as flat shapes of colour relieved upon other colours, or flat fields of light on dark, as a white horse is defined upon the green grass of a field, or a black figure upon a background of snow.

As kids, we likely see shapes in nature as flat designs of color set against other colors, or as light fields on dark backgrounds, like a white horse standing out on green grass, or a black figure against a snowy backdrop.

Silhouette
Silhouette

Definition of Boundaries

Boundaries Defined

To define the boundaries of such forms becomes the main object in early attempts at artistic expression. The attention is caught by the edges—the shape of the silhouette which remains the paramount means of distinction of form when details and secondary [3]characteristics are lost; as the outlines of mountains remain, or are even more clearly seen, when distance subdues the details of their structure, and evening mists throw them into flat planes one behind the other, and leave nothing but the delicate lines of their edges to tell their character. We feel the beauty and simplicity of such effects in nature. We feel that the mind, through the eye resting upon these quiet planes and delicate lines, receives a sense of repose and poetic suggestion which is lost in the bright noontide, with all its wealth of glittering detail, sharp cut in light and shade. There is no doubt that this typical power of outline and the value of simplicity of mass were perceived by the ancients, notably the Ancient Egyptians and the Greeks, who both, in their own ways, in their art show a wonderful power of characterization by means of line and mass, and a delicate sense of the ornamental value and quality of line.

Defining the boundaries of these forms became the main focus in early attempts at artistic expression. Attention is drawn to the edges—the shape of the silhouette, which remains the key way to distinguish form when details and secondary characteristics are lost. Just like the outlines of mountains stand out, or are even more visible, when distance softens the details of their structure, and evening mists create a flat layering effect, leaving only the delicate lines of their edges to convey their identity. We appreciate the beauty and simplicity of such effects in nature. We sense that the mind, through the eye resting on these calm planes and delicate lines, receives a feeling of peace and poetic suggestion that's absent in the bright midday sun, with all its dazzling details, sharply contrasted in light and shadow. It's clear that this defining power of outline and the importance of simplicity in mass were recognized by the ancients, especially the Ancient Egyptians and the Greeks, who both, in their unique ways, displayed a remarkable ability to characterize through line and mass, along with a refined appreciation for the ornamental value and quality of line.

Coast and Mountain Lines, Gulf of Nauplia

Formation of Letters [4]

Letter Formation [4]

Regarding line—the use of outline from the point of view of its value as a means of definition of form and fact—its power is really only limited by the power of draughtsmanship at the command of the artist. From the archaic potters' primitive figures or the rudimentary attempts of children at human or animal forms up to the most refined outlines of a Greek vase-painter, or say the artist of the Dream of Poliphilus, the difference is one of degree. The tyro with the pen, learning to write, splotches and scratches, and painfully forms trembling, limping O's and A's, till with practice and habitude, almost unconsciously, the power to form firm letters is acquired.

When it comes to line—the use of outline in defining form and fact—its effectiveness really only depends on the artist's drawing skills. From the basic shapes created by ancient potters or the simple efforts of children trying to depict humans or animals, to the intricate outlines of a Greek vase painter or the artist of the Dream of Poliphilus, the difference is just a matter of degree. A beginner with a pen, learning to write, makes messy scribbles and awkward shapes, struggling to create shaky, imperfect O's and A's, until, with practice and time, they almost unconsciously gain the ability to form solid letters.

Writing, after all, is but a simpler form of drawing, and we know that the letters of our alphabet were originally pictures or symbols. The main difference is that writing stops short with the acquisition of the purely useful power of forming letters and words, and is seldom pursued for the sake of its beauty or artistic qualities as formerly; while drawing continually leads on to new difficulties to be conquered, to new subtleties of line, and fresh fascinations in the pursuit of distinction and style.

Writing is just a simpler version of drawing, and we know that the letters in our alphabet originally started as pictures or symbols. The main difference is that writing usually stops at just learning how to form letters and words, and isn't often pursued for its beauty or artistic qualities like it used to be; whereas drawing continually presents new challenges to overcome, new nuances in line, and fresh attractions in the quest for uniqueness and style.

Proportions of Roman Capital Letters and Method of Drawing Them (From Albert Dürer's  “;Geometrica”;).

The practice of forming letters with the pen or brush, from good types, Roman and Gothic, however, would afford very good preliminary practice to a student of line and form. The hand would acquire directness of stroke and touch, while the eye would grow accustomed to good lines of composition and simple constructive forms. The progressive nature of writing—the gradual building up of the forms of the letters—and the necessity of [5]dealing with recurring forms and lines, also, would bear usefully upon after work in actual design. Albert Dürer in his "Geometrica" gives methods on which to draw the Roman capitals, and also the black letters, building the former upon the square and its proportions, the thickness of the down strokes being one-eighth of square, the thin strokes [6]being one-sixteenth, and the serifs being turned by circles of one-fourth and one-eighth diameter. The capital O, it will be noted, is formed of two circles struck diagonally.

The practice of creating letters with a pen or brush, using quality styles like Roman and Gothic, would provide excellent foundational practice for a student focused on line and form. The hand would develop a direct and confident stroke, while the eye would become familiar with effective composition and basic structural forms. The progressive nature of writing—the gradual construction of letter forms—and the need to work with repeating shapes and lines would also benefit future work in real design. Albert Dürer, in his "Geometrica," outlines methods for drawing Roman capitals and black letters, constructing the former based on the square and its proportions, with the thickness of the down strokes being one-eighth of the square, the thin strokes being one-sixteenth, and the serifs created with circles of one-fourth and one-eighth diameter. It’s worth noting that the capital O is made of two diagonally placed circles.

Proportions of Lower-Case German Text and Method of Drawing the Letters (From Albert Dürer's “;Geometrica”;).

Methods of Drawing in Line

Line Drawing Techniques

Letters may be taken as the simplest form of definition by means of line. They have been reduced through centuries of use from their primitive hieroglyphic forms to their present arbitrary and fixed types, though even these fixed types are subject to the variation produced by changes of taste and fancy.

Letters can be seen as the most basic way to define through lines. Over centuries, they have evolved from their original hieroglyphic shapes to their current established and fixed forms, though even these fixed forms can change due to shifts in taste and style.

But when we come to unformulated nature—to the vast world of complex forms, ever changing their aspect, full of life and movement, trees, flowers, woods and waters, birds, beasts, fishes, the human form—the problem how to represent any of these forms, to express and characterize them by means of so abstract a method as line-drawing, seems at first difficult enough.

But when we encounter unstructured nature— the enormous realm of intricate forms, constantly changing their appearance, brimming with life and motion, including trees, flowers, forests, waters, birds, animals, fish, and the human figure—the challenge of representing any of these forms, of expressing and defining them through such an abstract method as line drawing, initially seems quite difficult.

But since the growth of perception, like the power of graphic representation, is gradual and partial, though progressive, the eye and the mind are generally first impressed with the salient features and leading characteristics of natural forms, just as the child's first idea of a human form is that of a body with four straight limbs, with a preponderating head. That is the first impression, and it is unhesitatingly recorded in infantine outline.

But since the growth of perception, like the ability to represent images, is gradual and partial, though it progresses over time, the eye and the mind are usually first struck by the most noticeable features and key characteristics of natural forms, just like a child's first idea of a human shape is that of a body with four straight limbs and a larger head. That’s the first impression, and it is clearly captured in a child’s drawing.

The first aim, then, in drawing anything in line is to grasp the general truths of form, character, and expression.

The first goal in drawing anything is to understand the basic truths of shape, personality, and expression.

The Progressive Method

The Progressive Approach

There are various methods of proceeding in getting an outline of any object or figure. To begin with, the student might begin progressively defining [7]the form by a series of stages in this way. Take the profile of a bird, for instance; the form might be gradually built up by the combination of a series of lines:

There are different ways to create an outline of any object or figure. First, the student could start by progressively defining the form in a series of steps. For example, take the profile of a bird; the shape could be gradually constructed by combining a set of lines:

figure

or take the simpler form of a flask bottle:

or use the simpler form of a flask bottle:

figure

or a jar on the same principle:

or a jar based on the same idea:

figure

or, simpler still, a leaf form, putting in the stem first with one stroke (1):

or, even simpler, a leaf shape, starting with the stem in one stroke (1):

figure

and building the form around it (2, 3).

and shaping the structure around it (2, 3).

The Calligraphic Method

The Calligraphic Method

figure

This might be termed the calligraphic method of drawing; and in this method facility of hand might be further practised by attempting the definition of forms by continuous strokes, or building it up by [8]as few strokes as possible. The simpler types of ornament consisting of meandering and flowing lines can all be produced in this way, i.e., by continuous line, as well as natural forms treated in a [9]certain abstract or conventional way, which adapts them to decoration.

This could be called the calligraphic method of drawing; in this method, you can further practice your hand skills by trying to define shapes with continuous strokes or building them up with [8] as few strokes as possible. The simpler types of ornament, made up of winding and flowing lines, can all be created this way, meaning with a continuous line, as well as natural forms treated in a [9] certain abstract or conventional way, which makes them suitable for decoration.

The Tentative Method

The Preliminary Approach

figure

Another method is to sketch in lightly guide lines for main masses, building a sort of scaffolding of light lines to assist the eye in getting the correct outline in its place, using vertical centre lines for symmetrical forms to get the poise right. [10]This is the method very generally in use, but I think it very desirable to practise direct drawing as well, to acquire certainty of eye and facility of hand; and one must not mind failure at first, as this kind of power and facility is so much a matter of practice.

Another method is to lightly draw guide lines for the main shapes, creating a kind of framework of soft lines to help the eye find the correct outline in its place, using vertical center lines for symmetrical forms to ensure balance. [10]This method is commonly used, but I think it's important to practice direct drawing too, to develop accuracy in your eye and ease in your hand; and you shouldn’t worry about failing at first, as this skill and ease come mainly from practice.

figure

The Japanese Direct Brush Method

The Japanese Direct Brush Technique

The Japanese, who draw with the brush, have accustomed themselves to draw in a direct manner without any preliminary sketching, and the charm of their work is largely owing to that crisp freshness of touch only possible to their direct method. The great object is to establish a perfectly intimate correspondence between eye and hand, so that the latter will record what the former perceives.

The Japanese, who paint with a brush, have trained themselves to create directly without any preliminary sketches, and the appeal of their work comes from that sharp freshness of touch that's only achievable through their direct method. The main goal is to establish a completely intimate connection between the eye and the hand, so that the hand captures exactly what the eye sees.

Abundant specimens of the freedom and naturalism of the modern school of Japanese artists in this direct brush method may be found in the work of Bari, Hiroshigi, and Hokusai, and in the numerous prints and books of designs from their hands. To all draughtsmen and designers they are most valuable to study for their direct method and simple means of expression of form and fact. Accidental as they frequently seem in composition, the placing of the drawing upon the paper is carefully considered before starting, and this, of course, is always a very important point.

Abundant examples of the freedom and naturalism of the modern Japanese art movement can be seen in the work of Bari, Hiroshigi, and Hokusai, along with the many prints and design books they produced. For all artists and designers, they are incredibly valuable to study for their straightforward approach and simple ways of expressing form and reality. Although their compositions may often appear random, the arrangement of the drawing on the paper is thoughtfully planned out beforehand, which is always a crucial aspect.

Yet another method of drawing, more especially in relation to the drawing of the human figure and animal forms, I may mention as a help to those who do not feel strong enough for the direct method. At the same time it must be borne in mind that we can accustom ourselves to any method; and the more dependent we become upon a single [11]method, the less facility we shall have for working in any other. But for all that it is desirable to master one method—that is, to be able to draw in line freely in one way or another—and experience and practice alone will enable us to find the method most satisfactory.

Another approach to drawing, especially concerning the human figure and animal shapes, is worth mentioning for those who may not feel confident with the direct method. It's important to remember that we can adapt to any method; the more reliant we become on just one [11] method, the less flexibility we’ll have in using others. However, it’s still important to master one method—that is, to be able to draw in lines freely in some way—and only through experience and practice will we discover which method works best for us.

The Oval and Rectangular Methods

The Oval and Rectangle Methods

figure

The Rectangular Method

The Rectangle Method

This other method is to block in the principal [12]masses of the forms we desire to represent by means of a series of ovals, as shown in the illustration, and when we have got the masses in their proper relations, to proceed to draw in the careful outline of the figure, or whatever it may be, upon this substructure of guiding lines, correcting as we go along. It would be quite possible to work on the same principle, but upon a structure of more or less rectangular masses. The real use of the method is to assist the student to get a grasp of the relation of the masses of a figure and a sense of structure in drawing; whether square or oval blocking in is used may be a matter of choice. It may be said for the oval forms that they resemble the contours of the structure in human and animal forms.

This other method involves blocking in the main shapes of the forms we want to represent using a series of ovals, as illustrated. Once the shapes are in their correct positions, we can draw the detailed outline of the figure or whatever it may be, based on this framework of guiding lines, making adjustments as we go. It’s also possible to work using the same approach, but with a framework of more or less rectangular shapes. The main purpose of this method is to help students understand the relationship between the shapes of a figure and develop a sense of structure in their drawings; whether they use square or oval shapes is a matter of personal preference. The oval forms are beneficial because they mimic the contours found in human and animal structures.

If one had a tendency to round one's forms too much, it would be well to try the rectangular method to correct this, and vice versâ.

If someone tends to overly round their shapes, it would be a good idea to try using a rectangular approach to fix this, and vice versa.

After a certain facility has been acquired in rendering form by means of line, we shall perceive further capacities of expression in its use, and begin to note how different characteristics of form and natural fact may be expressed by varying the quality of our outline.

Once we get comfortable with creating shapes using lines, we'll start to notice more ways to express ourselves through them. We'll begin to see how different traits of shape and reality can be conveyed by changing the quality of our outlines.

If we are drawing a plant or a flower, for instance, we should endeavour to show by the quality of our line the difference between the fine springing curves in the structure of the lily, the solid seed-centre and stiff radiation of the petals of the daisy, and the delicate silky folds of the poppy.

If we're drawing a plant or a flower, for example, we should try to show through the quality of our lines the differences between the graceful curves in the structure of the lily, the firm seed center and rigid petals of the daisy, and the soft silky folds of the poppy.

Quality of Line

Line Quality

But, as leaves come before flowers, it would be best to begin with leaf forms and try to express the character of oak and beech, lime and chestnut [13]leaves, for instance, by means of outline. Probably at first we shall feel dissatisfied with our outline as not being full enough: it may look meagre in quality and small in definition of form. This [14]probably arises from not allowing enough space—from setting the outline too much within the boundary of the form. To correct this one cannot do better than block in the form of the object we are drawing (leaf, flower, or figure) with a full brush in black silhouette, placing the object against the light or white paper, so that its true boundary may be seen uninterfered with by surface markings or shadows, and, concentrating our attention upon the edge, follow it as carefully as possible with the solid black. Then, if we compare the result with our outline, it will help to show where it has failed; and the practice of thus blocking in with the brush in solid silhouette will tend to encourage a larger style of drawing, since good outline means good perception of mass; and as a general principle in drawing, it may be recommended to place one's [15]outline outside the silhouette boundary of the form rather than within it; that is to say, when the figure or object is relieved in light against dark, as the line in that case defines the edge against the background. When the figure or object appears as dark upon a light ground, however, the outline should be within the silhouette, obviously, or its delicate boundary is lost.

But, just as leaves appear before flowers, it’s better to start with leaf shapes and try to capture the essence of oak, beech, lime, and chestnut leaves, for example, through outline. At first, we might feel unsatisfied with our outline, thinking it isn’t detailed enough—it might seem lacking in quality and unclear in form. This usually happens because we don’t allow enough space by positioning the outline too tightly within the form’s boundaries. To fix this, it’s helpful to sketch the shape of the object we’re drawing (whether it’s a leaf, flower, or figure) using a full brush and solid black silhouette, placing the object against light or white paper, so its true edges can be seen without interference from surface textures or shadows. By focusing on the edge, we should carefully trace it with solid black. Then, if we compare the outcome with our outline, it will highlight where we fell short; and practicing this method of blocking in with a brush in solid silhouette will encourage a more expansive drawing style, as a good outline indicates a good understanding of mass. As a general rule in drawing, it’s advisable to position your [15] outline outside the silhouette boundary of the form instead of within it; in other words, when the figure or object stands out in light against a dark background, since the line will then define the edge against the backdrop. However, when the figure or object appears dark on a light background, the outline should be inside the silhouette, or else its delicate edges will be lost.

Silhouette of Beech Leaves and Line Rendering of the Same.

Linear Expression of Movement

Straight-Line Movement Expression

Another important attribute of line is its power of expressing or suggesting movement. By a law of inseparable association, undulating lines approaching the horizontal, or leading down to it, are connected with the sense of repose; whereas broken curves and rectangular lines always suggest action and unrest, or the resistance to force of some kind.

Another important feature of line is its ability to express or suggest movement. Due to a natural connection, wavy lines that are close to horizontal or dip down towards it are associated with a feeling of calm; on the other hand, jagged curves and rectangular lines tend to indicate action and restlessness, or the struggle against some form of force.

Lines of Movement

The recurrence of a series of lines in the same direction in a kind of crescendo or wave-like movement suggests continuous pressure of force in the same direction, as in this series of instantaneous actions of a man bowling, where the line drawn through or touching the highest points in [16]each figure takes the line of the curve of a wave. The wave-line, indeed, may be said not only to suggest movement, but also to describe its direction and force. It is, in fact, the line of movement. The principle may be seen in a simpler way, as Hogarth points out in his "Analysis of Beauty," by observing the line described along a wall by the head of a man walking along the street. Or, as we may see sometimes near the coast, trees exposed to the constant pressure of the wind illustrate this recurrence of lines in the same direction governing their general shape; and as each tree is forced to spread in the direction away from the wind, the effect is that of their being always struggling against its pressure even in the calmest weather; and this is entirely due to our association of wind-movement with this peculiar linear expression.

The repetition of lines moving in the same direction, almost like a crescendo or wave, indicates ongoing force pushing in that direction, as seen in the sequence of immediate actions of a person bowling. The line that connects the highest points in [16] each figure follows the curve of a wave. The wave-like line not only implies movement but also shows its direction and strength. It is, essentially, the line of movement. This idea can be understood more easily, as Hogarth mentions in his "Analysis of Beauty," by looking at the line traced along a wall by a person's head while walking down the street. Similarly, we can observe along the coast that trees shaped by the constant force of the wind demonstrate this repetition of lines all pointing the same way. Each tree is pushed to extend away from the wind, creating the impression that they are always battling against its force, even during the quietest weather; this perception is entirely linked to our connection of wind movement with this unique linear form.

Lines Expressive of Movement: Effect of Wind Upon Trees

Flowing water, again, is expressed by certain recurring wave-lines, which remind us of the ancient linear symbols of the zigzag and meander used from the earliest times to express water. In the [17]streams that channel the sands of the sea-shore when the tide recedes we may see beautiful flowing lines, sometimes crossing like a network, and sometimes running into a series of shell-like waves; while the sands themselves are ribbed and channelled and modelled by the recurring movement [18]of the waves, which leave upon them the impress and the expression of their motion (much as in a more delicate medium the air-currents impress the fields of cloud, and give them their characteristic forms).

Flowing water is represented by certain repeating wave patterns that remind us of the ancient zigzag and meander symbols used for water since ancient times. In the [17]streams that shape the sands of the beach when the tide goes out, we can see beautiful flowing lines that sometimes intersect like a network and other times create a series of shell-like waves. The sands themselves are ridged, channeled, and shaped by the constant movement [18]of the waves, which leave behind impressions and expressions of their motion (similar to how air currents leave their mark on clouds, shaping them into distinctive forms).

Line Arrangement In Ribbed Sea Sand

Linear Expression of Textures

Linear Textures Expression

Textures and surfaces, too, fall within the range of linear expression. One would naturally use lines of totally different consistency and character to express rough or smooth surfaces: to express the difference of value, for instance, between the ivory-like smoothness of an egg and the scaly surface of a pine-cone, entirely different qualities of line are obviously wanted. The firm-set yet soft feathers of the plumage of a bird must be rendered by a very different touch from the shining scales of a fish. The hair and horns of animals, delicate human features, flowers, the sinuous lines of thin drapery, or the broad massive folds of heavy robes, all demand from the designer and draughtsman in line different kinds of suggestive expression, a translation or rendering of natural fact subordinate to the artistic purpose of his work, and in relation to the material and purpose for which he works.

Textures and surfaces also fall under the category of linear expression. Naturally, you would use lines with totally different qualities to represent rough or smooth surfaces. For example, to show the contrast between the ivory-like smoothness of an egg and the scaly surface of a pine cone, you clearly need entirely different types of lines. The firm yet soft feathers of a bird's plumage must be captured with a very different technique than the shiny scales of a fish. The hair and horns of animals, delicate human features, flowers, the flowing lines of light fabric, or the broad, heavy folds of thick robes all require different kinds of expressive techniques from the designer and draftsman. This is about translating or representing natural characteristics in a way that serves the artistic intent of the work and is appropriate for the material and purpose at hand.

Linear Expression of Emotion

Linear Emotion Expression

Then, again, when we come to the expression of ideas—of thought and sentiment—we find in line an abstract but direct medium for their illustration; and this again, too, by means of that law of inseparable association which connects the idea of praise or aspiration and ascension, for instance, with long lines inclining towards the severe vertical, as when we draw a figure with upraised hands; while the feeling might be increased if led up to or re-echoed by other groups and objects in the [19]composition, forming a kind of vertical crescendo on the same principle which we were considering in regard to the expression of lateral movement. Few things in design are finer or more elevated in feeling than William Blake's design of the Morning Stars singing together, in the series of the Book [20]of Job, yet it is little more than a vertical arrangement of figures with uplifted and intercrossing arms. The linear plan gives the main impetus to the expressiveness of the design, and is the basis [21]of the beauty, which culminates in the rapture of the fresh youthful faces.

Then again, when we express ideas—thoughts and feelings—we find that lines serve as a simple yet direct way to illustrate them. This happens because of the law of inseparable association, which connects the concept of praise or aspiration and upward movement with long lines leaning toward the strict vertical, like when we draw a figure with raised hands. The emotion could be heightened if it is echoed by other groups and objects in the [19]composition, creating a sort of vertical crescendo, similar to what we discussed regarding the expression of lateral movement. Few things in design are as beautiful or uplifting as William Blake's depiction of the Morning Stars singing together in the series of the Book [20]of Job, yet it’s just a vertical arrangement of figures with lifted and intercrossed arms. The linear structure gives the main drive to the expressiveness of the design and forms the foundation [21]of the beauty, which reaches its peak in the joy of the fresh youthful faces.

Scale of Linear Expression

Scale of Linear Equation

Bowed and bent lines tending downwards, on the other hand, convey the opposite ideas of dejection and despair. This is illustrated in these figures of Flaxman's, who was a great master of style in outline.

Bowed and bent lines leaning downward, on the other hand, express the opposite feelings of sadness and hopelessness. This is shown in these figures by Flaxman, who was a great master of outline style.

Lines Of Grief And Dejection. Flaxman: Designs To Homer.

Capacity of Line

Line Capacity

We seem here to discover a kind of scale of linear expression—the two extremes at either end: the horizontal and the vertical, with every degree and modulation between them; the undulating curve giving way to the springing energetic spiral, the meandering, flowing line sinking to the horizontal: or the sharp opposition and thrust of rectangular, the nervous resistance of broken curves, the flame-like, triumphant, ascending verticals. Truly the designer may find a great range of expression within the dominion of pure line. Line is, indeed, as I have before termed it, a [22]language, a most sensitive and vigorous speech of many dialects; which can adapt itself to all purposes, and is, indeed, indispensable to all the provinces of design in line. Line may be regarded simply as a means of record, a method of registering the facts of nature, of graphically portraying the characteristics of plants and animals, or the features of humanity: the smooth features of youth, the rugged lines of age. It is capable of this, and more also, since it can appeal to our emotions and evoke our passionate and poetic sympathies with both the life of humanity and wild nature, as in the hands of the great masters it lifts us to the heavens or bows us down to earth: we may stand on the sea-shore and see the movement of the falling waves, the fierce energy of the storm and its rolling armament of clouds, glittering with the sudden zigzag of the lightning; or we may sink into the profound calm of a summer day, when the mountains, defined only by their edges, wrapped in soft planes of mist, seem to recline upon the level meadows like Titans and dream of the golden age.

We seem to find a kind of scale of linear expression here—the two extremes at either end: horizontal and vertical, with every degree and variation in between; the flowing curve giving way to the energetic spiral, the meandering line sinking to the horizontal, or the sharp contrast and force of rectangular shapes, the tense resistance of broken curves, the flame-like, triumphant, rising verticals. Truly, the designer can explore a vast range of expression within the realm of pure line. Line is, as I've mentioned before, a language, a sensitive and dynamic communication with many dialects; it can adapt to all purposes and is essential for all areas of line design. Line can simply be seen as a means of recording, a method of capturing the facts of nature, graphically representing the characteristics of plants and animals, or the features of humanity: the smooth contours of youth, the rugged lines of age. It’s capable of this and even more, as it can connect with our emotions and evoke our passionate and poetic sympathies with both human life and wild nature. In the hands of great masters, it can lift us to the heavens or bring us down to earth: we might stand on the shore and feel the movement of crashing waves, the fierce energy of a storm and its rolling clouds, glittering with sudden flashes of lightning; or we might sink into the deep calm of a summer day, when the mountains, defined only by their edges, wrapped in soft layers of mist, seem to recline on the flat meadows like giants, dreaming of a golden age.

figure

CHAPTER II

The Language of Line—Dialects—Comparison of the Style of various Artists in Line—Scale of Degrees in Line—Picture Writing—Relation of Line to Form—Two Paths—The Graphic Purpose—Aspect—The Ornamental Purpose—Typical Treatment or Convention—Rhythm—Linear Plans in Pattern Designing—Wall-paper Design—Controlling Forms—Memory—Evolution in Design—Variety in Unity—Counterbalance—Linear Logic—Recurring Line and Form—Principle of Radiation—Range and Use of Line.

The Language of Line—Dialects—Comparison of the Style of various Artists in Line—Scale of Degrees in Line—Picture Writing—Relation of Line to Form—Two Paths—The Graphic Purpose—Aspect—The Ornamental Purpose—Typical Treatment or Convention—Rhythm—Linear Plans in Pattern Designing—Wall-paper Design—Controlling Forms—Memory—Evolution in Design—Variety in Unity—Counterbalance—Linear Logic—Recurring Line and Form—Principle of Radiation—Range and Use of Line.

I spoke of Line as a Language, and gave some illustrations of its power and range of expression, showing that line is capable not only of recording natural fact and defining character, but also of conveying the idea of movement and force, of action and repose; and, further, of appealing to our emotions and thoughts by variations and changes in its direction, the degree of its emphasis, and other qualities.

I chatted about Line as a Language and provided some examples of its strength and variety of expression, showing that line can not only document natural facts and define character but also convey the idea of movement and energy, action and stillness. Additionally, it can engage our emotions and thoughts through changes in direction, the intensity of its emphasis, and other attributes.

Dialects

Dialects

Yet every designer and draughtsman uses line in a different way, and of a different quality, according to his preference, habit, training, or personality. The endless variations which result I should—to pursue the analogy of speech further—term dialects. We might collect abundant examples of these from the work of line-designers since the world began, or compare the methods of any of the popular illustrators of to-day to find constant [24]variations and individual differences occurring even among those which might be said, under the influence of a prevailing mode, to be variations of one type.

Yet every designer and draftsman uses lines in different ways, with varying qualities, based on their personal preferences, habits, training, or personalities. The endless variations that come from this I would—if I were to extend the speech analogy—call dialects. We could gather numerous examples of these from the work of line designers throughout history, or compare the techniques of any of today's popular illustrators to find constant variations and individual differences, even among those that could be considered, influenced by a dominant style, variations of one type.

Compare a Greek vase-painter's delicate brush line-drawing with the bold pen-line of Albert Dürer (to get a contrast in historic style). Compare (to take two masters of different schools, but of the same country) the line-treatment of Mantegna with the line-treatment of Raphael; or, to take another jump, compare the line-work of Blake and Flaxman; or, to take a modern instance, and to come to our own contemporary artists, compare a drawing by Burne-Jones and one by Phil May.

Compare the delicate brush line drawing of a Greek vase painter with the bold pen lines of Albert Dürer to see the difference in historical styles. Look at the line techniques of Mantegna and Raphael, who come from different schools but the same country; or, to mix it up, compare the line work of Blake and Flaxman; or, for a modern example, check out a drawing by Burne-Jones versus one by Phil May.

We might construct a sort of scale of the degrees and qualities of line.

We might create a scale of the different degrees and qualities of line.

There is, for instance, outline of every degree of boldness or fineness, from the strong black half-inch outline and upwards used in mosaic-work and stained-glass leading; the outline of the pattern designer for block-printing; the outline of the pen draughtsman for process-work or woodcut; and so on, down to the hair-line of the drypoint etcher.

There is, for example, a range of outlines for every level of boldness or delicateness, starting from the strong black half-inch outline and going up, which are used in mosaic work and stained-glass leading; the outline of the pattern designer for block printing; the outline of the pen draftsperson for process work or woodcut; and so on, all the way down to the hairline used by the drypoint etcher.

Scale of Degrees in Line

Degree Scale Inline

There are the qualities of line in different degrees of firmness, roughness, raggedness, or smooth and flowing. There are the degrees of direction of line, curvilinear or angular. On the angular side all variations from the perpendicular and horizontal, or rectangle, within which we may find all these degrees, and on the curvilinear side, all the variations from spiral to circle: so that we might say that the rectangle was the cradle of all [25]angular variations of line, while the semicircle was the cradle of all curvilinear variations. (See the diagrams on p. 26.)

There are the qualities of lines that vary in firmness, roughness, jaggedness, or are smooth and flowing. There are the degrees of direction of lines, whether curvy or angular. On the angular side, we see all variations from what’s vertical and horizontal, or rectangular, which encompasses all these degrees. On the curvy side, we have all variations from spirals to circles: so we could say that the rectangle is the foundation of all angular variations of line, while the semicircle is the foundation of all curvilinear variations. (See the diagrams on p. 26.)

Scale of Various Degrees of Linear Weight and Emphasis.

Every artist, sooner or later, by means of his selective adaptive sense, finds a method in the [26]use of line to suit his own personality—to suit his own individual aim in artistic expression—and in course of time it becomes a characteristic manner, by which his work is instantly known, like a friend's handwriting.

Every artist, eventually, through their unique adaptive sense, discovers a way of using line that reflects their personality and individual goals in artistic expression. Over time, this develops into a distinct style, making their work instantly recognizable, just like a friend's handwriting.

Curvilinear And Rectangular Scales Of Direction.

Now what determines this choice, this personal selection, over and above necessities of method and material, it would be difficult to say, unless [27]we had more minute knowledge of the natural history of a human being than we are likely to possess. We can only say that from practice are evolved certain methods or principles, consciously or unconsciously; and it is only these general methods or principles that can be explained and tested for the benefit of those essaying to follow the arduous and difficult path of art.

Now, what influences this choice, this personal selection, beyond the necessities of technique and materials, is hard to pinpoint, unless [27] we had a deeper understanding of the natural history of a human being than we are likely to have. We can only say that through practice, certain methods or principles develop, whether we are aware of them or not; and it is only these general methods or principles that can be explained and tested for the benefit of those trying to navigate the challenging and demanding path of art.

Relation of Line to Form

Connection of Line to Shape

At the outset we see that we need a means of definition in drawing, just as a child needs a word to express a thing it wants. Line, at the point of the pencil, pen, or brush, places this possibility of definition within our reach; but before we can grasp it we need some knowledge, however rudimentary, of its inseparable companion, Form.

At the beginning, we notice that we need a way to define things in drawing, just like a child needs a word to express what it wants. Line, at the tip of the pencil, pen, or brush, brings this chance for definition within our grasp; but before we can understand it, we need some basic knowledge of its essential partner, Form.

I recall two innocent and entertaining methods from the traditions of the nursery, which appeal at once in a curious way to both the oral and graphic senses, and unite story and picture in one. These are illustrated on p. 28. By such devices a child learns to associate line and form, unconsciously and step by step defining form in the use of, or pursuit of, line. [28]

I remember two simple and fun methods from nursery traditions that interestingly engage both the spoken and visual senses, combining story and illustration in one. These are shown on p. 28. Through these methods, a child learns to connect lines and shapes, gradually and unintentionally defining shapes through the use or pursuit of lines. [28]

It would be very entertaining and agreeable if we could carry the principle further, and get a passable study from the antique, for instance, by a similar process. In line-drawing we may, however, always tell some story or fact, or character, phase, or idea.

It would be really fun and enjoyable if we could take this idea further and create a decent study from the past, for example, using a similar method. In line drawing, we can always convey some story, fact, character, moment, or concept.

The Graphic Purpose

The Graphic Goal

But supposing we have mounted our steed Form, and taken our bridle Line in hand, and have started riding at large in the vast domain of nature, with the primary object of finding and hunting down truth at last; we soon perceive that there [29] are so many truths, or rather that truth, even of natural fact, has so many sides, that it is difficult to make up our mind which one to pursue. Thought, however, will soon discover that in this pursuit of truth we strike a road that naturally divides itself, or branches out, into two main paths distinct in aim. These two paths in art have been called by many names; they occasionally cross each other, or overlap, and are sometimes blended, or even confused; but it will be useful for our present purpose to keep them very distinct. I will term them, for convenience:

But let’s say we’ve mounted our ride Form, grasped our reins Line, and started exploring the vast landscape of nature, aiming to discover and find the truth at last; we quickly realize that there are so many truths, or rather that truth, even in natural facts, has so many facets that it's hard to decide which one to follow. However, thought will soon reveal that in this quest for truth, we encounter a path that naturally splits into two main routes with different goals. These two paths in art have been given many names; they sometimes intersect or overlap, and can even blend or become confused; yet for our current discussion, it will be helpful to keep them clearly separate. For convenience, I will refer to them as:

  1. The Graphic Purpose. (Accidental form.)
  2. The Ornamental Purpose. (Typical form.)

Our use of line will largely depend upon which of these two it is our object to pursue. Now when we look at anything with intent to draw—say a leafy bough as it grows in the sunshine—we see great complexity of form and surface-lighting. The leaves, perhaps, take all manner of variations of the typical form, and are set at all sorts of angles. In making a rapid sketch with the object of getting the appearance of the bough, we naturally dwell upon these accidents and superficial facts. At the same time, with nothing but line to express them, we are compelled to use a kind of convention, though our aim be purely naturalistic, to get a faithful portrait of the bough.

Our use of lines will mostly depend on which of these two we aim to explore. When we look at something with the intention to draw—like a leafy branch in the sunlight—we notice a lot of complexity in its shape and the way light hits the surface. The leaves, for example, might vary greatly from the typical shape and are positioned at various angles. When we quickly sketch to capture the look of the branch, we naturally focus on these details and surface features. However, since we’re limited to using only lines to depict them, we have to rely on a kind of convention, even if our goal is simply to create a true representation of the branch.

We must make our line as descriptive as possible, defining the main forms boldly, and blocking in broadly the main masses of form and light and shade. We are now aiming at the general look of the thing. We are striving to grasp the facts [30]of Aspect. We are concerned with the purely graphic purpose, to make a picture upon paper.

We need to make our line as descriptive as we can, clearly defining the main shapes and broadly outlining the main areas of form, light, and shadow. Right now, we're focusing on the overall appearance of the subject. We're trying to capture the facts [30] of Aspect. Our goal is purely graphic: to create a picture on paper.

We cannot, however, even under these simple [31]conditions, altogether leave out of account considerations which, strictly speaking, must be termed "decorative." For instance, there is the question of placing the study well upon the paper, a very important point to start with; and then the question of beauty must arise, not only in the selection of our point of view, but in the choice of method, in the treatment of line we adopt; and it does not follow that the most apparently forcible way of getting bold projection by means of black shadows, at the cost of the more delicate characteristics of our subject, is the best. On the contrary, the finest draughtsmanship is always the most subtle and delicate, and one cannot get subtle and delicate draughtsmanship without faithful study and careful constant practice—knowledge of form, in short—and I am afraid there is no short cut to it.

We cannot, however, even under these simple [31]conditions, completely ignore considerations that must be called "decorative." For example, there’s the issue of positioning the study correctly on the paper, which is really important to begin with; and then we have to consider beauty, not just in choosing our perspective but also in our method and the way we handle lines. It doesn't mean that the most striking way to achieve bold projection with strong black shadows, sacrificing the finer details of our subject, is the best choice. On the contrary, the best drawing is always the most subtle and delicate, and you can't achieve subtle and delicate drawing without dedicated study and constant practice—essentially, a solid understanding of form—and I’m afraid there’s no easy path to that.

The Ornamental Purpose

The Decorative Purpose

Now supposing we make our study of leaves, not as an end in itself, and for its simple pictorial values or qualities only, but with an ornamental or decorative purpose in view, intending to make use of its form and character in some more or less systematic design or pattern-work—adapted to special methods and materials—intended to decorate a wall-surface or a textile, for instance; we might certainly start with a general sketch of its appearance as before, but we should find that we should want to understand it in its detail; the law of its growth and construction; we should want to dwell upon its typical character and form, the controlling lines of its masses, rather than on its accidental aspects, because it would really be only with these that we could successfully deal in [32]adapting anything in nature to the conditions and limitations of a design. To do this requires as much art as to make a clever graphic sketch, perhaps more; but it is certainly not so easily [33]understood and appreciated, as a rule. Pattern-work is taken so much for granted, except by those technically interested, whereas a graphic sketch may bring the drama of nature, and of human character and incident, before our eyes. It does not require us to stop and think out the less obvious meaning, or trace the invention or grace of line, to appreciate the rhythmic, silent music which the more formalized and abstract decorative design may contain, quite apart from the forms it actually represents.

Now, let’s say we study leaves not just for their beauty or qualities, but with the goal of using them decoratively. We might want to incorporate their shapes and characteristics into some structured design or pattern—tailored to specific methods and materials—to decorate a wall or fabric, for example. We could start with a basic sketch of how they look, but we’d need to dive deeper into the details: the way they grow and are structured. We should focus on their typical shapes and forms, the main lines of their shapes, instead of their random details, because that’s what we really need to work with when adapting something from nature to fit a design's requirements and boundaries. This takes as much skill as creating a great graphic sketch, maybe even more, but it’s generally not as easily grasped or appreciated. People often take pattern design for granted unless they're technically interested, while a graphic sketch can instantly show the drama of nature and human experience. It doesn’t require us to pause and discern the hidden meanings or the elegance of the lines to enjoy the rhythm and subtle beauty in more formalized and abstract decorative designs, completely separate from the actual shapes they represent.

Question and Answer in Line

Q&A in Line

Here we discover another function of line. For, directly we endeavour to construct a decorative design—that is, a design intended to adorn or to express an object or surface—we find that we must build it upon some sort of a plan, or geometric controlling network or scaffolding, so as to give it unity, rhythm, and coherence—especially so in the case of repeating designs. Even in an isolated panel or picture the necessity of this linear basis will be felt, since one cannot draw a line or define a form without demanding an answer—that is, a corresponding, re-echoing line or mass.

Here we discover another function of line. When we try to create a decorative design—that is, a design meant to beautify or express an object or surface—we realize that we need to base it on some kind of plan, geometric framework, or structure, to provide it with unity, rhythm, and coherence—especially for repetitive designs. Even in a standalone panel or picture, the need for this linear foundation will be apparent, as you can't draw a line or define a shape without requiring a response—that is, a corresponding, echoing line or mass.

Curves 1.Q and 2.A

The curve (1. Q) is a proposition or question. It is answered or balanced by the corresponding curve (2. A), and forms the basis for a scroll design.

The curve (1. Q) is a statement or inquiry. It is addressed or matched by the related curve (2. A), and serves as the foundation for a scroll design.

Curves 1 and 2

The five radiating lines (1) are obviously incomplete by themselves, but if we add another [36]four, in reverse order, (2) we get a centred and symmetric motive of an anthemion character.

The five radiating lines (1) are clearly incomplete on their own, but if we add another [36]four in reverse order, (2) we achieve a centered and symmetrical design with an anthemion style.

Wall-Paper Design

Wallpaper Design

Take, however, a wall-paper. The problem is to construct a design pleasant to the eye in line, form, colour, and suggestion; which will be interesting in detail, and yet repeat upon a wall-surface without flaw, and without becoming wearisome. Moreover, one which will lend itself to being cut upon wood, if for block-printing, and which may be reproduced with a due regard to economy of means. The designer may have a square of twenty-one inches in which to make his design.

Take, for instance, wallpaper. The challenge is to create a design that is visually appealing in terms of line, shape, color, and overall feel; one that is interesting in detail but can repeat seamlessly across a wall without flaws or becoming tiresome. Additionally, it should be suitable for being printed on wood for block printing, and it should be designed with an eye toward cost-effectiveness. The designer typically works within a square space of twenty-one inches to develop their design.

Diagram Showing The Use Of A Geometric Basis In Designing Repeating Pattern.

A useful way to begin with is to rule out a sheet of paper into squares, say on the scale of 1-½ inch to the foot, and upon this jot down your first ideas of linear arrangement and colour motive, and get [37]the general effect, and test the plan of repeats. When you are satisfied with one, enlarge it to full size, correct and amplify it, and improve it in form and detail. Changes will probably be found necessary in drawing it upon the larger scale, sometimes additions, sometimes omissions. Now in sketching out the general plan, one builds, as before said, upon some basis or plan, however simple, since one cannot put a simple spot, sprig, or spray upon [38]paper intending to repeat, without some system of connection to put them into relation.

A helpful way to start is to divide a sheet of paper into squares, like using a scale of 1-½ inch to the foot, and on this, write down your initial ideas for layout and color scheme. This will help you see the overall effect and test your repeating pattern. Once you're happy with one, blow it up to full size, revise and enhance it, and refine it in form and detail. You’ll likely need to make changes when drawing it on the larger scale, sometimes adding elements and sometimes taking them away. When sketching out the general design, you build, as mentioned before, on some foundation or plan, however simple, since you can’t just place a simple spot, sprig, or spray on the paper with the intention to repeat it without some system of connection to relate them.

Controlling Forms

Managing Forms

In designing one's sprig, too, the best plan to secure good decorative effect is to see that its general form is inclosed or bounded by an agreeable linear shape, although itself not actually visible. Simple leaf and flower forms are generally the best to use for these controlling boundaries. Sprays designed on this principle may be relied upon for repeating pleasantly and safely when they are placed upon, and connected by, the controlling geometric plan. A good practical test of the truth and completeness of your square repeat is, when the design is done, or even in progress, to cut it into four equal parts (supposing it to be a twenty-one inch square). This will enable you to get the joints true, and also, by altering the position of the squares, to give you a very good idea of the effect of the repeat full size. (See the diagrams on p. 41.)

When designing your sprig, the best way to achieve a good decorative effect is to ensure that its overall shape is framed by a pleasing linear outline, even if that outline isn’t actually visible. Simple leaf and flower shapes are usually the best to use for these guiding boundaries. Sprays designed with this idea in mind can be counted on to repeat nicely and safely when they are placed on and connected by the guiding geometric layout. A practical test to check the accuracy and completeness of your square repeat is to cut the design into four equal parts (assuming it’s a twenty-one-inch square) once it’s finished, or even while it's still in progress. This will help you get the joints right and also allow you to change the position of the squares, giving you a clearer idea of how the full-size repeat will look. (See the diagrams on p. 41.)

These things must be considered, of course, merely as practical aids to invention: not by any means as substitutes for it. One cannot give any recipe for designing, and no rules, principles, or methods can supply the place of imagination and fancy. "He who would bring back health from the Indies," says an old proverb, "must take it out with him."

These things should be viewed as practical tools for creativity, not as replacements for it. There's no instruction manual for designing, and no rules, principles, or methods can replace imagination and creativity. "He who wants to bring back health from the Indies," says an old proverb, "must take it out with him."

At the same time the imagination can be enfeebled by starvation and neglect. It can be depressed by dull and sordid surroundings. It is apt to grow, like other living things, by what it feeds on, and is stronger for exercise and development.

At the same time, imagination can be weakened by lack of nurture and care. It can be brought down by dull and grim surroundings. Like other living things, it tends to grow based on what it consumes and becomes stronger through practice and growth.

Use Of Controlling Boundaries In Designing Sprays

Memory

Memory

Memory, too, is an important and serviceable thing in designing, and this, again, can be cultivated to an almost unlimited extent. I mean that selective kind of memory which, by constant and close observation, extracts and stores up the essential serviceable kind of facts for the designer: facts of form, of structure, of movement of figures, expressive lines, momentary or transitory effects of colour—all those rare and precious visual moments which will not wait, and which happen unexpectedly. They should be captured like rare butterflies and carefully stored in the mind's museum of suggestions, as well as, as far as is [40]possible, pinned down in the hieroglyphics of the note-book.

Memory is also a crucial and useful element in design, and it can be developed to an almost limitless degree. I'm talking about that selective memory which, through constant and detailed observation, gathers and retains the essential and practical facts for the designer: facts about form, structure, movement of figures, expressive lines, fleeting effects of color—all those rare and valuable visual moments that don't linger and occur unexpectedly. They should be captured like rare butterflies and carefully preserved in the mind's collection of ideas, as well as, whenever possible, noted down in the hieroglyphics of the notebook. [40]

Evolution in Design

Design Evolution

As regards procedure in working out a design, one generally thinks of some leading feature, some central mass or form or curve—of a figure or a flower, say—and one thinks of its capacity in repeat; and, since one form or line should inevitably suggest or necessitate—as by a kind of logic—another, one adds other forms until the design is complete. For it must never be forgotten that design is a growth which has its own stages of evolution in the mind, answering to the evolution of the living forms of nature—first the blade, then the ear, after that the full corn in the ear.

When it comes to creating a design, people usually think of a key feature, a central shape or curve—like a figure or a flower—and consider how it can be repeated. Since one shape or line naturally suggests or requires—almost logically—another, additional forms are added until the design is finished. It's important to remember that design is a process that develops in stages in our minds, similar to how living forms in nature evolve—first the blade, then the ear, and finally the full ear of corn.

Experience teaches us that the most harmonious arrangements of form and line are those in which the leading lines and forms through all sorts of variations, continually recur. We cannot place a number of sharply contrasting and contradictory forms together in design satisfactorily—at least we cannot do so without recourse to other elements to harmonize and to bring them into relation. For instance, we might get a great deal of ornamental variety by means of a number of heraldic devices upon shields, full in themselves of quaintness and contrasts, but brought into harmony by the boundary lines of the shields and the divisions; or, still further, by throwing them upon a background of leaves and stems, the meandering lines and recurring forms of which would answer as a kind of warp upon which to weave the heraldic spots into a connected and harmonious pattern.

Experience shows us that the most harmonious arrangements of shapes and lines are those where the leading lines and forms, through various changes, keep reappearing. We can't effectively combine a bunch of sharply contrasting and contradictory forms in a design—at least not without using other elements to create harmony and connection. For example, we could achieve a lot of decorative variety with several heraldic symbols on shields, each full of unique contrasts, but united by the boundary lines of the shields and their divisions; or even more so, by placing them against a background of leaves and stems, where the winding lines and recurring shapes serve as a framework to weave the heraldic elements into a cohesive and harmonious pattern.

Variety in Unity

Unity in Diversity

But even in the ornamental treatment of diverse forms, as the mediæval heraldic designers were [42] well aware, they can be brought into decorative harmony by following a similar principle to the one already laid down in regard to the designing of sprigs and sprays: that is to say, that in designing an animal or figure for heraldry or introduction into a pattern, one should arrange it so that it should fall within the boundary of some geometric or foliated form, square, circular, elliptical or otherwise, [43]as might be desirable. To this, however, I hope to return in a future chapter.

But even in the decorative treatment of various forms, as medieval heraldic designers understood well, they can be aligned aesthetically by following a similar principle to the one already described regarding the design of sprigs and sprays. In other words, when designing an animal or figure for heraldry or incorporating it into a pattern, you should arrange it within the boundaries of some geometric or leaf-like shape, whether square, circular, elliptical, or whatever might be preferred. I hope to revisit this topic in a future chapter.

Sketch To Show How A Pattern Of Diverse Elements May Be Harmonized By Unity Of Inclosing And Intermediary Lines.

Counterbalance

Balance

We may here consider another important principle [44]in designing with line and mass, that of counterbalance.

We can also look at another important principle [44]in design using line and mass, which is counterbalance.

The Principle Of Counterbalance In Different Systems Of Design.

Take any defined space as a panel, tile, or border to be filled with design: you place your principal mass, and instantly feel that it must be balanced by a corresponding mass, or some equivalent. Its place will be determined by the principle upon which the design is built. If on a symmetrical arrangement, you find your centre (say of a panel), and you may either throw the chief weight and mass of the design upon the central feature (as a tree), and balance it by smaller forms or wings each side, or vice versâ; or, adopting a diagonal plan, you place your principal mass (say it is a tile) near the top left-hand corner (suppose it is a pomegranate), connecting it with a spiral diagonal line (the stem); the place of the counterbalancing mass (the second pomegranate) is obviously near the bottom right-hand corner of the square. You may then feel the necessity for additional smaller forms, and so add to it (the leaves), completing the design. (See preceding page.)

Take any defined space, like a panel, tile, or border, and think of it as a canvas for your design: you position your main element, and immediately you sense that it needs to be balanced by a corresponding element or something of equal weight. Its location will be influenced by the principle on which your design is based. If it’s a symmetrical layout, you find your center (like in a panel) and can either place the main weight and mass of the design on the central feature (like a tree), balancing it with smaller shapes or elements on each side, or vice versa; or, if you go for a diagonal layout, you position your main element (like a tile) near the top left corner (let’s say it’s a pomegranate), connecting it with a spiral diagonal line (the stem); the counterbalancing element (the second pomegranate) will naturally go near the bottom right corner of the square. You might then feel the need for additional smaller elements, so you can add those (like leaves) to complete the design. (See preceding page.)

Linear Logic

Linear Logic

On the same principle one may design upon various other plans. The exact choice of the distribution of the counterbalancing masses must always be a matter of personal feeling, judgment, and taste, controlled by the perception of certain logical necessities: as it seems to me that designing is a species of linear reasoning,[1] and might almost be worked in its elementary stages on the principle of the syllogism, consisting of two propositions and a conclusion. A spiral curve is a [45]harmonious line, says the designer: repeat it, reversed, and you prolong the harmony; repeat it again, with variations, and you complete the harmony. Or, harmonious effect is produced by recurring form and line. Here is a circular form; here is a meandering line: combine and repeat them, and you get a logical and harmonious border motive.

Using the same principle, you can create different designs. The exact choice of how to distribute the counterbalancing weights will always depend on personal feelings, judgments, and tastes, guided by the awareness of certain logical necessities. Designing feels to me like a kind of linear reasoning,[1] which could even start from the basic idea of a syllogism, made up of two statements and a conclusion. A spiral curve is a harmonious line, the designer states: repeat it in reverse to extend the harmony; repeat it again with variations to complete the harmony. In essence, a harmonious effect comes from recurring shapes and lines. Here is a circular shape; here is a winding line: combine and repeat them, and you create a logical and harmonious border design.

[1] I recall here a saying of Sir E. Burne-Jones, that "a bad line can only be answered by a good line."

[1] I remember a quote from Sir E. Burne-Jones: "A bad line can only be countered by a good line."

Border Units And Border Motive.

Recurring Line and Form

Recurring Theme and Style

The everlastingly recurring egg and dart moulding and the volute are instances of the harmonious effect of very simple arrangements of recurring line and form. We also get illustrated in these another linear quality in design—that up-and-down movement which gives a pleasant rhythm to the [46]simplest border, and is of especial consequence in all repeating border and frieze designs. The borders of early, ancient, and classical art might be said to be little besides rhythmical and logical arrangements of line. The same rhythmical principle is found in the designs of the classical frieze in all its varieties, culminating in the rhythmic movement of the great Pan-Athenaic procession in that master-frieze of the Parthenon, which, though full of infinite variety and delicate sculptured detail, is yet controlled by a strictly ornamental motive, and constructed upon the rhythmic recurrence of pure line.

The constantly recurring egg and dart molding and the volute are examples of how simple patterns of lines and shapes can create a harmonious effect. They also demonstrate another important aspect of design: the vertical movement that adds a pleasing rhythm to the simplest border, which is particularly significant in all repetitive border and frieze designs. The borders in early, ancient, and classical art can be seen as primarily rhythmical and logical arrangements of lines. This same rhythmic principle is present in the designs of classical friezes in all their forms, peaking in the rhythmic flow of the grand Pan-Athenaic procession depicted in the master frieze of the Parthenon. This frieze, despite its infinite variety and intricate sculptural details, is still governed by a clear decorative motive and is built upon the rhythmic repetition of pure lines.

Recurring Line And Form In Border Motives.

The Principle of Radiation

The Principle of Radiation

Another great linear principle in design is what is known as the radiating principle, which gives vitality and vigour alike to both arrangements of line and delineations of form. It is emphatically and abundantly illustrated in natural forms, from the scallop shell upon the sea-shore to the sun [47]himself that radiates his light upon it. The palm-leaf in all its graceful varieties demonstrates its beauty, its constructive strength combined with extraordinary lightness, which becomes domesticated in that fragile sceptre of social influence and festivity, the fan, and which again spreads its silken, or gossamer, wing as a suggestive field for the designer. We find the principle springing to life again in the fountain jet, and symbolical of life as it has ever been; by means of the same principle applied to construction the Gothic architects raised their beautiful vaults, and emphasized the structural principle and the beauty of recurring line by moulding the edges of their ribs; while we have but to look at the structure of the human frame to find the same principle there also, in the fibres of the muscles, for instance, the radiation of the ribs, and of the fingers and toes.

Another important linear principle in design is what's called the radiating principle, which brings energy and liveliness to both arrangements of lines and outlines of shapes. It’s clearly seen in nature, from the scallop shell on the beach to the sun [47] shining its light on it. The palm leaf, in all its elegant forms, shows off its beauty and strong construction combined with remarkable lightness, which becomes transformed into that delicate symbol of social influence and celebration, the fan, and again spreads its silky or gossamer wing as an inspiring canvas for the designer. We see this principle come to life in the fountain jet, symbolizing life as it has always done; using the same principle in their constructions, Gothic architects created their stunning vaults, highlighting the structural principle and the beauty of repeating lines by shaping the edges of their ribs. And we only need to look at the human body to find the same principle in action, such as in the muscle fibers, the radiation of the ribs, and the fingers and toes.

In truth, as I have said, if there can be said to be one principle more than another, the perception and expression of which gives to an artist's work in design peculiar vitality, it is this principle of radiating line. One may follow it through all stages and forms of drawing and design, and it is equally important in the design of the figure, in the structure of a flower, in the folds of drapery, and alike in the controlling lines of pictorial composition and decorative plan, whether the lines radiate from seen or from hidden centres, which in all kinds of informal design are perhaps the most important.

Honestly, as I've mentioned, if there's one principle that stands out more than the others in giving an artist's design its unique energy, it's the principle of radiating lines. You can see this principle throughout all stages and forms of drawing and design. It's just as crucial in figure design, the structure of a flower, the folds of fabric, and in the guiding lines of both pictorial composition and decorative plans, whether those lines radiate from visible or hidden centers, which are often the most significant in all types of informal design.

Range and Use of Line

Line Range and Usage

We see, therefore, that line possesses a constructive and controlling function, in addition to its power of graphic expression and decorative [48]definition. It is the beginning and the end of art. By means of its help we guide our first tottering steps in the wide world of design; and, as we gain facility of hand and travel further afield, we discover that we have a key to unlock the [49]wonders of art and nature, a method of conjuring up all forms at will: a sensitive language capable of recording and revealing impressions and beauties of form and structure hidden from the careless eye: a delicate instrument which may catch and [50]perpetuate in imperishable notation unheard harmonies: a staff to lean upon through the journey of life: a candid friend who never deceives us: perchance a divining rod, which may ultimately reveal to us that Beauty and Truth are one—as they certainly are, or ought to be, in the world of art.

We can see that lines have both a constructive and controlling role, along with their ability to express ideas graphically and add decorative definition. It's the starting point and the conclusion of art. With lines, we take our first hesitant steps into the vast realm of design; and as we become more skilled and explore further, we realize we've found a key to unlock the wonders of art and nature. It provides us with a way to create any form we desire: a responsive language that captures and reveals the beauty and structure often missed by the casual observer; a fine tool that can catch and preserve unseen harmonies in lasting notation; a support to rely on throughout life's journey; a trustworthy companion that never misleads us; perhaps a guiding stick that will ultimately show us that Beauty and Truth are one—as they truly should be in the world of art.

Radiating Line In Architectural Construction: Vaulting of Chapter House, Westminster.

CHAPTER III

Of the Choice and Use of Line—Degree and Emphasis—Influence of the Photograph—The Value of Emphasis—The Technical Influence—The Artistic Purpose—Influence of Material and Tools—Brush-work—Charcoal—Pencil—Pen.

Of the Choice and Use of Line—Degree and Emphasis—Influence of the Photograph—The Value of Emphasis—The Technical Influence—The Artistic Purpose—Influence of Material and Tools—Brushwork—Charcoal—Pencil—Pen.

Recognizing the great range and capacity of line as a means of expression, and also the range of choice it presents to the designer and draughtsman, the actual exercise of this choice of line, with a view to the most expressive and effective use in practice, becomes, of course, of the first consequence.

Acknowledging the wide variety and potential of line as a method of expression, along with the options it offers to designers and draftsmen, the practical application of choosing lines for the most expressive and effective use is obviously very important.

In this matter of choice we are helped by natural bias, by personal character and preferences, for which it would, as I have said, be difficult fully to account; but beyond this a kind of evolution goes on, arising out of actual practice, which controls and is controlled by it. Draw simply a succession of strokes with any point upon paper, and we find that we are gradually led to repeat a particular kind of stroke, a particular degree of line, partly perhaps because it seems to be produced with more ease, and partly because it appears to have the pleasantest effect.

In making choices, we’re influenced by our natural tendencies, personal traits, and preferences, which are hard to fully explain. But beyond that, there’s a sort of evolution happening based on actual practice that both shapes and is shaped by our choices. If you simply draw a series of strokes with any point on paper, you'll notice that you tend to repeat a specific kind of stroke and line thickness. This happens partly because it feels easier to create and partly because it looks more appealing.

Choice of Line

Line Selection

By a kind of "natural selection," therefore, influenced no doubt by many small secondary causes, such as the relation of the particular angle of the [52]hand and pencil-point to the surface—the nature of the point itself and the nature of the surface—we finally arrive at a choice of line. This choice, [53]again, will be liable to constant variation, owing to the nature of the object we are about to draw, or the kind of design we want to make.

Through a kind of "natural selection," influenced no doubt by many small secondary factors, like the angle between the hand and pencil point relative to the surface—the type of point and the surface itself—we ultimately make a decision on the line. This choice, once again, will be subject to constant change due to the nature of the object we're about to draw or the kind of design we want to create.

Use of Line

Line Usage

The kind of line which seems appropriate to representing the delicate edges of a piece of low-relief sculpture, for instance, would require greater force and firmness if we wanted to draw an antique cast in the round, and in strong light and shade. The character of our line should be sympathetic with the character of our subject as far as possible, and sensitive to its differences of character and surface, since it is in this sensitiveness that the expressive power and peculiar virtue of line-drawing consists.

The type of line that seems suitable for capturing the delicate edges of a low-relief sculpture would need to be stronger and more defined if we were trying to draw a classic piece in three dimensions, with strong contrasts of light and shadow. The nature of our line should match the essence of our subject as closely as possible and be responsive to its variations in character and texture, as this sensitivity is what gives line-drawing its expressive strength and unique value.

A feather, a lily, a scallop shell, all show as an essential principle of their form and construction the radiating line; but what a different quality of line would be necessary to express the differences of each: for the soft, yet firm, smooth flowing curves of the feather fibres no line would be too delicate; and the lily would demand no less delicacy, and even greater precision and firmness of curve, while a slight waviness, or quiver, in the lines might express the silken or waxy surface of the petals; while a crustier, more rugged, though equally firm line would be wanted to follow the rigid furrows and serrated surface of the shell. The leaves of trees and plants of all kinds, which perhaps afford the best sort of practice in line-drawing at first, present in their varieties of structure, character, and surfaces continual opportunities for the exercise of artistic judgment in the choice and use of line.

A feather, a lily, and a scallop shell all demonstrate a key principle in their shape and design: the radiating line. But what a different quality of line would be needed to capture the uniqueness of each. For the soft yet sturdy, smooth flowing curves of the feather's fibers, no line would be too delicate. The lily would require the same delicacy, along with even greater precision and firmness in its curves. A slight waviness or quiver in the lines could represent the silky or waxy surface of the petals. In contrast, a coarser, rougher yet equally strong line would be necessary to depict the rigid grooves and jagged surface of the shell. The leaves of trees and various plants, which might be the best practice for line drawing at first, offer endless opportunities for artistic judgment through their diverse structures, characteristics, and surfaces in choosing and using line.

The forms and surfaces of fruits, again, are [54]excellent tests of line draughtsmanship, and their study is a good preparation for the more subtle and delicate contours of the human form—the greatest test of all. Here we see firmness of fundamental structure (in the bones) and surface curve (of sinew and muscle), with a mobile and constantly changing surface (of flesh and sensitive skin). To render such characteristics without tending to overdo either the firmness or the mobility, and so to become too rigid on the one hand, or too loose and indefinite on the other, requires extraordinary skill, knowledge, and practice in the use of line. I do not suppose the greatest master ever satisfied himself yet in this direction.

The shapes and surfaces of fruits are great exercises for line drawing skills, and studying them is a good way to prepare for the more subtle and delicate curves of the human body—the ultimate challenge. Here we see the solidity of the structure (in the bones) and the smooth curves (of muscles and sinew), with a flexible and constantly changing surface (of flesh and sensitive skin). Capturing these traits without overemphasizing firmness or flexibility—so as not to come off as too stiff on one side or too loose and vague on the other—requires exceptional skill, knowledge, and practice in line work. I don’t think even the greatest masters have ever completely satisfied themselves in this area.

Degree and Emphasis

Degree and Focus

When we have settled upon our quality of line and its degree—thick or thin, bold or fine—we shall be met with the question of emphasis, for upon this the ultimate effect and expression of our [55]drawing or design must largely depend. In the selection of any subject we should naturally be influenced by the attractiveness of particular parts, characters, or qualities it might possess, and we should direct our efforts towards bringing these out, as the things which impress us most. That is the difference between the mind and hand working together harmoniously and the sensitized plate in the photographic camera, which, uncontrolled in any way by human choice (and even under that control as it always is to some extent), mechanically registers the action of the light rays which define the impress of natural forms and scenes through the lens focussed upon the plate. So that, as we often see in a photograph, some unimportant or insignificant detail is reproduced with as much distinctness (or more) as are the leading figures or whatever form the interesting features or the motive of the subject. The picture suffers from want of emphasis, or from emphasis in the wrong place. It is, of course, here that the art of the photographer comes in; and, although he can by careful selection, arrangement, and the regulation of exposure, largely counteract the mechanical tendency, a photograph by its very nature can never take the place of a work of art—the first-hand expression, more or less abstract, of a human mind, or the creative inner vision recorded by a human hand.

Once we’ve decided on the quality of our line and its degree—whether thick or thin, bold or fine—we’ll face the question of emphasis. The ultimate effect and expression of our [55] drawing or design will depend largely on this. In choosing any subject, we should be naturally influenced by the appeal of specific parts, characters, or qualities it might have, and we should focus on highlighting these as they are what impress us the most. This distinguishes the collaboration between the mind and hand from the way a sensitized plate in a camera works, which, without any human influence (though it is always somewhat controlled), mechanically records the light rays that outline natural forms and scenes through the lens directed at the plate. Consequently, as we often see in photographs, some trivial or minor detail gets captured with just as much clarity (or even more) than the main subjects or the interesting features that drive the story. The image suffers from a lack of emphasis or misplaced emphasis. This is where the photographer's skill comes into play; even though they can significantly mitigate the mechanical tendencies through careful selection, arrangement, and exposure control, a photograph can never truly replace a work of art—the original expression, which is more or less abstract, of a human mind or the creative vision captured by a human hand.

Influence of the Photograph

Impact of the Photo

Photography does wonders, and for certain qualities of light and shade, and form and effect without colour, no painting or drawing can approach it; but it has the value and interest of science rather than of art. It is invaluable to the [56]student of natural fact, surface effect, and momentary action, and is often in its very failures most interesting and suggestive to artists—who indeed have not been slow to avail themselves of the help of photography in all sorts of ways. Indeed the wonder is, considering its services to art in all directions, how the world could ever have done without it.

Photography works wonders, and for certain qualities of light, shadow, shape, and effect without color, no painting or drawing can compare. However, it holds more value and interest to science than to art. It’s incredibly useful for students studying natural facts, surface effects, and fleeting moments, and often provides the most intriguing and thought-provoking insights for artists, particularly in its failures. Artists have not hesitated to use photography in numerous ways. Given all the ways it contributes to art, it's surprising to think how the world managed without it.

But a photograph cannot do everything. It cannot make original designs, and it cannot draw in line. You can design in the solid, and make your groups in the studio or the open air; you can select your point of view, and the photograph will reproduce. You can make your drawing in line, and it will copy it; and we know its sphere of usefulness in this direction is enormous, since it can bring before our eyes the whole range of ancient art.

But a photograph can't do everything. It can't create original designs, and it can't draw in lines. You can create three-dimensional designs and set up your groups in a studio or outdoors; you can choose your angle, and the photograph will capture it. You can make your drawing, and it will replicate it; and we know that its usefulness in this regard is vast, since it can present the complete range of ancient art to us.

In short, photography is an excellent servant and friend, but a dangerous master. It may easily beguile us by its seductive reproductions of surface relief and lighting to think more of these qualities than any other, and to endeavour to put them in the wrong places—in places where we want colour planes rather than shadow planes, flatness and repose rather than relief, for instance, as mostly in surface decoration.

In short, photography is a great tool and companion, but a risky master. It can easily tempt us with its captivating images of texture and light, making us focus on these aspects more than others, and lead us to place them incorrectly—in areas where we prefer color fields instead of shadow depth, simplicity and stillness instead of texture, such as often seen in surface decoration.

But one way of learning the value of emphasis is to draw from a photograph, and it will soon be discovered what a difference in expression is produced by dwelling a little more here, or a little less there.

But one way to learn the value of emphasis is to work from a photograph, and you'll quickly see how much difference in expression comes from focusing a bit more here or a bit less there.

The Value of Emphasis

The Importance of Emphasis

In designing, the use of emphasis is very important; and it may be said that drawing or designing [57]without emphasis is like reading without stops, while awkward emphasis is like putting your stops in the wrong place.

In design, using emphasis is crucial; drawing or designing [57] without emphasis is like reading without any pauses, while misplaced emphasis is like putting your pauses in the wrong spots.

By a difference in emphasis the same design may be given quite a different effect and expression.

By changing the emphasis, the same design can create a completely different effect and feeling.

Effect of Different Emphasis in the Treatment of the Same Design.

Suppose, for instance, we were designing a vertical pattern of stem, leaves, and fruit in one colour. By throwing the emphasis upon the leaves, as in No. 1, we should gain one kind of effect or decorative expression. By throwing the emphasis upon the fruit, and leaving the leaves in outline, we should get quite a different effect out of the same elements, as in No. 2. While by leaving stem, leaves, and fruit all in outline, and throwing the emphasis upon the ground, we should get, again, a totally distinct kind of effect and expression.

Suppose, for example, we were creating a vertical design featuring stems, leaves, and fruit in one color. By focusing on the leaves, as shown in No. 1, we would achieve one type of effect or decorative style. By emphasizing the fruit and leaving the leaves outlined, we would obtain a completely different effect using the same elements, as shown in No. 2. Meanwhile, if we outline the stems, leaves, and fruit, and concentrate on the background, we would create yet another completely different effect and expression.

Similar differences of effect and expression, [58]owing to differences of emphasis, might be studied in the drawing and treatment of a head (as in a, b, and c). The possibilities of such variations of emphasis in drawing are practically unlimited and co-extensive with the variations of expression we see in nature herself. The pictorial artist is free to translate or represent them in his work, controlled solely by the conditions and purpose of his work.

Similar differences in effect and expression, [58]due to differences in emphasis, can be explored in the drawing and depiction of a head (as seen in a, b, and c). The potential for such variations in emphasis in drawing is virtually limitless and aligns with the variations of expression we observe in nature itself. The visual artist is free to interpret or depict them in their work, guided only by the conditions and intent of their project.

Different Emphasis in the Treatment of a Head.

It is these conditions and purposes which really control both choice and treatment, and determine the emphasis, and therefore the expression of the work.

It’s these conditions and goals that truly drive both the choice and treatment, shaping the emphasis and, as a result, the expression of the work.

No kind of art can be said to be unconditioned, and the simplest and freest of all, the art of the point and the surface, which covers all the graphic art and flat designing, is still subject to certain technical influences, and it may be said that it is very much in so far as these technical influences or conditions are acknowledged and utilized that the work gains in artistic character.

No form of art can be considered entirely unrestricted, and the most basic and free of them all, the art of the point and the surface, which encompasses all graphic art and flat design, still faces certain technical influences. It can be said that the extent to which these technical influences or conditions are recognized and employed directly contributes to the artistic quality of the work.

[SN The Technical Influence]

[SN The Technical Influence]

The draughtsman in line who draws for surface printing, for the book or newspaper, should be able to stand the test of the peculiar conditions; and, so [59]far from attempting to escape them, and seeking something more than they will bear, should welcome them as incentives to a distinct artistic treatment with a value and character of its own, which indeed all the best work has. It is, for instance, important in all design associated with type for surface printing, that there should be a certain harmonious relation between lettering or type and printer's ornament or picture.

The draftsman who designs for surface printing, whether for a book or newspaper, needs to handle the unique challenges of the job. Instead of trying to avoid these challenges or pushing for something beyond what they can provide, they should embrace them as opportunities for a distinct artistic approach that has its own value and character, which is present in all the best work. For example, it’s crucial in any design involving type for surface printing to maintain a harmonious relationship between the lettering or type and the printer's decorations or images.

Sketches to Illustrate Effect of Different Emphasis in the Treatment of the Same Elements in Landscape.
I. Textile Motive: Suggestion for a Carpet Pattern.
II. An Abstract Treatment of The Same on Point Paper, as Detail of Brussels Carpet.

[62]A firm and open quality of line, with bright black and white effects, not only has the most attractive decorative effect with type, but lends itself to the processes of reproduction for surface printing best, whether woodcut or one of the numerous forms of so-called automatic photo-engraving, as well as to the conditions of the printing press.

[62]A strong and clear line, with striking black and white contrasts, not only creates the most appealing decorative effect with text, but also works best for reproduction in surface printing, whether through woodcut or various automatic photo-engraving methods, as well as for the printing press conditions.

In all design-work which has to be subjected to processes of engraving and printing, clearness and definiteness of line is very necessary. Designs for textile printing of all kinds, for wall-papers, especially, require good firm drawing and definite colour planes. This does not, however, mean hardness of effect. A design should be clear and intelligible without being hard.

In all design work that needs to go through engraving and printing processes, clarity and precision of line are essential. Designs for all types of textile printing, especially for wallpapers, require strong drawing and distinct color areas. However, this doesn't mean the effect should be harsh. A design should be clear and understandable without being stiff.

For weaving, again, definiteness in pattern designing is very necessary, since the design must be capable of being rendered upon the severe conditions of the point paper, by which it is only possible to produce curves by small successive angles (which sounds like a contradiction in terms). The size of these angles or points, of course, varies very much in the different kinds of textile with which pattern is incorporated, from the fine silk fabric, in which they are almost inappreciable, to carpets of all kinds, where they are emphatic; so that a certain squareness of mass becomes a desirable and characteristic feature in designs for these purposes, and, indeed, I think it should be more or less acknowledged in all textile design, in order to preserve its distinctive beauty and character.

For weaving, having a clear pattern design is really important since the design needs to be adapted to the strict limitations of point paper, which means you can only create curves using small, successive angles (which seems a bit contradictory). The size of these angles or points can vary greatly depending on the type of fabric the pattern is used with, ranging from fine silk, where they’re hardly noticeable, to carpets of all kinds, where they are quite pronounced. Because of this, a certain level of squareness in the design becomes a desirable and unique feature for these applications. In fact, I believe this should be recognized in all textile design to maintain its distinctive beauty and character.

The Artistic Purpose

The Art's Purpose

Beauty and character.—In these lies the gist of all design. While the technical conditions, if fully understood, fairly met, and frankly acknowledged, [63]are sure to give character to a design, for whatever purpose, beauty is not so easy to command. It is so delicate a quality, so complex in its elements, a question often of such nice balance and judgment—depending perhaps upon a hair's-breadth difference in the poise of a mass here, or the sweep of a curve there—that we cannot weave technical nets fine enough to catch so sensitive a butterfly. She is indeed a Psyche in art, both seeking and sought, to be finally won only by devotion and love.

Beauty and character.—These are the essence of all design. While understanding and meeting the technical requirements will definitely give character to a design for any purpose, achieving beauty is much more challenging. It's such a delicate quality, so complex in its components, and often a matter of precise balance and judgment—sometimes hinging on a slight adjustment in the positioning of a mass here, or the curvature of a line there—that we can't create technical frameworks fine enough to capture such a sensitive element. Beauty is truly like a Psyche in art, both pursued and pursuing, ultimately attained only through dedication and passion.

This search for beauty—this Psyche of art—is the purely inspiring artistic purpose, as distinct from the technical and useful one, which should, perfectly reconciled and united with it, determine the form of our work.

This quest for beauty—this essence of art—is the purely inspiring artistic goal, separate from the technical and practical one, which, when perfectly balanced and combined with it, should shape the form of our work.

In drawing or design we may seek particular qualities in line and form either of representation or of ornament. We may desire to dwell upon particular beauties either of object or subject. Say, in drawing from a cast or from natural form of any kind, we desire to dwell upon beauty of line or quality of surface. Well, since it is most difficult, if not impossible, to get everything at once, and nothing without some kind of sacrifice, we shall find that to give prominence to—to bring out—the particular quality in our subject (say beauty of line), it becomes necessary to subordinate other qualities to this. A drawing in pure outline of a figure may be a perfect thing in itself. The moment we begin to superadd shading, or lines expressive of relief of any kind, we introduce another element; we are aiming at another kind of truth or beauty; and unless we have also a distinctly ideal aim in this, we shall mar the simplicity of the outline without gaining [64]any compensating advantage, or really adding to the truth or beauty of the drawing.

In drawing or design, we often look for specific qualities in line and form, whether it’s about representation or decoration. We might want to focus on particular beauties, whether in objects or subjects. For example, when drawing from a cast or from any natural shape, we might want to emphasize the beauty of the line or the quality of the surface. Since it's really difficult, if not impossible, to capture everything at once, and since you can't get something without giving up something else, we will find that to highlight a specific quality in our subject (like beauty of line), we need to put other qualities on the back burner. A drawing that consists purely of outlines of a figure can be perfect on its own. But as soon as we start adding shading or lines to create a sense of relief, we introduce another element; we are pursuing a different kind of truth or beauty. If we don't have a clear ideal goal in this process, we'll spoil the simplicity of the outline without getting any worthwhile benefit or truly enhancing the truth or beauty of the drawing.

In designing, too, unless we can so contrive the essential characteristics of our pattern that they shall be adaptable to the method and material of its production, and make its reproduction quite practicable, it is sure to reappear more or less marred and incomplete. The thing is to discover what kind of character and beauty the method will allow of—whether beauty or quality of line, or surface, or colour, or material; and if to be reproduced in a particular method or material, the design should be thought out in the method or material for which it is destined, rather than as a drawing on paper, and worked out accordingly, using every opportunity to secure the particular kind of beauty naturally belonging to such work in its completed form.

In design, too, if we can't shape the key features of our pattern to fit the method and material of production, making its reproduction feasible, it will likely come out damaged or incomplete. The goal is to find out what kind of character and beauty the method allows—whether it’s beauty or quality of line, surface, color, or material. If it's going to be reproduced in a specific method or material, the design should be created with that method or material in mind, rather than just as a drawing on paper, and developed accordingly, taking every opportunity to capture the unique beauty that belongs to the finished work.

Thus we should naturally think of planes of surface in modelled work, and the delicate play of light and shade, getting our equivalent for colour in the design and contrast of varied surfaces. In stained glass we should think of a pattern in lead lines inclosing one of translucent colour, each being interdependent and united to form a harmonious whole. In textile design we should be influenced by the thought of the difference of use, plan, and purpose of the finished material; as the difference between a rich vertical pattern in silk, velvet, or tapestry, to be broken by folds as in curtains or hangings, and a rich carpet pattern, to be spread upon the unbroken level surface of a floor. The idea of the wall and floor should here influence us as well as the actual technical necessities of the loom. It would be part of the artistic purpose [65]affecting the imagination and artistic motive, and working with the strictly technical conditions.

So, we should naturally consider planes of surface in modeled work, along with the subtle interplay of light and shadow, finding our equivalent for color in the design and contrast of different surfaces. In stained glass, we should think of a pattern formed by lead lines enclosing areas of translucent color, each one dependent on the others to create a harmonious whole. In textile design, we should be influenced by the different uses, plans, and purposes of the finished material; for example, the difference between a rich vertical pattern in silk, velvet, or tapestry that gets interrupted by folds like in curtains or hangings, and a rich carpet pattern that lies flat on an uninterrupted floor surface. The concept of the wall and floor should guide us, along with the actual technical requirements of the loom. This would be a part of the artistic intention affecting the imagination and artistic motivation while working within the strictly technical conditions. [65]

The mind must project itself, and see with the inner eye the effect of the design as it would appear in actual use, as far as possible. Invention, knowledge, and experience will do the rest.

The mind needs to visualize and perceive with the inner eye how the design will look when put into actual use, as much as possible. Creativity, knowledge, and experience will take care of the rest.

Brush-Work

Brushwork

Keeping, however, to strictly pictorial or graphic conditions—to the art of the point and the surface—with which, as designers and draughtsmen, we are more immediately concerned, we cannot forget certain technical considerations strictly belonging to the varieties of point and of surface, and their relations one to another. The flexible point of the brush, for instance, dipped in ink, or colour, has its own peculiar capacity, its own range of treatment, one might say, its own forms.

Sticking strictly to visual or graphic elements—relating to the use of points and surfaces, which are our main focus as designers and illustrators—we can't ignore some technical aspects that are specific to different types of points and surfaces and how they interact with each other. For example, a flexible brush tip, when dipped in ink or color, has its own unique capabilities, its own ways of being used, and its own shapes.

The management admits of immense variation of use and touch, and its range of depicting and ornamental power are very great: from the simpler leaf forms, which seem to be almost a reflection or shadow of the moist pointed brush itself, to the elaborate graphic drawing in line or light and shade.

The management allows for a wide variety of use and interaction, and its ability to depict and ornament is extensive: from the simple leaf shapes that almost seem to mirror the moist pointed brush itself, to the detailed graphic drawings in line or light and shadow.

Brush Forms.

In forming the leaf shape one begins with a light pressure, if at the point, and proceeds to increase it for the middle and broader end. On the same principle of regulation of pressure any brush forms may be built up. It is essential for freedom in working with the brush not to starve or stint it in moisture or colour. For ornamental forms a full brush should be used: otherwise they are apt to look dragged and meagre. For a rich and flowing line also a full brush, however fine, is necessary. It is quite possible, however, to use it with a different [66]aim, and to produce a sort of crumbling line when half dry, and also in colour-work for what is called dragging, by which tone, texture, or quality may [67]be given to parts of a drawing. One should never lose sight, in using the brush as a drawing tool, of its distinctive quality and character, and impart it to all work done by its means.

To create the shape of a leaf, start with light pressure at the tip and gradually increase it for the middle and wider end. Using the same technique of adjusting pressure, any brush shape can be made. It's crucial to avoid depriving the brush of moisture or paint while working, as this limits your freedom. For decorative shapes, a fully loaded brush is necessary; otherwise, they can appear thin and underwhelming. To achieve a rich, flowing line, a full brush, no matter how fine, is also needed. However, you can also use it differently to create a broken line when it's half-dry, or for color work, to achieve a technique known as dragging, which can add tone, texture, or quality to parts of a drawing. Always remember, when using the brush as a drawing tool, to maintain its unique quality and character, and infuse that into everything you create with it.

Direct Brush Expression Of Animal Form.

[68]The direct touch with the full brush—to cultivate this is of enormous advantage to all artists, whatever particular line of art they may follow, since it may be said to be of no less value in design than it is in painting pure and simple. We can all feel the charm of the broad brush washes and emphatic brush touches of a master of water-colour landscape such as De Wint. This is mastery of brush and colour in one direction—tone and effect. A Japanese drawing of a bird or a fish may show it equally in another—character and form. A bit of Oriental porcelain or Persian tile may show the same dexterous charm and full-brush feeling exercised in a strictly decorative direction.

[68]Having a direct connection with a full brush—cultivating this skill—greatly benefits all artists, no matter what specific field of art they pursue, since it holds just as much value in design as it does in pure painting. We can all appreciate the appeal of the broad brush strokes and bold brush effects created by a master of watercolor landscapes like De Wint. This demonstrates mastery of brush technique and color in one area—tone and impact. A Japanese drawing of a bird or a fish might showcase it equally well in another area—character and shape. A piece of Oriental porcelain or Persian tile can reflect the same skilled charm and full-brush technique applied in a strictly decorative context.

The empire of the brush, if we think of it in all its various forms and directions, is very large; and it commands, in skilled hands, both line and form, in all their varieties, and leaves its impress in all the departments of art, from the humble but dexterous craftsman who puts the line of gold or colour round the edges of our cups and saucers, to the highly skilled and specialized painter of easel pictures—say the academician who writes cheques with his paint-brush!

The world of painting, when we consider all its different styles and techniques, is quite vast; and in the hands of a talented artist, it masters both line and form in every possible way, leaving its mark across all areas of art. This ranges from the skilled artisan who applies a line of gold or color around the edges of our cups and saucers to the highly trained and specialized easel painter—like the academic artist who creates masterpieces with his paintbrush!

Charcoal and Pencil

Charcoal and Pencil

Then we have the ordinary varieties of the firm point: charcoal, pencil, pen. Charcoal, being halfway between hard and soft—a sort of halfway house or bridge for one passing from the flexible brush to the firm and hard points of pencil and pen—is first favourite with painters when they take to drawing. Its softness and removability adapts it as a tool for preliminary and preparatory sketching in for all purposes, and both for designer and painter; but it lends itself to both line and [70] tone drawing, or to a mixture of both. It is therefore a very good material for rapid studies (say from the life) and the seizing of any effect of light and shade rapidly, since the masses can be laid in readily, and greater richness and depth can be obtained in shorter time, perhaps, than by any other kind of pencil.

Then we have the common types of the firm point: charcoal, pencil, pen. Charcoal, which is between hard and soft — a sort of middle ground for someone transitioning from the flexible brush to the firm and hard points of pencil and pen — is the top choice for painters when they start drawing. Its softness and erasing capability make it a useful tool for initial and preparatory sketches for all purposes, both for designers and painters. It can be used for both line and tone drawing, or a mix of both. Therefore, it’s a great material for quick studies (like from life) and for capturing any effects of light and shadow quickly, since the shapes can be laid in easily, and richer and deeper tones can be achieved in less time than with any other type of pencil.

Charcoal is also very serviceable for large cartoon-work, since it is capable of both delicacy and force, and bears working up to any extent. A slight rubbing of the finger gives half tones when wanted, and is often serviceable in giving greater solidity and finish to the work.

Charcoal is also very useful for large-scale drawings, as it can provide both subtlety and strength, and can be worked over as much as needed. A light rub with your finger creates half tones when desired, and is often helpful in giving more depth and polish to the artwork.

Then there is the lead pencil—the point-of-all-work, as it might be called—more generally serviceable than any other, whether for rapid sketches and jottings in the note-book, or careful and detailed drawings, or sketching in for the smaller kinds of design-work. It is also, of course, used for drawings which are afterwards "inked in." I do not think, however, that pen-work done in this way is so free or characteristic as when done direct, or at any rate quite freely, upon a mere scaffolding of preliminary lines, used only to make the plans for the chief masses and forms.

Then there's the lead pencil—the essential tool for all work, you could say—more versatile than any other, whether for quick sketches and notes in a notebook, or careful and detailed drawings, or blocking in for smaller design projects. It's also commonly used for drawings that will later be "inked in." However, I don't believe that pen work done this way is as free or distinctive as when it's done directly, or at least more freely, on just a framework of preliminary lines, which are used only to outline the main shapes and forms.

Pencil drawing is capable of being carried to a greater pitch of delicacy and finish, and has a silvery quality all its own. It has not the force or range of charcoal, but in its own technical range it possesses many advantages. Its gray and soft line, however charming in itself, does not fit it for work where sharpness and precision of line and touch are required, as may be said to [71]be the case with all work intended to be reproduced by some process of handicraft or manufacture, except some sorts of photo-engraving or lithography. We must therefore look to another implement to enable us to obtain these qualities, namely, the brush, the use and qualities of which I have already touched upon.

Pencil drawing can achieve a higher level of detail and refinement and has a unique silvery quality. It doesn’t have the strength or variety of charcoal, but within its own technical limits, it offers many benefits. Its gray and gentle lines, while lovely on their own, aren't suitable for tasks requiring sharpness and precision, which is generally necessary for work meant to be reproduced through any craft or manufacturing process, except for certain types of photo-engraving or lithography. Therefore, we need to turn to another tool to achieve these qualities, specifically the brush, the use and qualities of which I have already mentioned.

The Pen

The Pen

There remains yet another point of the firm and decisive order, the pen, which enables us to get firmness and sharpness of line and precise definition, as well as considerable range of treatment and freedom of touch.

There is still one more aspect of the firm and decisive order: the pen. It allows us to achieve firmness and sharpness in lines, precise definitions, a broad range of treatment, and a free style of touch.

The pen seems to bear much the same relation to the brush as the lead pencil does to charcoal—not capable of such full and rich effects or such flowing freedom of line, but yet possessing its own beauty and characteristic kinds of expression. Its true province is in comparatively small scale work, and its natural association is with its sister-pen of literature in the domain of book-design and decoration, and black and white drawing for the press. Its varieties are endless, and the ingenuity of manufacturers continually places before us fresh choice of pen-points to work with; but though one occasionally meets with a good steel pen, I have found it too often fails one just when it is sufficiently worn to the right degree of flexibility. One returns to the quill, which can be cut to suit the particular requirements of one's work. For large bold drawing the reed-pen has advantages, and a pleasant rich quality of line.

The pen is similar to the brush, just like the lead pencil is to charcoal—not able to achieve such deep and vibrant effects or such fluid lines, but still having its own beauty and unique ways of expression. Its true purpose lies in smaller scale work, and it naturally connects with its literary counterpart in the areas of book design and decoration, as well as black and white drawing for print. The options are endless, and manufacturers continuously provide us with new choices of pen points to use; however, while you might occasionally find a good steel pen, I often discover it fails just when it’s perfectly worn for the right level of flexibility. This leads one back to the quill, which can be shaped to meet the specific needs of the work. For bold, large drawings, the reed pen offers advantages and produces a pleasing, rich line quality.

But with whatever point we may work, the great object is to be perfectly at ease with it in drawing—to thoroughly master its use and capacities, [72]so that in our search for that other command, of line and form, we may feel that we have in our hands a tool upon which we can rely, a trusty spear to bear down the many difficulties and discouragements that beset, like threatening dragons, the path of the art-student.

But no matter where we start, the main goal is to be completely comfortable with it in drawing—to really understand how to use it and what it can do, [72]so that in our pursuit of mastering line and form, we can feel that we have a reliable tool in our hands, a trusty spear to overcome the many challenges and discouragements that, like threatening dragons, block the path of the art student.


CHAPTER IV

Of the Choice of Form—Elementary Forms—Space-filling—Grouping—Analogies of Form—Typical Forms of Ornament—Ornamental Units—Equivalents in Form—Quantities in Design—Contrast—Value of Variations of Similar or Allied Forms—Use of the Human Figure and Animal Forms in Ornamental Design.

Of the Choice of Form—Basic Forms—Filling Space—Grouping—Similarities in Form—Common Types of Ornament—Ornamental Elements—Form Equivalents—Design Quantities—Contrast—Importance of Variations of Similar or Related Forms—Incorporating the Human Figure and Animal Forms in Ornamental Design.

We were considering the choice and use of Line in the last chapter: its expressive characters and various methods. We now come to the no less important question to the designer and draughtsman—The Choice of Form.

We were looking at the selection and use of Line in the last chapter: its expressive characters and different techniques. Now we move on to another equally important topic for designers and draftsmen—The Choice of Form.

If Line may be said to be the bone and sinew of design, Form is the substance and the flesh, and both are obviously essential to its free life and development.

If Line can be considered the core essence of design, then Form is its material and substance, and both are clearly vital for its vibrant existence and growth.

Elementary Forms

Basic Forms

The cube and the sphere give us the fundamental elements, or primal types from which are derived the multifarious, ever varying, and complex forms, the products of the forces and conditions of nature, or the necessitous inventiveness of art, just as we may take the square and the circle to be the parents of linear and geometric design.

The cube and the sphere provide us with the basic elements, or essential forms, from which a wide variety of complex shapes arise, influenced by the forces and conditions of nature, or the essential creativity of art, much like how we can view the square and the circle as the foundational shapes of linear and geometric design.

Elementary Forms: Pyramid, Sphere, Cube, Hexagon, Cone.

The cube and the sphere, the ellipse, the cone, and the pyramid, with other comparatively simple forms of solid geometry, present themselves to [74]the student as elementary tests of draughtsmanship—of the power, that is, of representing solid bodies upon a plane surface. Such forms being more simple and regular than any natural forms, they are supposed to reduce the problem of drawing to its simplest conditions. They certainly afford very close tests of correctness of eye, making any fault in perspective or projection at once apparent.

The cube, sphere, ellipse, cone, and pyramid, along with other relatively simple solid shapes, serve as basic tests for students in drawing—essentially measuring their ability to represent three-dimensional objects on a two-dimensional surface. Since these shapes are more straightforward and regular than any natural forms, they are thought to simplify the drawing process. They definitely provide accurate tests for visual correctness, making any mistakes in perspective or projection immediately noticeable.

Use Of Elementary Forms in Architecture.

[76]To avoid, however, falling into mechanical ways, and to maintain the interest and give vitality to such studies, the relation of such forms to forms in nature and art should be borne in mind, and no opportunity missed of comparing them, or of seeking out their counterparts, corresponding principles, and variations, as well as their practical bearing, both functional and constructive; as in the case of the typical forms of flowers, buds, and seed-vessels, for instance, where the cone and the funnel, and the spherical, cylindrical, and tubular principles are constantly met with, as essential parts of the characters and organic necessities of the plant: the cone and the funnel mostly in buds and flower-petals for protection and inclosure of the pollen and seed germs, the tube for conducting the juices; the spherical form to resist moisture externally, or to hold it internally, or to avoid friction, and facilitate close storage, as in the case of seeds in pods. The seed-vessel of the poppy, for instance, has a curious little pent-house roof to shield the interstices (like windows in a tower) till the seed is ripe and the time comes for it to be shaken out of the shell or pod. A further practical reason for the prevalence of spherical form in seeds is that they may, when the outer covering or husk perishes, more readily roll out and fall into the interstices of the ground; or when, as in the case of various fruits, such as the apple and orange, the envelope itself is spherical and intended to carry their flat or pointed seeds to the ground, where it falls and rolls when ripe.

[76]To avoid getting stuck in routine approaches and to keep the interest alive and add vitality to these studies, it’s important to consider how these forms relate to those found in nature and art. We should seize every chance to compare them, look for their matches, corresponding principles, and variations, as well as their practical implications—in both function and structure. Take, for example, the typical shapes of flowers, buds, and seed pods, where you often find cones and funnels, as well as spherical, cylindrical, and tubular forms, all essential parts of the plant’s characteristics and needs. The cone and funnel shapes are commonly found in buds and flower petals to protect and enclose pollen and seed germs, while the tube shape functions to transport fluids. The spherical shape helps resist moisture from the outside, hold moisture inside, reduce friction, and enable compact storage, as seen in seeds within pods. The poppy’s seed pod, for example, has a unique little roof that protects the gaps (like windows in a tower) until the seeds are mature and it's time for them to be shaken out of the pod. Another practical reason for the common use of spherical shapes in seeds is that when the outer shell or husk breaks down, they can easily roll out and settle into gaps in the ground. Similarly, in various fruits like apples and oranges, the round envelope itself is designed to carry their flat or pointed seeds to the ground, where it falls and rolls away when ripe.

The cube and the various multiple forms may [77]be found in crystals and basaltic rocks, as well as in organic nature, as, for instance, in the honeycomb of bees, where choice of form is a constructive necessity: the cube is in every sense of the word the corner-stone in architecture, and without squaring and plumbing no building could be constructed, while the cylindrical and conical principles of form are illustrated in towers and roofs, spires and pinnacles. In architectural ornament and carved decoration the cube and sphere again form the basis, both forming ornaments themselves by mere recurrence and repetition, and also forming constructional bases of ornament.

The cube and its various forms can be found in crystals and basaltic rocks, as well as in nature, like in the honeycomb of bees, where the choice of form is essential for construction. The cube is fundamentally important in architecture, and without proper squaring and plumbing, no building could be constructed. The cylindrical and conical forms are seen in towers, roofs, spires, and pinnacles. In architectural decoration and carved details, the cube and sphere again serve as the foundation, creating ornaments through repetition and also acting as structural bases for those decorations.

Apple Cut To Show Position Of Seeds.

Dog-Tooth Ornament

Dog-Tooth Decoration

Dog-tooth Formed From Cube.

A very simple but effective form of carved [78]ornament characteristic of early Gothic work is what is known as the dog-tooth. This is formed simply by cutting a cube of stone into a pyramid, depressing the sides, and cutting them into geometric leaves, leaving the sharp angles of the pyramid from the base to the apex standing out in bold relief. In ground-plan this is simply composed geometrically of a rectangle divided diagonally into four equal parts, and by striking four semicircles from the centres of the four sides of the rectangle. Here we get a form of ornament [79]in the flat which appears to have been very widely used, and reappears in the early art of nearly all races so far as I am aware. We find it, for instance, in Assyrian carving and in early Greek decoration, in China and Japan, and in European mediæval work of all kinds. Its charm perhaps lies in its simplicity of construction yet rich ornamental effect, either as carved work or as a flat painted diaper. It might also be used as the geometric basis of an elaborate repeating wall-pattern over a large surface.

A very simple but effective form of carved [78]ornament typical of early Gothic design is what's called the dog-tooth. This is created by cutting a cube of stone into a pyramid shape, sloping the sides, and shaping them into geometric leaves, while keeping the sharp angles of the pyramid from the base to the tip prominent. In terms of layout, this is geometrically made up of a rectangle divided diagonally into four equal parts, with four semicircles drawn from the centers of each side of the rectangle. Here, we see a form of ornament [79]in the flat that seems to have been widely used and appears in the early art of nearly all cultures that I know of. For example, we find it in Assyrian carvings, early Greek decorations, in China and Japan, and in various kinds of European medieval work. Its appeal probably lies in its simplicity of construction while offering a rich ornamental effect, whether as carved detail or a flat painted pattern. It could also serve as the geometric foundation for an intricate repeating wall pattern across a large area.

Cube and Sphere in Architectural Ornament: Brick Dental, Ball Flower Moulding, and Dog-tooth Moulding.

Filling of Spaces

Filling Spaces

When it comes to the choice of form, when we are face to face with a particular problem in design, ornament, or decoration (say, as most frequently happens, it is to fill a panel of a given shape and size), we are bound to consider form in relation to that particular panel, to the subject we propose to treat, and the method by which the design is to be produced, or the object and position for which it is intended. This generally narrows the range of possible choice. Firstly, there is the shape of the panel itself. A well-known exercise for the Teacher's Certificate under the Department of Science and Art is to give a drawing of a plant adapted to design in a square and a circle. Now in the abstract one would be inclined to select for a circular fitting different forms from those one might select for a square filling, since I always consider that the shape of the space must influence the character of the filling in line and form. Still, if the problem is to fill a square and a circle by the same forms, or an adaptation of them, we must rely more and more upon difference of treatment of these forms, and not try to [80]squeeze round forms into rectangular space, or rectangular forms into circular space. In a rose, for instance, it would be possible to dwell on its angular side for the square, and on its curvilinear side for the circle. Anyway, we should seek in the first place a good and appropriate motive.

When it comes to choosing a form, especially when we're dealing with a specific design problem, ornament, or decoration (like when we need to fill a panel of a certain shape and size), we have to think about the form in relation to that panel, the subject we want to address, and the method for producing the design, or the object and its intended position. This usually limits our options. First, we consider the shape of the panel itself. A well-known exercise for the Teacher's Certificate in the Department of Science and Art involves drawing a plant designed for both a square and a circle. In theory, one might be inclined to choose different forms for a circular design than for a square one, as I believe the shape of the space should influence the character of the design in terms of lines and shapes. However, if the challenge is to fill both a square and a circle using the same forms or adaptations of them, we need to focus more on different ways of treating these forms instead of trying to fit round shapes into rectangular spaces or rectangular shapes into circular ones. For example, with a rose, we could emphasize its angular features for the square and its curved features for the circle. Ultimately, we should first look for a strong and fitting motivation.

Filling of Square Space.

Supposing the design is for wood inlay, we should have to select forms that would not cause unnecessary difficulty in cutting, since every form in the design would have to be cut out in thin wood and inserted in the corresponding hollow cut in the panel or plank to receive it. Complex or complicated forms would therefore be ruled out, as being [81]not only difficult or impossible to reproduce in the material, but ineffective.

If the design is for wood inlay, we need to choose shapes that won’t make cutting unnecessarily difficult since every shape in the design has to be cut out of thin wood and fitted into the corresponding hollow in the panel or plank. Complex or intricate shapes would be excluded, as they would be not only hard or impossible to reproduce in the material, but also ineffective. [81]

Filling of Circular Space.

Inlay Design

Inlay Design

A true feeling for the particular effect and decorative charm of inlaid work should lead us to limit ourselves to comparatively few and simple forms, treating those forms in an emphatic but abstract way, and making use of recurring line and form as far as possible. We might make an effective panel, say, for a casket, or a clock-case, or a floor, by strictly limiting ourselves to very few and simple forms—say, for instance, a stem, a leaf, a berry, or disc, and a bird form, or fruit and leaf forms. It would be possible to build up a design with such elements both pleasant in effect and well adapted to the [82]work. An excellent plan would be to cut out all one's forms with knife or scissors in stiff paper, as a test of the practicability of an inlay design. This is actually done with the working drawing by the inlay cutter.

A true appreciation for the unique effect and decorative appeal of inlaid work should encourage us to focus on just a few simple shapes, treating those shapes in a bold yet abstract manner, and utilizing repeating lines and forms as much as possible. For instance, we could create an eye-catching panel for a box, a clock case, or a floor by strictly limiting ourselves to very few simple shapes—like a stem, a leaf, a berry, or a disc, and a bird shape, or fruit and leaf shapes. It would be possible to design something that is both visually appealing and well-suited to the work. An effective method would be to cut out all your shapes with a knife or scissors from stiff paper as a way to test the feasibility of an inlay design. This is actually done with the working drawing by the inlay cutter.

1. Units of Simple Inlay Pattern; 2. Motive for Inlaid Pattern Built of the Same Units; 3. Treatment of Form as Pattern Units for Inlaid Work; 4. Pattern Motive for Inlaid Work

[83]I once designed an inlaid floor for the centre of a picture gallery. The scale was rather large, and the work was bold. One kept to large, bold, and simple forms—water-lilies and broad leaves, swans, scallop shells, and zigzag borders. Forms which can be readily produced by the brush would generally answer well for inlay, since they would have simple and sweeping boundaries and flat silhouette. And for inlay one is practically designing in black, white, or tinted silhouette. This makes it very good practice for all designers, both for the invention it tends to call out, owing to the limited resources and restriction as to forms, and also as giving facility and readiness in blocking in the masses of pattern.

[83]I once created an inlaid floor for the center of a picture gallery. The scale was quite large, and the design was bold. I focused on large, striking, and simple shapes—water lilies and broad leaves, swans, scallop shells, and zigzag borders. Shapes that can be easily created with a brush usually work well for inlay, since they have simple and sweeping outlines and flat silhouettes. Essentially, inlay design involves working in black, white, or tinted silhouettes. This approach is excellent practice for all designers, as it encourages creativity due to the limited materials and restrictions on forms, while also helping to develop skill and confidence in laying out the big areas of the pattern.

The water-colour painter, too, would find that blocking in in flat local colour all his forms and the colours of his background was an excellent method of preparatory work, and afforded good practice in direct painting, since he could add his secondary shades and tints in the same manner until the work was brought to completion, while preserving that fresh effect of the undisturbed washes which is the great charm of water-colour.

The watercolor painter would also discover that starting with flat local colors for all his shapes and the colors of his background was a great way to prepare, and it offered good practice in direct painting. He could then add his secondary shades and tints in the same way until the piece was finished, all while keeping that fresh look of the untouched washes that is the main appeal of watercolor.

Grouping of Allied Forms

Grouping of Allied Forms

In seeking forms to group together harmoniously—which is the whole object of composition—we shall find that much the same kind of principle holds good whether we are arranging a still-life group or designing a wall-paper or textile. It is only a difference of degree and scale. In the one case we are designing in the solid with the actual objects, before drawing or painting them as a harmonious pictorial composition; in the other we are arranging forms upon the flat with a view to harmonious composition with a strictly decorative purpose [84]in view. In the first we are dealing with concrete form in the round; in the second, generally speaking, with abstract form in the flat.

In trying to bring forms together in a harmonious way—which is the main goal of composition—we’ll find that a similar principle applies whether we’re arranging a still life, designing wallpaper, or creating textiles. It’s mainly just a difference in scale and degree. In one case, we work with solid, real objects before drawing or painting them as a cohesive visual piece; in the other, we arrange shapes on a flat surface with the intention of creating a harmonious design for purely decorative purposes [84]. In the first instance, we’re focused on three-dimensional forms; in the second, we’re generally dealing with two-dimensional, abstract shapes.

Grouping of Allied Forms: Composition of Curves.

But in either case we want harmony. We cannot, therefore, throw together a number of forms unrelated to each in line, contour, or meaning. We seek in composing or designing not contradictions, but correspondences of form, with just an element of contrast to give flavour and point. In grouping pottery, for instance, we should not place big and little or squat and slender forms close together without connecting links of some kind. We want a series of good lines that help one another and lead up to one another in a kind of friendly co-operation. Broad smooth forms and rounded surfaces, again, require relief and a certain amount of [85]contrast. We feel the need of crisp leaves or flowers, perhaps, with our pottery form. We may safely go far, however, on the principle of grouping similar or allied forms, giving our composition as a whole either a curvilinear or angular character in its general lines, masses, and forms, on the principle of like to like. This will entirely depend upon our choice of grouping of form; but the more by our selection we make our composition tend distinctly in the one direction or the other, the more character it will be likely to possess.

But in either case, we want harmony. We can’t just throw together a bunch of shapes that have no relation to each other in line, outline, or meaning. When we’re creating or designing, we look for correspondences in form, with just enough contrast to add flavor and emphasis. When grouping pottery, for example, we shouldn’t place large and small or short and tall forms next to each other without some kind of connecting elements. We want a series of good lines that support each other and flow together in a friendly way. Broad smooth shapes and rounded surfaces need some relief and contrast. We might feel the need for crisp leaves or flowers alongside our pottery piece. However, we can confidently go far on the principle of grouping similar or related forms, giving our overall composition either a curvy or angular look in its general lines, shapes, and forms, based on the idea of like with like. This will depend on how we choose to group the forms; the more we make our composition lean distinctly in one direction or the other, the more character it’s likely to have.

Grouping of Allied Forms: Composition of Angles.

Grouping

Grouping

In selecting forms for still-life grouping and [86]painting, I think increased interest might be gained by arranging significant objects, accessories bearing upon particular pursuits, for instance, in natural relationship and surrounding. Groups suggesting certain handicrafts, for instance, such as the clear glass globe of the wood-engraver, the sand-bag, [87]the block upon it, the tools, gravers lying around, the eye-glass, an old book of woodcuts, and so forth. Other groups suggestive of various arts and industries could be arranged—such motives as metal-work, pottery, literature, painting, music, embroidery, spring, summer, autumn, and winter, might all be suggestively illustrated by well-selected groups of still life. Even different historic periods might be emblematically suggested—I should like to see more done in this way.

When choosing items for a still-life arrangement and painting, I believe we can create more interest by organizing important objects and accessories related to specific activities in a natural setting. Groups that reflect certain crafts, for example, could include items like a clear glass globe from a wood-engraver, a sandbag, the block it rests on, tools, gravers scattered around, a magnifying glass, and an old book of woodcuts. Other arrangements could represent various arts and industries—motifs like metalwork, pottery, literature, painting, music, embroidery, and the seasons of spring, summer, autumn, and winter could all be effectively illustrated with carefully chosen still-life groupings. Even different historical periods could be represented symbolically—I would love to see more of this approach.

Japanese Diagonal Pattern.

To return to design in the flat. If we start with a motive of circular masses, we cannot suddenly associate them with sharp angles—I mean in our leading forms. Of course we can make a network or trellis or diaper of the angles, to form a mat, [89] ground, or a framework on which to place our broad masses, as we may see effectively done by the Chinese and Japanese.

To get back to design in the flat. If we begin with round shapes, we can't suddenly link them to sharp angles—in our main forms, that is. Sure, we can create a network or trellis of angles to create a mat, [89] a ground, or a framework to support our larger shapes, as we often see done effectively by the Chinese and Japanese.

Corresponding Forms

Related Forms

If the principal group of forms in our pattern, say, are fruit forms—apples, pomegranates, or oranges—we must re-echo or carry out the curves in a lesser degree in the connecting stems and leaves. Change the form of the fruit, say, to lemons, and a further variation of connecting or subsidiary curve in stems and leaves will naturally suggest itself, and at the same time in following such principles we shall be expressing in an abstract way more of the character of the tree or plant itself. In looking at the leaf of a tree one may often see a suggestion of the general character and contour of the tree itself, and we know the line:

If the main shapes in our design, for example, are fruit shapes—like apples, pomegranates, or oranges—we need to echo or extend the curves to a lesser extent in the connecting stems and leaves. If we change the fruit to lemons, a different variation of the connecting curves in the stems and leaves will naturally come to mind. By following these principles, we can express more of the essence of the tree or plant in an abstract way. When looking at a tree's leaf, you can often see hints of the overall shape and character of the tree itself, and we know the line:

"Just as the twig is bent the tree's inclined."

"Just as the twig is bent, the tree will grow."

In dealing with angular motives the same principle would be followed, but corresponding to the difference of motive. Let the form of your detail be reflected in the character of your mass.

In working with angular shapes, the same principle applies, but it should match the nature of the design. Let the details in your work shine through in the overall shape.

I have spoken of the necessity in designing of seeking correspondences in form, and although, could we place every form in proper sequence and supply all the intermediary links to unite them harmoniously, forms of extreme diversity might thus be associated, given great extension of space (as in wall decoration, for instance), even then we should want these forms to correspond and recur. Yet, as a rule, having to deal in design with what are really parts rather than wholes, we can only endeavour by making the design of these parts simple and harmonious in line and form, and true to [92] their special conditions, to render their association decoratively possible.

I’ve talked about the importance of finding connections in design. Even if we could arrange every form in the right order and fill in all the links to connect them smoothly, we could still group very different forms together—especially in large spaces like wall decorations. However, we would still want these forms to relate to and repeat one another. Generally, when designing, we’re working with parts instead of complete pieces. Our goal should be to make these parts simple and harmonious in their lines and shapes, while also being true to [92] their specific context, so that their combination looks decorative and works well together.

Certain forms seem to lend themselves to design in ornament better than others, because they give the designer certain lines and masses which can be harmoniously repeated or combined with other allied forms or lines. Design from this point of view becomes a search for analogies of form.

Certain shapes seem to be better suited for decorative design than others, as they provide the designer with specific lines and forms that can be harmoniously repeated or combined with similar shapes or lines. From this perspective, design turns into a quest for similarities in form.

Analogies of Form

Analogies of Form

I mentioned certain simple geometric forms common to nature and art. Early ornament consists in the repetition of such forms. The next step was to connect them by lines: and so form and line, through endless vicissitudes and complexities, became united, to live happily in the world of decorative motive ever after. But long after the primitive unadorned geometric forms themselves have ceased to be the chief forms in ornament, their controlling influence is asserted over the boundaries of the more complicated masses introduced.

I talked about basic geometric shapes that are common in nature and art. Early decorations were made by repeating these shapes. The next step was to connect them with lines; thus, form and line, through countless changes and complications, became linked, living together happily in the world of decorative design forever. Even after the simple, unembellished geometric forms stopped being the main shapes in decorations, their guiding influence remained evident over the boundaries of the more complex designs that followed.

Typical Forms of Ornament

Common Types of Decoration

The simple rectangle is disguised under the fret, the circle and spiral assert their sway over the boundaries of the palmette, or circle and semicircle unite to form the oval so frequently used both as a unit in Greek ornament and as a controlling boundary. These are typical border forms: for extension and repetition in fields of pattern we find the same geometric plans at work in combination and subdivision, forming at first the ornament itself, and afterwards furnishing the plan and controlling boundaries only. Even in later stages in the evolution of surface decoration, in what are called naturalistic floral patterns, amid apparent carelessness and freedom, by the exigencies of repetition the ghost of buried geometric connection reappears, [94] and compels the most naturalistic roses on a wall-paper to acknowledge themselves artificial after all, as they nod to their counterparts from the masked angles of the inevitable diaper repeat.

The basic rectangle is hidden under the intricate design, while the circle and spiral assert their influence over the edges of the palmette. The circle and semicircle come together to create the oval, which is often used as both a unit in Greek decoration and as a controlling boundary. These are typical border shapes: for expansion and repetition in pattern fields, we see the same geometric designs at work in combination and subdivision, initially creating the ornament itself and later providing the plan and controlling boundaries only. Even in later stages of the development of surface decoration, in what are called naturalistic floral patterns, amid seemingly casual and free designs, the need for repetition brings back the underlying geometric connections. This compels even the most natural-looking roses on wallpaper to acknowledge their artificiality, as they nod to their counterparts from the masked angles of the inevitable repeating pattern. [94]

We find in the historical forms of decorative art constantly recurring types of form and line, such as the lotus of the Egyptians, the anthemia of the Greeks, the pineapple-like flower and palmette of the Persians, the peony of the Chinese. These forms, at first valued solely for their symbolical and heraldic significance, and continually demanded, became to the designer important elements or units in ornament. They gave him fine sweeping curves, radiating lines, and bold masses, without which a designer cannot live, any more than a poet without words. They were capable, too, of infinite variation in treatment, a variation which has been continued ever since, as by importation to different countries (the movement going on from east to west) the same forms were treated by designers of different races, and became mixed with other native elements, or consciously imitated as they are now by Manchester designers and manufacturers, to be sold again in textile form to their original owners, as it were, in the far East. Truly, a strange turn of the wheel.

We see in the history of decorative art that certain forms and lines keep appearing, like the lotus from Egypt, the anthemion from Greece, the pineapple-like flower and palmette from Persia, and the peony from China. Initially, these designs were valued just for their symbolic and heraldic meanings, but they became essential elements or units in ornamentation for designers. They provided elegant curves, radiating lines, and bold shapes—things that a designer can't live without, much like a poet can't live without words. These forms could also be endlessly varied, and this variation has continued over time. As these designs moved from east to west, different cultures adapted them, mixing them with local elements or consciously imitating them, as we see today with designers and manufacturers in Manchester creating textiles that get sent back to the Far East, almost like returning home. It’s really a fascinating twist of fate.

Ornamental Units

Decorative Units

The range of choice in ornamental units is, indeed, embarrassingly large for the modern designer, and a careful and tasteful selection becomes of more and more importance. It is not the number of forms you can combine, or because they are of Persian or Chinese origin, that your work will be artistic, but the judicious and inventive use made of the elements of your design. Ready-made units, [95]such as the Oriental forms I have mentioned, are no doubt easier to combine, to make an effect with, because a certain amount of selection has already been done. In fact, with such forms as the Persian or Indian palmette, we are dealing with the results of centuries of ornamental evolution, and with emblems immemorially treasured by ancient races. It behoves us, if we are called upon to recombine them, to treat them with sympathy, refinement, and respect, and to let them deteriorate as little as possible, for the spirit of an important ornamental form is like a gathered flower—it soon withers and becomes limp.

The variety of choices in decorative elements is truly overwhelming for today’s designers, making careful and tasteful selection increasingly important. It’s not just about how many shapes you can mix or whether they come from Persian or Chinese origins that makes your work artistic, but how thoughtfully and creatively you use the elements of your design. Pre-made units, [95] like the Oriental styles I mentioned, are certainly easier to combine to create an effect because some selection has already been done for you. In fact, when we use forms like the Persian or Indian palmette, we are working with results from centuries of ornamental development, along with symbols that have been cherished by ancient cultures for ages. If we are tasked with recombining them, we should treat them with sensitivity, elegance, and respect, minimizing any deterioration, because the essence of an important decorative form is like a picked flower—it quickly wilts and loses its vitality.

Sketches to Show Use of Counterbalance, Quantity, and Equivalents in Designing.

Equivalents in Form

Equivalent Forms

It is the spirit, after all, that is the important thing to preserve, in decorative design, however widely we may depart from the letter sometimes. This is a difficult quality to define, but I should say it chiefly consists in a nice attention to the character of form, the elastic spring of curves, an understanding of the construction and proportions, and grasp of the effect. In designing we constantly feel the need of repeating certain masses with variations or balancing them by equivalents, or the necessity of leading up to certain main forms by subsidiary forms, and to carry out their lines in other parts of the composition. In designing figures or emblems, for instance, within inclosed spaces, such as shields or cartouche shapes, forming leading elements in a design, it requires much invention and ornamental feeling so to arrange them that, while different in subject or meaning, and differently spaced, they shall yet properly counterbalance each other, and, though varied in detail, shall yet be equivalent in quantity. The same sort of feeling would [96]govern the case of designing two masses of fruit and foliage, say, forming two halves of an oblong panel, which, though starting on the symmetric plan from the centre, are not intended to be alike in detail; or in a frieze composed of a series of formalized trees, where it was desired to have each different, say, to express the progression of the seasons, it would be the sense of the necessity of [98] equivalents which would govern the decorative effect.

It’s the spirit that really matters in decorative design, even if we sometimes stray from the letter. This quality is hard to pin down, but I’d say it mainly involves a keen attention to the character of forms, the lively bounce of curves, an understanding of construction and proportions, and an awareness of the overall effect. When designing, we often feel the need to repeat certain shapes with variations, balance them with equivalents, or guide the eye to main forms using supporting shapes, while extending their lines throughout the composition. For example, when creating figures or symbols within enclosed spaces like shields or cartouche shapes that serve as key elements in a design, it takes a lot of creativity and an eye for decoration to arrange them so that, despite differences in subject, meaning, and spacing, they still properly balance each other out. Even if the details vary, they must feel equivalent in terms of overall quantity. The same principle applies when designing two masses of fruit and foliage, say, making up halves of a rectangular panel that, although they start symmetrically from the center, aren’t meant to look the same in detail; or in a frieze made up of a series of stylized trees, where each one is different to represent the changing seasons—what guides the decorative effect is the understanding of the need for [98] equivalents.

Quantities in Design

Design Quantities

Sketch to Illustrate Value of Different Quantities in Persian Rugs.

Such considerations naturally lead us to the question of the use of quantities in design—the ornamental proportions of ornament, or the contrasting distribution of form and line. For the mere repetition of ornamental forms over surfaces and objects without reference to proportion or structure is not decoration. The perception of appropriate quantities in design is really the decorative gauge or measure of effect.

Such thoughts naturally bring us to the question of using quantities in design—the decorative proportions of embellishment, or the contrasting arrangement of shape and line. Simply repeating decorative forms across surfaces and objects without considering proportion or structure isn’t decoration. Recognizing the right quantities in design is essentially the decorative standard or measure of impact.

Sketch to Illustrate Value of Different Quantities in Persian Rugs.

In designing a bordered panel—or say a carpet—we [99]might decide to throw the weight of pattern, colour, or emphasis upon either the field or border. Supposing the field had a dark ground upon which the arabesque or floral design was relieved, in the border it would be most effective to transpose this arrangement, making the ground light, and bringing out the border design dark upon it. Or, if the motive were reversed, giving a light ground to the [100]centre, with the pattern dark, the border might be brought out on a dark field. Or, again, for a less emphatic treatment the quantities of the pattern itself might be almost infinitely varied, massive forms and close fillings contrasting with open borders and united with intermediary bands.

In designing a bordered panel—or a carpet—we might choose to focus the pattern, color, or emphasis on either the field or the border. If the field has a dark background with a floral or arabesque design standing out, it would be most effective to switch this in the border, making the background light and highlighting the border design in a darker color. Conversely, if the centerpiece has a light background with a dark pattern, the border might be presented on a dark field. Alternatively, for a subtler approach, the proportions of the pattern could be varied significantly, with bold shapes and dense fillings contrasting against open borders, connected by intermediary bands.

Sketch to Illustrate Value of Different Quantities in Persian Rugs.

These intermediary bands or subsidiary borders are very important in Eastern rugs and carpets, and their quantities very carefully considered. A Persian designer, for instance, would never leave a blank unbroken strip of colour to surround his field; his object is not to isolate the quantities of his pattern, but to distinguish and unite them: so he makes use of the subsidiary borders as additional quantities. [101]A usual arrangement which always looks well is to have the border proper inclosed in two bands of about the same width and quantity in pattern—or they might be a repeat of each other—and to inclose the field or centre within another narrow subsidiary border. But the variations to be observed in any chance selection of Persian rugs or carpets are constant, and the amount of subtle variety and invention in these subsidiary borders is endless.

These intermediary bands or secondary borders are really important in Eastern rugs and carpets, and their quantities are carefully considered. A Persian designer, for example, would never leave an unbroken strip of color around the main field; his aim is not to isolate parts of his pattern but to define and connect them: so he uses these secondary borders as additional elements. [101] A common arrangement that always looks nice is to have the main border enclosed in two bands of roughly the same width and pattern—or they might repeat each other—and to surround the field or center with another narrow secondary border. However, the variations you'll see in any random selection of Persian rugs or carpets are consistent, and the amount of subtle diversity and creativity in these secondary borders is limitless.

Very excellent examples of the treatment and distribution of quantities may also be studied in the older Indian printed cottons, such as maybe seen at South Kensington.

Very good examples of the treatment and distribution of quantities can also be studied in the older Indian printed cottons, which can be seen at South Kensington.

Contrast

Contrast

The consideration of quantities in form and design involves the question of contrast, which, indeed, can hardly be separated from it. There is the contrast of form and line, and the contrast of colour and plane. It is with the first kind we are dealing now.

The consideration of quantities in form and design involves the question of contrast, which, indeed, can hardly be separated from it. There is the contrast of form and line, and the contrast of color and plane. It is with the first kind we are dealing now.

Take the simplest linear border, such as the type common in Greek work. We should easily weary of the continual repetition of such a form alone and unassisted, but add a vertical with an alternative dark filling, and we get a certain richness and solidity which is a relief at once. Add another quantity, and we get the rich effect of the egg and tongue or egg and dart moulding.

Take the most basic linear border, like the kind often seen in Greek art. We would quickly get tired of the endless repetition of such a single form on its own, but if we add a vertical element with a contrasting dark fill, it creates a sense of richness and stability that’s refreshing. Introduce another element, and we achieve the rich effect of the egg and tongue or egg and dart molding.

A still simpler instance of the use of contrast, however, is the chequer, or the principle of equal alternation of dark and light masses; but this touches colour contrast rather than form.

A simpler example of using contrast is the checkerboard, or the idea of equally alternating dark and light areas; however, this relates more to color contrast than to form.

The love of contrast makes the Chinese porcelain-painter break the blue borders of his plates [103]with small cartouche-like forms inclosing the light ground, varied with a spray or device of some light kind; or the diagonal, closely-filled field of his woven silk by broad discs or cartouches of another plane of ornament. But the love of sharp or very violent contrasts, more especially of form, may easily lead one astray and be destructive of ornamental effect. Like all decorative considerations, the artistic use of contrast depends much upon the particular case and the conditions of the work, and one cannot lay down any unvarying rules. There are agreeable and disagreeable contrasts, and their choice and use must depend upon the individual artist.

The love of contrast inspires the Chinese porcelain painter to break the blue borders of his plates [103] with small cartouche-like shapes enclosing the light background, decorated with a light spray or design; or the diagonal, densely filled area of his woven silk complemented by large discs or cartouches featuring a different type of ornamentation. However, an excessive love for sharp or extreme contrasts, especially in form, can easily mislead someone and undermine the decorative effect. Like all decorative considerations, the artistic use of contrast varies significantly based on the specific case and the conditions of the work, so no fixed rules can be set. There are pleasant and unpleasant contrasts, and the selection and application of these must depend on the individual artist.

Variation of Allied Forms

Variation of Allied Forms

The most beautiful kinds of design rather seem to depend upon the harmonious variation in association of similar or allied forms than on sharp contrasts.

The most beautiful types of design seem to rely more on the harmonious variation and combination of similar or related forms rather than on stark contrasts.

In compositions of figures the association of the delicate curves and angles of the human form, and the lines of drapery, with the emphatic verticals and horizontals, the semicircles and rectangles of architectural form, for instance, are always delightful in competent hands; as also compositions of figure and landscape, with its possibilities of undulating line corrected by the severe horizon, or sea-line, and contrasted with the vertical lines of trees, stems, and the rich forms of foliage masses.

In art, the combination of the graceful curves and angles of the human body, along with the lines of drapery, and the strong vertical and horizontal elements, as well as the semicircles and rectangles of architecture, is always pleasing when done well. Similarly, the interplay of figures and landscapes, with their flowing lines balanced by the strict horizon or shoreline, and contrasted with the vertical lines of trees, stems, and the lush shapes of foliage, creates wonderful compositions.

For the same reasons both of correspondence and contrast, masses of type or lettering of good form are admirable as foils to figure designs, in which commemorative monuments of all kinds and book designs afford abundant opportunities to the designer.

For the same reasons of both similarity and difference, well-designed type or lettering serves as great contrasts to figure designs, where commemorative monuments of all kinds and book designs provide plenty of opportunities for the designer.

[106] Use Of Human Figure and Animal Forms

[106] Use of Human Figures and Animal Shapes

In surface or textile decoration of all kinds nothing gives so much relief and vitality as the judicious use of animal forms and the human figure, although they are not much favoured at present. The forms of birds and animals, if designed in relation to the rest of the pattern, will give a pleasant variety of form and line, and in their forms and lines we find just those elements both of correspondence and contrast, in their relation to geometric or to floral design, which are so valuable.

In the decoration of surfaces or textiles, nothing adds as much depth and energy as the thoughtful use of animal shapes and human figures, even though they're not very popular right now. When birds and animals are designed in relation to the rest of the pattern, they provide a nice variety of shapes and lines. Their forms and lines offer the right balance of similarity and contrast when compared to geometric or floral designs, which is very valuable.

In order to combine such forms successfully, however, great care in designing is necessary; and a good sound principle to follow as a general guide is to make the boundaries of the bird or animal touch the limits of an imaginary inclosing form of some simple geometric or floral or leaf shape (see p. 104). This would at once control the form and render it available in a pattern as a decorative mass or unit. The particular shape of the controlling form must, of course, depend upon the general character of the design, whether free and flowing or square and restricted, the nature of the repeat, the ultimate position of the work, and so on. A study of Gothic heraldry and the early Sicilian silk patterns would be very instructive in this connection, since it is rather the heraldic ideal than that of the natural history book which is decoratively appropriate. At the same time it is quite possible to combine ornamental treatment with a great deal of natural truth in structure and character.

To successfully combine these forms, it's essential to pay close attention to the design. A helpful guideline is to have the edges of the bird or animal touch the borders of an imaginary enclosing shape that is simple, whether geometric, floral, or leaf-like (see p. 104). This approach will control the form and allow it to function as a decorative unit. The specific shape of the enclosing form should, of course, reflect the overall style of the design, whether it's free-flowing or more rigid and squared, the nature of the repeat, the final placement of the work, and so on. Studying Gothic heraldry and early Sicilian silk patterns would provide valuable insights here, as the heraldic style is often more decoratively fitting than the natural history book approach. However, it's entirely possible to blend ornamental treatment with a significant degree of natural accuracy in both structure and character.

Much the same principles apply to the treatment of the human figure as an element in ornament; they should be designed, whether singly or in groups, under the control of imaginary boundaries, [107]and care must be taken that in line and mass they re-echo (or are re-echoed by) other lines which connect them with the rest of the design, if they occur as incidents in repeating wall-paper or hanging design, for instance. It is, however, quite possible to imagine a decorative effect produced by the use of figures alone (see p. 105), with something very subsidiary in the way of connecting links of linear or floral pattern, much as figures were used by the ancient Greek vase-painters, beautifully distributed as ornament over the concave or convex surfaces of the vases and vessels of the potter, the forms of which, as all good decoration should do, they helped to express as well as to adorn.

Many of the same principles apply to the treatment of the human figure as part of ornament; they should be designed, whether individually or in groups, with the guidance of imagined boundaries, [107] and it's important to ensure that in line and mass they resonate with other lines that connect them to the rest of the design, especially if they appear as elements in repeating wallpaper or hanging designs, for example. However, it's entirely possible to envision a decorative effect created solely with figures (see p. 105), with just a few connecting links of line or floral patterns, similar to how ancient Greek vase-painters used figures, beautifully arranged as decoration on the concave or convex surfaces of vases and pottery, helping to express and enhance the forms, just as all good decoration should.


CHAPTER V

Of the Influence of Controlling Lines, Boundaries, Spaces, and Plans in Designing—Origin of Geometric Decorative Spaces and Panels in Architecture—Value of Recurring Line—Tradition—Extension—Adaptability—Geometric Structural Plans—Frieze and Field—Ceiling Decoration—Co-operative Relation.

Of the Influence of Controlling Lines, Boundaries, Spaces, and Plans in Design—Origin of Geometric Decorative Spaces and Panels in Architecture—Value of Recurring Lines—Tradition—Expansion—Flexibility—Geometric Structural Plans—Frieze and Field—Ceiling Decoration—Collaborative Relationship.

The function of line considered from the point of view of its controlling influence as a boundary, or inclosure, of design, upon which I touched in the last chapter, is a very important one, and deserves most attentive study.

The role of line, when looked at in terms of its controlling influence as a boundary or enclosure of design, which I discussed in the last chapter, is very significant and deserves careful examination.

The usual problem a designer in the flat has to solve is to fill harmoniously a given space or panel defined by a line—some simple geometric form—such as a square or a circle, a parallelogram, a diamond, a lunette.

The common challenge a designer in the flat faces is to harmoniously fill a specific space or panel defined by a line—some simple geometric shape—like a square, circle, parallelogram, diamond, or lunette.

Influence of Controlling Lines, etc.

Impact of Controlling Lines, etc.

Now it is possible to regard such spaces or panels as more or less unrelated, and simply as the boundaries of an individual composition or picture of some kind. Yet even so considered a certain sense of geometric control would come in in the selection of our lines and masses, both in regard to each other and in regard to the shape of the inclosing boundary. We seem to feel the need of some answering line or re-echo in the character of the composition to the shape of its boundary, to give it its [110]distinctive reason for existence in that particular form—just as we should expect a shell-fish to conform to the shape of its shell. Such a re-echo or acknowledgment might be ever so slight, or might be quite emphatic and dominate as the leading motive, but for perfectly harmonious effect it must be there.

Now, it’s possible to see these spaces or panels as mostly unrelated, simply acting as the edges of an individual composition or picture. Even so, when we think about it, there’s still a sense of geometric control in how we choose our lines and shapes, both in relation to each other and to the outline that surrounds them. There seems to be a need for a corresponding line or echo in the composition that matches the shape of its boundary, giving it a specific purpose in that form—much like we would expect a shellfish to fit the shape of its shell. This echo or acknowledgment could be very subtle or quite prominent and serve as the main theme, but for a perfectly harmonious effect, it needs to be present.

A strictly simple and logical linear filling of such spaces might be expressed in the most primitive way, as in the illustration on p. 109.

A straightforward and logical way to fill these spaces could be described in the simplest terms, as shown in the illustration on p. 109.

By these means certain primitive types of ornament are evolved, such as the Greek volute and the Greek key or fret, the logical ornament of a logical people.

By these methods, certain basic types of decoration develop, like the Greek volute and the Greek key or fret, the fitting ornament of a logical society.

Such arrangements of line form simple linear patterns, and a decorative effect of surface is produced simply by their repetition, especially if the principle of alternation be observed. This principle may be expressed by taking, say, a series of squares or circles, and placing them either in a line as for a border arrangement, or for extension vertically and laterally over a surface, and filling only the alternate square or circle, leaving the alternate ones, or dropping them out altogether (see illustration, p. 111).

Such arrangements of lines create simple linear patterns, and a decorative effect on the surface is achieved through their repetition, especially if you follow the principle of alternation. This principle can be illustrated by taking, for example, a series of squares or circles and arranging them in a line for a border, or extending them vertically and horizontally across a surface, while filling in only every other square or circle and leaving the others empty, or completely omitting them (see illustration, p. 111).

When we desire to go beyond such primitive linear ornaments, however, and introduce natural form, we should still be guided by the same principles, if we desire to produce a strictly decorative effect, while varying them in application to any extent.

When we want to move past basic linear designs and bring in natural shapes, we should still follow the same principles if we want to create a purely decorative effect, even if we change how we apply them as much as we want.

It matters not what forms we deal with, floral, animal, human; directly we come to combine them in a design, to control them by a boundary, to [113]inclose them in a space, we shall feel this necessity of controlling line, which, however concealed, is yet essential to bring them into that harmonious relation which is the essence of all design (see illustration, p. 112).

It doesn't matter what shapes we work with—whether they're flowers, animals, or humans; as soon as we start to combine them in a design, set boundaries around them, or confine them to a space, we will sense the need to control the lines. Even when hidden, these lines are crucial for creating the harmonious relationship that is at the heart of all design (see illustration, p. 112).

We may take it as a general rule that the more purely ornamental the purpose of our design, and the more abstract in form it is, the more emphatically we may carry out the principle of correspondence of line between that of the inclosing boundary and that of the design itself; and, vice versâ, as the design becomes more pictorial in its appeal and more complex and varied in its elements, the more we may combine the leading motive or principle of line with secondary ones, or with variations, since every fresh element, every new direction of line, every new form introduced, demands some kind of re-echo to bring it into relation with the other elements of the design, or parts of the composition, whatever may be its nature and purpose.

As a general rule, we can say that the more decorative the purpose of our design is, and the more abstract it appears, the more we can effectively apply the principle of matching the boundary lines with those of the design itself; and, vice versa, as the design becomes more visual and includes more complex and varied elements, we can merge the main line style with secondary ones or variations. Each new element, direction of line, or introduced form requires some kind of echo to connect it with the other elements of the design or parts of the composition, regardless of its nature and purpose.

Now, if we seek further the meaning and origin of this necessity of the control of geometric lines and spaces in design, I think we shall find it in the constructive necessities of architecture: for it is certainly from architecture that we derive those typical spaces and panels the designer is so often called upon to fill.

Now, if we dig deeper into the meaning and origin of the need to control geometric lines and spaces in design, I believe we'll discover it in the structural requirements of architecture. After all, it's definitely from architecture that we gain those typical spaces and panels that designers are frequently asked to fill.

Origin of Geometric Decorative Spaces

Origin of Geometric Design Spaces

Lintel architecture—the Egyptian and the Greek—gave us the frieze, both continuous, as in that of the Cella of the Parthenon, or divided by triglyphs, which represented the ends of the beams of the primitive timber construction; and the interstices left between these determined the shape of the [115] sculptured panel or slab inserted, and influenced the character of its masses and the lines of its design, which was under the necessity of harmonizing with the whole building (see illustration, p. 114).

Lintel architecture—both Egyptian and Greek—gave us the frieze, which could be continuous, like that on the Cella of the Parthenon, or divided by triglyphs that represented the ends of the beams from the original timber construction. The gaps left between these determined the shape of the sculpted panel or slab that was inserted and influenced the character of its forms and the design lines, which had to harmonize with the entire building (see illustration, p. 114).

Tower of the Winds Athens BC 50

The same may be said of the pediments. The angle of the low-pitched roof left another interstice [116]for the sculptor at each end of the building; and I have elsewhere[2] pointed out the influence of the inclosing space and the angles of the pediment of the Parthenon upon the arrangement of the groups within it, and even upon the lines taken by some of the figures, especially the reclining figures near the acute angles.

The same goes for the pediments. The shape of the low-pitched roof created another gap [116] for the sculptor at each end of the building; and I have mentioned elsewhere[2] the impact of the enclosed space and the angles of the Parthenon's pediment on how the groups inside it were organized, and even on the poses of some of the figures, especially the reclining ones near the sharp angles.

[2] See "Bases of Design."

See "Bases of Design."

Certain lines become inseparably associated with constructive expression, and are used to emphasize it, as the vertical flutings of the Doric column, by repeating the lines of the column itself, emphasize its constructive expression of supporting the weight of the horizontal lintels, the lines of which, repeated in the mouldings of the frieze and cornice, are associated with level restfulness and secure repose.

Certain lines become permanently linked with structural expression and are used to highlight it, like the vertical flutings of a Doric column that underscore its role in supporting the weight of horizontal lintels. The lines of the lintels, echoed in the moldings of the frieze and cornice, evoke a sense of calm stability and secure rest.

As examples of design which, while meeting the structural necessities and acknowledging the control of space and general conditions, as the form of the slabs upon which they are sculptured, yet expresses independent movement, the figures of the octagonal tower of the winds at Athens are interesting (see illustration, p. 115).

As examples of design that not only fulfill structural needs while considering the control of space and overall conditions, like the shape of the slabs they’re carved from, but also convey a sense of independent movement, the figures on the octagonal Tower of the Winds in Athens are quite fascinating (see illustration, p. 115).

Quite a different feeling, corresponding to differences in conception and spirit in design, comes in with the Roman round arch its allied forms of spandril and vault, lunette and medallion, presenting new spaces for the surface designer, and new suggestions of ornamental line (see illustration, p. 117). It is noticeable how, with the round-arched architecture under Roman, Byzantine (see illustration, p. 118), and Renaissance forms, the scroll form of ornament developed, the reason being, I think, that it gave the necessary element of [119] recurring line, whether used in the horizontal frieze in association with round arches, or in spandrils of vaults and arcades, and on marble mosaic pavements.

A completely different vibe, reflecting changes in design and spirit, comes with the Roman round arch and its related forms like spandril, vault, lunette, and medallion, offering fresh spaces for surface designers and new ideas for decorative lines (see illustration, p. 117). It's interesting to see how, with round-arched architecture in Roman, Byzantine (see illustration, p. 118), and Renaissance styles, the scroll-shaped ornament evolved. I believe this happened because it provided the essential element of [119] a repeating line, whether used in the horizontal frieze alongside round arches, in the spandrils of vaults and arcades, and on marble mosaic floors.

Value of the Recurring Line

Value of the Recurring Line

The development of Gothic architecture, with its new constructive features and the greater variety of geometric spaces, forms, and interstices which, as a consequence, were available for the designer of associated ornament, whether carved work, mosaic, stained glass, or painting, naturally led to a corresponding variety in invention and decorative adaptation; and we may trace the same principle at work in other forms—I mean the principle of corresponding, counterbalancing, and recurring line—Gothic ornament being indeed generally an essential part of the structure, and architectural features being constantly repeated and utilized for their ornamental value, as in the case of canopies and tabernacle work.

The evolution of Gothic architecture, with its new construction methods and a wider range of geometric shapes, forms, and gaps, provided designers with more options for decorative elements like carved work, mosaics, stained glass, or paintings. This naturally resulted in a greater diversity of inventions and decorative styles. We can see the same idea at play in other forms of art—I’m talking about the concept of balanced and recurring lines—where Gothic decoration is often a key part of the architecture, and architectural elements are regularly repeated and used for their decorative appeal, similar to canopies and tabernacle work.

We see, for instance, in the Decorated period the acute gable moulding over the arched recess, niche, doorway, or tomb, lightened and vivified by a floriated finial springing into vigorous curves from a vertical stem, forming an emphatic ogee outline which re-echoes the ogee line of the arch below, and is taken up in variations by the crockets carved upon the sides of the gable; and their spiral ascending lines lead the eye up to the finial which completes the composition. We may trace the same principle in the carved fillings of the subsidiary parts, such as the trefoiled panels, the secondary mouldings, and the cusps of the arches, which continue the line-motive or decorative harmony to the last point (see illustration, p. 120). [120]The elegance and lightness of the pinnacles is increased in the same way, and further emphasized by the long vertical lines of the sunk panels upon their sides.

We can see, for example, during the Decorated period, the sharp gable molding over the arched recess, niche, doorway, or tomb, made lighter and more lively by a floral finial that rises in strong curves from a vertical stem, creating a striking ogee shape that echoes the ogee line of the arch below. This is reflected in variations by the crockets carved on the sides of the gable, and their spiral ascending lines guide the viewer's gaze up to the finial that completes the design. We can also observe the same principle in the carved details of the additional parts, such as the trefoiled panels, the secondary moldings, and the cusps of the arches, which carry the line-motive or decorative harmony all the way to the end (see illustration, p. 120). [120]The elegance and lightness of the pinnacles is enhanced in the same way and further highlighted by the long vertical lines of the recessed panels on their sides.

From Canopy of Tomb of Gervaise-Alard 1303. Temp ED^wd^ I^st^ Winchelsea

In church doorways we may see certain voussoirs of the arch allowed to project from the hollow of [121]the concave moulding, and their surfaces carved into bosses of ornament; while, again, the doorway is emphasized by the recurring lines of the mouldings, with their contrasting planes of light and shadow, and the point of their spring is marked [122]by a carved lion, controlled in the design of its contour by the squareness of the block of stone upon which it is carved (see illustration, p. 121).

In church doorways, we can see some voussoirs of the arch extending out from the hollow of the concave molding, their surfaces intricately carved into decorative bosses. The doorway is highlighted by the repeating lines of the moldings, creating a striking contrast between light and shadow. The point where the arch starts is marked by a carved lion, whose design is shaped by the square block of stone it’s carved on (see illustration, p. 121).

Structural Control of Line in Architectural Enrichments West Door Walberswick Ch. Suffolk

The carvings of miserere seats in our cathedral choirs often afford instances of ingenious design and arrangement of elements difficult to combine, yet always showing the instinct of following the control of the dominating form and peculiar lines of the seat itself. There is an instance of one from St. David's Cathedral—apparently a humorous satire—a goose-headed woman offering a cake to a man-headed gull (?), or perhaps they are both geese! I won't pretend to say, but it evidently is intended to suggest cupboard love, and there is a portentously large pitcher of ale in reserve on the bench. But note the clever arrangement of the masses and lines, and how the lines of the [123]seat and the curves of the terminating scroll are re-echoed in the lines of the figures and accessories.

The carvings on the miserere seats in our cathedral choirs often showcase clever designs and arrangements of elements that are challenging to combine, yet always reflect the instinct to adhere to the dominant shape and unique lines of the seat itself. One example from St. David's Cathedral seems to be a humorous satire—a goose-headed woman offering a cake to a man-headed gull (?), or maybe they’re both geese! I won’t claim to know for sure, but it clearly suggests affection based on convenience, and there's a noticeably large pitcher of ale in reserve on the bench. But look at the smart arrangement of the shapes and lines, and how the lines of the [123] seat and the curves of the ending scroll are echoed in the figures and accessories.

A stone-carving from the end of a tomb in the same cathedral—that of Bishop John Morgan, 1504—of a griffin with a shield shows an emphatic repetition of the inclosing line of the arched recess in the curves of the wings which follow it.

A stone carving from the end of a tomb in the same cathedral—that of Bishop John Morgan, 1504—depicts a griffin with a shield, clearly emphasizing the repeated enclosing line of the arched recess in the curves of the wings that follow.

There is also a charming corbel of a half-figure of an angel, which, though somewhat defaced, shows the architectural sense very strongly in its design—the vertical droop of the wing-feathers inclosing the figure repeating and continuing the vertical lines of the shafts and the subsidiary mouldings of the arrangement of the drapery, and [124]its termination in crisp foliated forms, which pleasantly counterbalance the set of the scale feathers of the wings and break the semicircular mouldings of the base of the corbel, repeating those of the shafts above.

There’s also a lovely corbel featuring a half-figure of an angel that, although a bit worn, clearly demonstrates strong architectural design. The downward curve of the wing feathers around the figure echoes the vertical lines of the shafts and the additional moldings of the drapery. Its end in sharp, leaf-like shapes nicely balances the alignment of the scale feathers on the wings and interrupts the semicircular moldings at the base of the corbel, mirroring those of the shafts above.

Adaptability in Design

Design Flexibility

Gothic Tile Pattern S. David's Cath^l.

Adaptation to spaces upon a flat surface is also [125]illustrated in some tile patterns from the same place. They are simple and rude but very effective bits of spacing, and show a thorough grasp of the principles we have been considering—if, indeed, it is so far conscious work at all. But [126]whether or not the outcome of a tradition which seemed to be almost instinctive with mediæval workmen—a tradition which yet left the individual free, and under which design was a thing of life and growth, ever adapting itself to new conditions, and grafting freely new inventions to flower in fresh phantasy upon the ancient stock—the movement in art in the Middle Ages, exhibiting as it does a gradual growth and a constant vitality, always accompanying and adapting itself to structural changes, to life and habit, was really more analogous to the development of mechanical science in our own day, where each new machine is allied to its predecessors, though it supplants them. The one law being adaptability, the one aim to apply means to ends, and more and more perfectly, inessentials and superfluities are shed, and invention triumphs. It is, too, a collective advance, since each engineer, each inventor, builds upon the experience of both his forerunners and his fellow-workers, and everything is brought to an immediately practical test.

Adapting to flat surfaces is also [125]shown in some tile patterns from the same area. They are simple and rough but very effective spacing elements, demonstrating a solid understanding of the principles we've been discussing—if, in fact, it's even conscious design at all. But [126]whether this is the result of a tradition that seemed almost instinctive for medieval craftsmen—a tradition that still allowed individual expression, where design was a living, growing process that constantly adjusted to new conditions and incorporated new ideas to flourish in fresh creativity upon the old foundation—the artistic movement in the Middle Ages, with its gradual development and ongoing vitality, consistently evolving alongside structural changes, daily life, and routine, is actually more similar to the advancement of mechanical science in our time, where every new machine has a connection to its predecessors, even as it replaces them. The main principle is adaptability, the primary goal is to effectively apply resources to achieve results, and as essentials and excess are eliminated, innovation prevails. It’s also a collective advancement, as each engineer and inventor builds on the knowledge gained from their predecessors and peers, with everything subjected to practical testing right away.

We are not yet in the same healthy condition as regards art, and art can never be on the same plane as science, though art may learn much from science, chiefly perhaps in the direction of the inventive adaptation of analogous principles. But in art the question is complicated by human feeling and association, and her strongest appeal is to these, and by these, and as yet we do not seem to have any terms or equivalents precise enough to describe, or any analysis fine enough to discover them.

We are still not in a healthy place when it comes to art, and art can never be on the same level as science, even though art can learn a lot from science, especially in terms of creatively applying similar principles. However, in art, the situation is more complicated because of human emotions and connections, and its strongest impact comes from these elements. So far, we don’t seem to have clear enough terms or equivalents to describe them, nor do we have a detailed enough analysis to uncover them.

Extension

Add-on

The next consideration in spacing we may term [127]extension. This bears upon all surface design, but more especially upon the design of patterns intended to repeat over a large surface, and not specially designed for particular spaces. It is a great question whether any design can be entirely satisfactory unless it has been thought out in relation to some particular extent of surface or as adapted to some particular wall or room. Modern industrial conditions preclude this possibility as a rule, and so the only sure ground, beyond individual taste and preference, is technical adaptability to process or material. We should naturally want to give a different character to a textile pattern, whether printed or woven, and intended to hang in folds, from one for flat extension as a wall-paper; and a different character again to such designs intended for extension horizontally from those intended for vertical space alone. Floor patterns, parquets and carpets, for instance, naturally demand different treatment from wall patterns, as those orders of plants in nature which cling and spread on the flat ground differ from those which grow high and maintain themselves in the air, or climb upon trees. The rule of life—adaptability—obtains in art as in nature, and, beneath individual preference and passing fashion, works the silent but real law of relation to conditions. This again bears upon the choice of scale, and differentiates the design of dress textiles from furniture textiles, and the design of varied surfaces and objects, which, while demanding their own particular treatment, are brought into general relation by their association with use and the wants of humanity.

The next thing to think about in spacing is [127]extension. This applies to all surface designs, especially patterns meant to repeat over a large area, rather than specific spaces. A big question is whether any design can be truly satisfying unless it’s considered in relation to a specific surface size or tailored to a particular wall or room. Modern industrial practices usually make this impossible, so the only reliable criteria, aside from personal taste, is how technically adaptable the design is to the process or material. We would naturally want to give a different look to a fabric pattern—whether printed or woven—that’s designed to hang in folds, compared to one meant for flat surfaces like wallpaper; and again, a different approach for designs extending horizontally than those meant for vertical spaces only. For example, floor patterns, like parquets and carpets, require different treatment than wall patterns, just as the types of plants in nature that spread across the ground differ from those that grow tall and support themselves in the air, or climb trees. The principle of life—adaptability—applies in art as in nature, and, beneath personal preferences and fleeting trends, operates the silent but real law of relation to conditions. This also influences the choice of scale and distinguishes the design of textiles for clothing from those for furniture, as well as the design of various surfaces and objects, which, while needing their own specific treatment, are connected by their use and the needs of humanity.

Extension: Surface Pattern Motives Derived from Lines of Structure.

[130] Geometric Structural Plans, etc.

Geometric Structural Plans, etc.

The law governing extension of design over surface is again geometric, and our primal circle and square are again the factors and progenitors of the leading systems which have governed the design of diapers and wall patterns and hangings of all kinds. Nay, the first weaver of the wattled fence discovered the principle of extension in design, and showed its inseparable association with construction; and the builder with brick or stone emphasizes it, producing the elements of linear surface pattern, from the mechanical necessity of the position of the joints of his structure. At a German railway station waiting-room I noticed an effective adaptation of this principle as a wall decoration in two blues upon a stone colour (see illustration, p. 128). We may build upon such emphatic structural lines, either incorporating them with the design motive, as in all rectangular wall diapers, or we may suppress or conceal the actual constructive lines by placing the principal parts or connections of our pattern over them, but one cannot construct a satisfactory pattern to repeat and extend without them; for these constructive lines or plans give the necessary organic life and vigour to such designs, and are as needful to them as the trellis to the tendrils of the vine (see illustration, p. 129).

The rules for extending design over a surface are geometric again, with our basic circle and square serving as the main elements that have shaped the design of fabrics and wall patterns for everything from curtains to wallpapers. In fact, the first person who wove a wattle fence uncovered the principle of extending design and showed how closely it’s tied to construction. Builders using bricks or stones highlight this principle, creating linear surface patterns based on the mechanical requirements of how joints in their structures fit together. While waiting in a German railway station, I noticed an effective use of this principle as wall decoration in two shades of blue on a stone-colored background (see illustration, p. 128). We can build on these strong structural lines, either by integrating them into the design, as is done in all rectangular wall patterns, or by hiding them behind the main elements of our design. However, it's impossible to create a satisfying pattern to repeat and extend without these structural lines; they provide essential organic life and energy to the designs, just like a trellis supports the tendrils of a vine (see illustration, p. 129).

The same principle is true of designs upon the curvilinear plan. The mere repetition of the circle by itself gives us a simple geometric pattern, and we are at liberty to emphasize this circular plan as the main motive; or, as in the case of the rectangular plans, to treat it merely as a basis, and develop free scroll motives upon it; or [132] follow it through its principal variations, as in the ogee, formed by dropping out two intermediate semicircles; or the various forms of the scale arrangement. These simple geometric plans are the most generally useful as plans of designs intended for repetition and extension over space, and they are always safe and sound systems to build upon, since a geometric plan is certain to join comfortably if our measurements are right.

The same idea applies to designs based on curved shapes. Just repeating a circle alone creates a basic geometric pattern, and we can choose to highlight this circular design as the main theme; or, similar to rectangular designs, we can use it just as a foundation and develop free-flowing scroll patterns on top of it; or [132] follow its main variations, like the ogee, which is created by removing two middle semicircles; or the different types of scale arrangements. These straightforward geometric designs are the most useful for patterns meant to be repeated and spread over a space, and they are always reliable systems to build on since a geometric design will fit together well as long as our measurements are accurate.

We may, however, often feel that we want something bolder and freer, and start with a motive of sweeping-curves, non-geometric, but even then a certain geometric relation will be necessary, or an equivalent for it, since each curve must be counterbalanced in some way, though not necessarily symmetrically, of course; and even where a square of pattern—say to a wall-paper repeat of twenty-one inches—has been designed, not consciously upon a geometric base, but simply as a composition of lines and masses to repeat, the mechanical conditions of the work when it comes to be printed will supply a certain geometric control, since it necessarily begins in the process of repetition a series of squares of pattern in which the curves are bound to recur in corresponding places. Without a geometric plan of some sort, however, we may easily get into difficulties with awkward leading lines, gaps, or masses, that tumble down, and are only perceived when the paper is printed and hung.

We might often feel like we want something bolder and more freeform, starting with sweeping curves that aren't geometric, but even then, a certain geometric relationship will be necessary, or something similar, because each curve needs to be balanced in some way, though not necessarily symmetrically. Even when a square pattern—like a wallpaper repeat of twenty-one inches—has been created not deliberately based on geometry, but just as a composition of lines and shapes to repeat, the mechanical aspects of the printing process will impose a certain geometric structure. This is because, when it comes to repetition, it inevitably starts a series of squares where the curves will recur in similar places. Without some kind of geometric plan, we can easily run into problems with awkward lines, gaps, or shapes that fall apart, and these issues typically only become obvious once the paper is printed and hung.

The designer should not feel at all restricted or cramped by his geometric plan, but treat it as an aid and a scaffolding, working in as much variety and richness of detail as he likes, bound only by [133]the necessity of repeating or counterbalancing his forms and lines. In the diagram (p. 131) the plan of making a repeat less obvious by means of what is termed "a drop" is given, and this system also increases the apparent width of a pattern.

The designer shouldn't feel limited or confined by the geometric plan; instead, they should see it as a tool and a framework that allows for a lot of variety and intricate details. The only limitation is the need to repeat or balance their shapes and lines. In the diagram (p. 131), the method of making a repeat less noticeable through what's called "a drop" is shown, and this approach also makes a pattern seem wider.

Frieze and Field

Frieze and Field

The feeling which demands some kind of contrast or relief to a field of repeating pattern, however interesting in itself, seems now almost instinctive. It is felt, too, in the case of plain surfaces, where the eye seeks a moulding to give a little variety or pattern-equivalent in play of light and shadow upon different planes, lines, or concavities and convexities. The common plaster cornice placed to unite walls and ceiling, in our ordinary houses, is a concession (on the part even of the jerriest of builders) to the æsthetic sense. We get the decorated frieze in architecture in obedience to the same demand, though originally a necessary feature of lintel construction, as we have seen, from the days of the festal garland hung around the eaves of the classic house, to its perpetuation in stone in so many varieties.[3] The carved garland depending in a series of graceful curves, or contrasted with pendants, or their rhythm punctuated, as it were, by ox-heads, as on the temple of the Sibyls, Tivoli, formed the needed contrast to the plane masonry of the wall below. Sculptured figures, with the added interest of story, as on the choragic monument of Lysicrates, fulfilled the same decorative function in a more complex and elaborate way.

The feeling that calls for some kind of contrast or relief to a repetitive pattern, no matter how interesting it is on its own, now seems almost instinctive. We also feel this when looking at plain surfaces, where the eye searches for a molding to introduce a bit of variety or a pattern equivalent in the play of light and shadow across different planes, lines, or curves. The typical plaster cornice that connects walls and ceilings in our everyday homes is a concession (even from the most basic builders) to aesthetic appreciation. We see decorated friezes in architecture responding to the same need, even though they were originally necessary for lintel construction. This can be traced back to the festive garlands hung around the eaves of classic houses, which were later replicated in stone in various styles. The carved garland, with its graceful curves and contrasting pendants, often punctuated by ox-heads, like those on the temple of the Sibyls in Tivoli, provided the necessary contrast to the flat masonry of the wall below. Sculptured figures, with the added appeal of storytelling, as seen on the choragic monument of Lysicrates, served the same decorative purpose in a more intricate and elaborate manner.

[3] See "Bases of Design."

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See "Design Principles."

To satisfy the same feeling we place a frieze [134]above the patterned field of our modern wall-papers. Such a frieze may be considered as a contrasting border to the pattern of the field, much as the border of a carpet, allowing for difference of material and position; or the frieze may assert itself as the dominant decoration of the room. In this case it would be greater in depth than the simpler bordering type. The interest of the field filling would then be subsidiary, and lead up to the frieze. In wall-paper friezes the difficulty in designing is to think of a motive which will not tire the eye in the necessarily frequent repeats of twenty-one inches. Longer ones have occasionally been produced, the limit being sixty inches. It is often a good plan to recur in the main lines or forms of the frieze to some variation of the lines or forms of the field. If, for instance, the main motive in the field was a vertical scroll design, a horizontal scroll design upon a large scale used for the frieze would answer, the field being kept flat and quiet; or the fan, or radiating shell form, used as a frieze, above a pattern on the scale plan, would be quite harmonious. Relation and balance of line and mass, and arrangement of quantities in such designs, are the chief considerations.

To create the same feeling, we place a frieze [134]above the patterned area of our modern wallpapers. This frieze can act as a contrasting border to the pattern in the field, similar to the border of a carpet, allowing for differences in material and placement; or the frieze can take the spotlight as the main decoration in the room. In this case, it would be more pronounced in depth compared to the simpler bordering type. The interest of the pattern in the field would then be secondary, supporting the frieze. In wallpaper friezes, the challenge in designing is to find a motif that won’t become dull with the necessary repeats of twenty-one inches. Longer repeats have occasionally been made, with the limit being sixty inches. It’s often a good idea to incorporate some variation of the lines or shapes from the field in the main lines or forms of the frieze. For example, if the main motif in the field is a vertical scroll design, a horizontal scroll design on a large scale for the frieze would work well, keeping the field flat and calm; or using a fan or radiating shell form as a frieze above a pattern on the scale plan would be quite harmonious. The relationship and balance of line and mass, along with the arrangement of elements in such designs, are the main considerations.

With painting or modelling an artist is freer, as he is at liberty to design a continuous frieze of figures, and introduce as much variety as he chooses.

With painting or sculpting, an artist has more freedom, as they can create a continuous frieze of figures and include as much variety as they want.

A painted frieze of figures above plain oak-panelling has a good effect in a large and well-proportioned room, and is perhaps one of the pleasantest ways of treating interior walls.

A painted mural of figures above simple oak paneling looks great in a large and well-proportioned room, and it’s probably one of the most pleasant ways to decorate interior walls.

Sketch Designs to Show Relation Between Frieze And Field in Wall-paper.

[136] Ceiling Decoration

Ceiling Decor

Ceiling decoration, again, presents problems of extension in designing, and the large flat plaster ceilings of modern rooms are by no means easy to deal with satisfactorily. The simplest way is to resort to wall-paper, and here, restricted in size of repeat and the usual technical requirements of the work, the designer must further consider appropriateness of scale, and position in regard to eye, relation to the wall, and so forth.

Ceiling decoration, once again, poses challenges in design, and the large flat plaster ceilings of modern rooms are definitely not easy to manage effectively. The easiest solution is to use wallpaper, and here, limited by the size of the pattern repeat and the standard technical requirements of the job, the designer must also think about scale appropriateness and position in relation to the eye, how it relates to the wall, and so on.

The natural demand is for something simpler in treatment than the walls—a re-echo, in some sort, of plans agreeable to the floor, yet with a suggestion of something lighter and freer: here we may safely come back to rectangular and circular plans again for our leading lines and forms.

The natural desire is for something easier to work with than walls—a kind of reflection of designs that work well with the floor, but with a hint of something lighter and more open: here we can confidently return to rectangular and circular designs for our main lines and shapes.

Painting and modelling, again, offer more elaborate treatment and possibilities, and we know that beautiful works have been done in both ways; but art of this kind seems more appropriate to lofty vaulted chambers and churches, such as one sees in the palaces of Italy, at Genoa and Venice, at Florence and Rome.

Painting and modeling provide more detailed options and opportunities, and we know that stunning artwork has been created in both forms; however, this type of art seems more fitting for grand vaulted rooms and churches, like those found in the palaces of Italy, in places like Genoa and Venice, Florence and Rome.

I remember a very striking and bold treatment of a flat-beamed ceiling in the Castle of Nuremberg, where a huge black German eagle was painted so as to occupy nearly the whole field of the ceiling, but treated in an extremely flat and heraldic way, the long feathers of the wings following the lines of the beams and falling parallel upon them and between them; and upon the black wings and body of the eagle different shields of arms were displayed in gold and colours, the eagle itself being painted upon the natural unpainted wood—oak, I think. The work belonged [137]to the thirteenth or fourteenth century, I believe. It seemed the very antithesis of Italian finesse and fancy, but the fitness of such decoration entirely depends upon its relation to its surroundings, which in this case were perfectly appropriate.

I remember a striking and bold design of a flat-beamed ceiling in the Castle of Nuremberg, where a massive black German eagle was painted to nearly cover the entire ceiling. It was designed in a very flat, heraldic style, with the long feathers of its wings following the lines of the beams and flowing parallel along them and in between. On the black wings and body of the eagle, different shields were displayed in gold and colors, while the eagle itself was painted directly onto the natural, unpainted wood—probably oak. This work was from the thirteenth or fourteenth century, I believe. It seemed like the complete opposite of Italian elegance and flair, but the appropriateness of such decoration really relies on how it relates to its surroundings, which in this case were perfectly fitting.

Co-operative Relation

Collaborative Relationship

That is the great point to bear in mind in all design—the sense of relation; nothing stands alone in art. Lines and forms must harmonize with other forms and lines: the elements of any design must meet in friendly co-operation; it is not a blind struggle for existence, a fierce competition, or a strife for ascendency between one motive and another, one form and another, or a war of conflicting efforts. There may be a struggle outside the design, in the mind of the designer. He may have tried hard against difficulties to express what he felt, and have only reached harmony through discord and strife, but the work itself should be serene; we should feel that, however various its elements, they are not without their purpose and relation one to another, that all is ordered and organized in harmonious lines, that everything has its use and place, that, in short, it illustrates that excellent motto, whether for art or life: "Each for all, and all for each."

The key thing to remember in design is the sense of connection; nothing exists in isolation in art. Lines and shapes need to work together with other forms and lines: the elements of any design should work together in a friendly collaboration; it’s not a blind fight for survival, an intense competition, or a clash for dominance between one idea and another, one shape and another, or a battle of conflicting efforts. There may be a struggle outside the design, in the mind of the creator. They might have faced challenges to express what they felt and only found harmony through chaos and conflict, but the artwork itself should be calm; we should sense that, regardless of the variety of its components, they have a purpose and relationship to one another, that everything is arranged and organized in harmonious lines, that each part has its function and place, and, in short, it represents that great motto, whether for art or life: "Each for all, and all for each."


CHAPTER VI

Of the Fundamental Essentials of Design: Line, Form, Space—Principles of Structural and Ornamental Line in Organic Forms—Form and Mass in Foliage—Roofs—The Mediæval City—Organic and Accidental Beauty—Composition: Formal and Informal—Power of Linear Expression—Relation of Masses and Lines—Principles of Harmonious Composition.

Of the Essential Elements of Design: Line, Shape, Space—Principles of Structural and Decorative Lines in Natural Forms—Shape and Volume in Foliage—Roofs—The Medieval City—Natural and Random Beauty—Composition: Formal and Informal—Power of Line Expression—Relationship of Masses and Lines—Principles of Balanced Composition.

We may take it, then, from the principles and examples I have endeavoured to put before you in the previous chapters, that there are three fundamental elements or essentials of Design—Line, Form, Space.

We can conclude, then, from the principles and examples I’ve shared in the earlier chapters, that there are three basic elements or essentials of Design—Line, Form, Space.

Fundamental Essentials of Design

Essential Design Principles

Line we need, not only for our ground-plan and framework, but also to define or express our forms. Form we need to give substance and mass, interest and variety; and it is obvious that Space is required to contain all these elements, while Space asserts its influence, as we have seen, upon both Line and Form in combination upon it, whether object or surface, by the shape of its boundary, the extension of its plane, and the angle and position of its plane in regard to the eye, as well as from the point of view of material and use.

Line is essential, not just for our layout and structure, but also to define or express our shapes. We need form to provide substance, mass, interest, and variety; and it's clear that space is necessary to hold all these elements. Space also influences both line and form together, whether it's an object or a surface, through the shape of its boundary, the extent of its plane, and the angle and position of that plane in relation to the eye, as well as from the perspective of material and usage.

Questions of the character of line and form, and their combination and disposition in or over spaces, are questions of composition. They demand the most careful solution, whatever our subject [139]and purpose may be, from the simplest linear border up to the most elaborate figure design. But although the three essentials to composition must be always present, it is always possible to rely more upon the qualities of one of them for our main motive and interest, keeping the other two subsidiary. We might centralize the chief interest of our composition upon Line, for instance, and make harmonious relation or combination of lines our principal object (as in line-design and ornament), or we might rather dwell upon the contours, masses, and contrasts and relationships of Form: as in pictorial design, figure compositions of all kinds, and modelling and sculpture: or, again, we might choose that the peculiar character given by the control of certain inclosing spaces should determine the interest of our design, as the due filling of particular panels and geometric shapes; or seek the interest of aerial perspective in the pictorial and atmospheric expression of space.

Questions about the nature of line and shape, and how they are combined and arranged within spaces, are questions of composition. They require careful attention, regardless of our subject and purpose, from the simplest linear border to the most complex figure design. While the three key elements of composition must always be present, we can often focus more on one of them for our main theme and interest while keeping the other two as supportive elements. For example, we could center the main interest of our composition on Line, making the harmonious relationship or combination of lines our primary aim (as seen in line design and ornament), or we might focus on the contours, shapes, and contrasts of Form: as in pictorial design, figure compositions, and modeling and sculpture. Alternatively, we could let the unique character created by controlling specific enclosing spaces define the interest of our design, such as filling certain panels and geometric shapes; or we might explore the interest of aerial perspective in the visual and atmospheric expression of space.

Taking combinations of Line first, and bearing in mind what has been said regarding its capacities for expression, whether of emotion, direction of force, movement, rest, as well as of facts of structure and surface, let us see if we can trace the principle of harmonious composition, of which these things may be considered as parts.

Taking combinations of Line first, and keeping in mind what has been said about its ability to express emotion, direction of force, movement, rest, as well as aspects of structure and surface, let's see if we can identify the principle of harmonious composition, which these elements can be seen as parts of.

Line in Organic Forms

Line in Organic Shapes

Look at any of the systems of line in the organic structures of nature: the radiating ribs of the scallop shell, or the spiral of many other varieties; the set of the feathers upon the expanded wing of a bird; the radiation of the sun's rays; the flowing line of the wave movement; the lines of structure [141] in flowers and leaves; the scales of a fish; the scales of a pine-cone or an artichoke. We feel that any of these combinations of lines are harmonious and beautiful, and we know that they are essential to the character and structure. They are organic lines, in short. They mean life and growth. In principle they are radiating and recurring lines; in each form they repeat each other in varying degrees of direction and declension of curve. No two lines are alike, yet there is no contradiction and no unnecessary line, and variety is combined with unity. Each affords a perfect instance of harmonious composition of line, and gives us definite principles upon which to work (see illustration, p. 140).

Look at any of the line systems in the organic structures of nature: the radiating ribs of a scallop shell, or the spiral patterns found in many other species; the arrangement of feathers on a bird's expanded wing; the rays of the sun radiating outward; the flowing lines in the movement of waves; the structure of flowers and leaves; the scales of a fish; the scales of a pine cone or an artichoke. We can see that any of these combinations of lines are harmonious and beautiful, and we understand that they are crucial to their character and structure. They are organic lines, meaning they represent life and growth. Essentially, they are radiating and recurring lines; in each form, they repeat each other in different degrees of direction and curve variation. No two lines are exactly the same, yet there’s no contradiction and no needless line, allowing for a mix of variety and unity. Each provides a perfect example of harmonious line composition and gives us clear principles to work with (see illustration, p. 140).

These systems of line in organic nature have been adopted and adapted by art, and are found throughout the historical forms of ornament which, as we have good reason to believe, were often derived from mechanical structures, illustrating the same principles; which, again, the logic of geometry enforces in drawing on plane surfaces.

These systems of lines in nature have been taken and modified by art, and can be seen throughout the historical styles of decoration, which we have strong reason to believe often came from mechanical designs, showcasing the same principles; which geometry also reinforces when drawing on flat surfaces.

All organic structures teach us the same lesson of relation and recurrence of line. The bones of all vertebrate animals, from fish to man, illustrate the constant repetition in different degrees of the same character and direction of line. The vertebral column itself is an instance, and the recurring spring of the ribs from it, like the branches from the stem of a tree, further expressed in the ramification of the jointed bones of the limbs and extremities. The principle may be followed out in the structure of the muscles in their radiating fibres, which the delicate contours and flowing lines of [144] the surface of the body only combine in a greater degree of subtlety (see illustration, p. 142).

All organic structures teach us the same lesson about relationships and the repetition of lines. The bones of all vertebrate animals, from fish to humans, demonstrate the consistent repetition of similar shapes and directions in lines. The vertebral column itself is an example, and the way the ribs extend from it is like branches from a tree, further shown in the branching of the jointed bones in the limbs and extremities. This principle can also be seen in the structure of the muscles with their radiating fibers, which the smooth contours and flowing lines of the surface of the body only combine to a greater degree of subtlety (see illustration, p. 142).

Look at the anatomy of any tree, as it is disclosed to us in its wintry leaflessness, a beautiful composition of line rather than of form (see illustration, p. 143).

Look at the structure of any tree, as it reveals itself to us in its bare winter state, a beautiful arrangement of lines rather than shapes (see illustration, p. 143).

Here we see organic life and structure expressed in the vigorous spring of inter-dependent and corresponding curves, from the rigid sinuous column of the main stem springing from the ground, presently divided into the main forks of the branches, which again subdivide and subdivide into smaller forks, so that the tree may sustain and spread its life in the air and the sun, both supporting and continuing its existence by this wonderful economic system of co-operative, subdivided, and graduated helpfulness.

Here we see organic life and structure expressed in the lively spring of interdependent and matching curves, from the strong, twisting column of the main trunk rising from the ground, now branching out into the main limbs, which further divide into smaller branches, allowing the tree to thrive and spread its life in the air and sunlight, both sustaining and continuing its existence through this amazing system of cooperative, subdivided, and graduated support.

The massive green pavilion of summer, which this delicate vaulting of branch-work sustains, gives us another, more sumptuous, but perhaps not a greater beauty in the combination or substitution of form and mass for line composition.

The large green pavilion of summer, supported by this delicate weaving of branches, offers us another, more lavish beauty, but perhaps not a greater one in the blend or replacement of shape and volume for line composition.

Form and Mass in Foliage

Form and Volume in Foliage

We might express, in an abstract way, the principle of the line-structure of the ramifying tree by super-imposing vertically fork upon fork in gradually diminishing scale, either curvilinear or rectangular; and the principle of the mass-structure in the formation of the foliage might be expressed by a series of overlapping curves, suggestive of scales or cloud masses: to both of which indeed they correspond in principle, illustrating the scale principle in detail and the cloud principle in the mass; thus repeating the same general law of [146] natural roofing, or covering, in different materials (see illustration, p. 145).

We can describe the basic idea of the ramifying tree's line-structure by layering forks on top of each other in gradually smaller sizes, either in curved or rectangular shapes. The principle of the mass-structure in how the leaves form can be shown through a series of overlapping curves that resemble scales or cloud formations. Both concepts correspond in principle, showcasing the scale idea in detail and the cloud concept in mass; thus, they reflect the same general law of natural roofing or covering using different materials (see illustration, p. 145).

In a mass of foliage each leaf falls partly over the one below it, as by the system of their growth and suspension upon the stem they are of course bound to do, whether symmetric or alternate in their arrangement, the gaps caused by decay or accident being generally filled by new shoots. Each shoot, eager to expand its leaves in the light, ever spreading, forms mass after mass of the beautiful green panoply—the coat armour of the forest, arboreal man's first form of domestic architecture.

In a thick bunch of leaves, each one partly covers the one beneath it, as their growth and position on the stem naturally require, whether they are arranged symmetrically or alternately. The spaces created by decay or accidents are usually filled by new shoots. Each shoot, excited to spread its leaves in the light, continually expands, creating layer upon layer of beautiful green—nature's protective armor, the earliest form of domestic architecture for tree-dwelling humans.

The principle of structure here is just the same as the overlapping principle of the tiles and slates upon our ordinary house-roofs; but each leafy tile is different, being alive, and in the mass infinitely varied and beautiful in form and colour, instead of being mechanical and uniform, as we try to make our artificial roofs.

The principle of structure here is exactly like the overlapping principle of the tiles and slates on our regular house roofs; however, each leafy tile is unique, being alive, and together they are infinitely varied and beautiful in shape and color, rather than being mechanical and uniform like the artificial roofs we try to create.

German Roofs

German Roofs

Very pretty and varied effects are produced in [147]the old roofs of southern Germany by the use of different coloured glazed tiles—red, green, and yellow—arranged in simple patterns. One of the old towers at Lindau has such a roof, and the colour effect is very rich and striking.

Very pretty and varied effects are created in [147]the old roofs of southern Germany using different colored glazed tiles—red, green, and yellow—arranged in simple patterns. One of the old towers in Lindau has such a roof, and the color effect is very rich and striking.

But I must not be led into a disquisition upon roofs further than in so far as they illustrate the subject of composition of line and form, and from [148]the painter's point of view they frequently do in a very delightful and instructive way.

But I shouldn’t get carried away discussing roofs beyond how they show the composition of line and form. From the painter's perspective, they often do this in a very enjoyable and informative way.

What, for instance, can be more varied and charming than the compositions we constantly meet with in the rich backgrounds of Albert Dürer? Those steep barn roofs, and those quaint German towns inclosed in walls with protecting towers—nests of steep tiled gables of every imaginable degree—which give so much character and interest to his designs, as in the background of his copper-plates "The Prodigal Son" and "St. Anthony" here given. Their prototypes still exist here and there in Germany, in such towns as Rothenburg, practically unchanged since the sixteenth century, and give one an excellent idea of what such houses were like. A visit there is like a leap back into the Middle Ages. Every street is a varied and interesting composition. No two houses are alike. They were built by the citizens to really pass their lives in. The town is strongly placed upon the crest of a hill, with a river at its foot, and well fortified and protected by massive encircling walls and towers and deep gates, which give it so strong and picturesque a character, while the timber and tile-roofed gallery for the warders still exists along the inside of the walls. Such cities arose by the strength of the social bond among men—the necessity for mutual help in the maintenance of a higher standard of life, and mutual protection against the ravages of sinister powers.

What, for example, can be more diverse and appealing than the scenes we continuously see in the rich backgrounds of Albert Dürer? Those steep barn roofs and those charming German towns surrounded by walls with protective towers—clusters of steep tiled roofs of every imaginable style—which add so much character and interest to his designs, as seen in the backgrounds of his copper plates "The Prodigal Son" and "St. Anthony" presented here. Their models still exist here and there in Germany, in towns like Rothenburg, practically unchanged since the sixteenth century, and give a great idea of what those houses were like. Visiting there feels like jumping back into the Middle Ages. Every street is a unique and captivating composition. No two houses are the same. They were built by the citizens to actually live in. The town is strongly situated on top of a hill, with a river below it, well fortified and protected by massive walls, towers, and deep gates, giving it a strong and picturesque character, while the timber and tile-roofed walkway for the guards still runs along the inside of the walls. Such cities came about through the strength of social bonds among people—the need for mutual support in maintaining a higher standard of living and protection against threatening forces.

The Mediæval City

The Medieval City

Strong externally, internally they were made as home-like and full of the varied delight of the eyes, as if the people had reasoned, "Since we must live close together in a small place, let us make it as [149]delightful and romantic as we can." We know that the idea of Paradise and the New Jerusalem to the imagination of the Middle Ages was always [150]the fair walled garden and the fenced city. The painters embodied the idea of security and protection from the savage and destructive forces of nature and man—a sanctuary of peace, a garden of delight.

Strong on the outside, they were designed on the inside to be cozy and full of visual enjoyment, as if the people thought, "Since we have to live close together in a small space, let's make it as delightful and romantic as possible." We know that the idea of Paradise and the New Jerusalem for the imagination of the Middle Ages was always the beautiful walled garden and the enclosed city. The artists captured the concept of safety and shelter from the wild and destructive forces of nature and humanity—a haven of peace, a garden of joy.

Roof-lines: Rothenburg.

We have in modern times turned rather from the city as a complete and beautiful thing, to the individual home, and to the interior of that, and, in the modern competitive search for the necessary straws and sticks to make our individualist-domestic composition of comfort and artistic completeness, bowers are too often built upon the ruins of others, or are fair by reason of surrounding degradation. The common collective comfort and delight of the eyes is too often ignored, so that it comes about that, if our modern cities possess any elements of beauty or picturesqueness, it is rather owing to accidents and to the transfiguring effects of atmosphere than to the beauty or variety of architectural form and colour. We have to seek inspiration among the fragments of the dead past in monuments and art schools.

Nowadays, we’ve shifted our focus from seeing the city as a complete and beautiful entity to concentrating on individual homes and their interiors. In our competitive quest for the essentials to create our own comfortable and artistically pleasing spaces, we often build our sanctuaries on the ruins of others, or they seem nice only because of the surrounding decay. The shared comfort and visual appeal of the community are frequently overlooked, which means that if our modern cities have any beauty or charm, it’s more because of chance and the transformative effects of the atmosphere rather than due to the beauty or variety of architectural design and color. We have to look for inspiration among the remnants of the past in monuments and art schools.

Organic and Accidental Beauty

Natural and Unintentional Beauty

The modern development of the municipality and extension of its functions may, indeed, do something, as it has done, and is doing, something to protect public health and further public education; but we have yet to wait for the full results, and everything must finally depend upon the public spirit and disinterestedness of the citizens, and in matters of art upon a very decided but somewhat rare and peculiar sympathy and taste, as well as enthusiasm.

The current evolution of the municipality and the expansion of its responsibilities can, for sure, contribute to improving public health and promoting public education; however, we still need to see the complete outcomes. Ultimately, it all relies on the public spirit and selflessness of the citizens, and in the realm of art, it also depends on a strong but somewhat uncommon sympathy, taste, and enthusiasm.

The absence of beauty of line, form, and proportion from the external aspects of daily life in towns has probably a greater effect than we are apt to [151]realize in deadening the imagination, and it certainly seems to produce a certain insensibility to beauty of line and composition, since the perception must necessarily be blunted by being inured to the commonplace and sordid. The instinct for harmony of line and form becomes weakened, and can only be slowly revived by long and careful study in art, instead of finding its constant and most vital stimulus in every street.

The lack of beauty in lines, shapes, and proportions in everyday life in towns likely has a bigger impact on our imagination than we realize, and it definitely seems to make us less sensitive to beauty in design and composition. Being surrounded by the ordinary and the ugly dulls our perception. Our natural instinct for harmony in lines and forms becomes weaker and can only be slowly restored through extensive and careful study in art, rather than being continuously inspired by the beauty in each street.

For all that, however, an eye trained to observe and select may, even in the dullest and dingiest street, find artistic suggestions, if not in the buildings, then in the life. And where there is life, movement, humanity, there is sure to be character and interest. Groups of children playing will give us plenty of suggestions for figure composition. Workpeople going to and from their work, the common works going on in the street, the waggons and horses, the shoal of faces, the ceaseless stream of life—all these things, whether we are able to reproduce them as direct illustrations of the life of our time, or are moved only to select from them vivid suggestions to give force to ideal conceptions, should all be noted—photographed, as it were, instantaneously upon the sensitive plate of the mind's vision. We can only learn the laws of movement by observing movement—the swing and poise of the figure, the relation of the lines of limbs and drapery to the direction of force and centre of gravity, so important in composition. We must constantly supplement our school and studio work by these direct impressions of vivid life and movement, and neglect no opportunity or despise no source or suggestion.

Despite that, a trained eye can find artistic inspiration in even the most boring and rundown streets, whether in the buildings or in the life happening around them. Wherever there is life, movement, and humanity, there will be character and interest. Groups of children playing can provide us with plenty of ideas for figure composition. Workers commuting to and from their jobs, the everyday activities in the street, the wagons and horses, the crowd of faces, the endless flow of life—all of these elements, whether we can reproduce them as direct illustrations of our time or are simply inspired to extract vivid suggestions to enhance our ideal concepts, should all be noted—captured, so to speak, instantaneously on the sensitive plate of our mind's vision. We can only learn the principles of movement by observing it—the sway and balance of the figure, the arrangement of the lines of limbs and drapery in relation to the direction of force and center of gravity, which are so crucial in composition. We must continually enhance our school and studio work with these direct impressions of vibrant life and movement, and not overlook any opportunity or dismiss any potential source of inspiration.

[152]There are still in England to be found such old-world corners as the quaint street of Canterbury (p. 153), which forms an excellent study in the composition of angular and vertical lines.

[152]There are still some old-world spots in England, like the charming street of Canterbury (p. 153), which provides a great example of the mix of angular and vertical lines.

Formal Composition

Formal Writing

We may perceive that there are at least two kinds of composition, which may be distinguished as:

We can see that there are at least two types of composition, which we can classify as:

  1. Formal.
  2. Informal.

I. Under the head of Formal may be classed all those systems of structural line with which I started, and which are found either as leading motives or fundamental plans and bases throughout ornamental design. Yet even these may be used in composition of figures and other forms where the object is more or less formal and decorative, as governing plans or controlling lines.

I. Under the category of Formal, we can include all those structural line systems I mentioned earlier, which appear as key themes or essential frameworks throughout ornamental design. However, these can also be utilized in the composition of figures and other forms where the aim is somewhat formal and decorative, serving as guiding plans or controlling lines.

The radiating ribs of a fan, for instance, might be utilized as the natural boundaries and inclosing lines of a series of vertical figures following the radiating lines. A strictly logical design of the kind would be a series of figures with uplifted arms, forming radiating lines from the shoulders, somewhat in the position of Blake's well-known and beautiful composition of the Morning Stars in the Book of Job, already illustrated.

The spreading ribs of a fan, for example, could serve as the natural boundaries and enclosing lines of a series of vertical figures that follow the radiating lines. A strictly logical design like this would consist of figures with uplifted arms, creating radiating lines from the shoulders, similar to Blake's famous and beautiful depiction of the Morning Stars in the Book of Job, which has already been illustrated.

Using the overlapping vertical scale plan we should get relative positions for a formal composition of three figures, although they need not necessarily be formal in detail. A typical design of three associated ideas treated emblematically would be the most natural use of such an arrangement—as Faith, Hope, and Charity; Liberty, Equality, Fraternity; Science, Art, and Industry; [154] or the three goddesses Heré, Pallas, and Aphrodite, as choice and purpose might decide. A semicircular scale plan would not only repeat in a safe and sound manner, but would afford suggestive shapes in which to throw designs of figures, and could be effectively utilized either for a wall or ceiling repeat.

Using the overlapping vertical scale plan, we can determine the relative positions for a formal composition of three figures, although they don’t have to be strictly formal in detail. A typical design featuring three related ideas represented symbolically would be the most natural application of this arrangement—like Faith, Hope, and Charity; Liberty, Equality, Fraternity; Science, Art, and Industry; [154] or the three goddesses Hera, Pallas, and Aphrodite, depending on the choice and purpose. A semicircular scale plan would not only provide a safe and sound repetition but also suggest shapes for designing the figures, making it effective for use on walls or ceilings.

The inclosure formed by two spiral lines gives a graceful ornamental shape for a half-reclining figure; while a series of floating or flying figures linking their hands would be appropriately governed by similar spiral lines, uniting them with the meandering wave line (see illustration, p. 155).

The space created by two spiral lines provides an elegant decorative outline for a half-reclining figure; meanwhile, a sequence of floating or flying figures holding hands would be fittingly guided by similar spiral lines, connecting them with the flowing wave line (see illustration, p. 155).

Upon a series of semicircles or ellipses, alternating horizontally, might be arranged a little frieze of children with skipping ropes, or Amorini with pendent garlands; the up-and-down movement in the former case being conveyed by a variation, each alternate semicircle being struck upwards. This would restore the emphatic wave or spiral line, which always conveys the sense of rhythmic movement in a design.

On a series of semicircles or ellipses arranged horizontally, there could be a small frieze of children with skipping ropes or playful cupids holding dangling garlands; the up-and-down movement in the first case would be shown by a variation, with each alternate semicircle being raised. This would bring back the strong wave or spiral line, which always suggests a sense of rhythmic movement in a design.

Such a line, vertically employed, will give again a good plan for a series of seated figures, say emblematic of the Hours, where similarity of attitude and type would be appropriate, while the emblems and accessories might be varied. A severer treatment would be suggested by making the controlling line angular (see illustration, p. 156).

Such a vertical line can provide a solid blueprint for a group of seated figures, perhaps representing the Hours, where similar poses and styles would fit well, while the symbols and props could differ. A more rigorous approach would be indicated by using an angular controlling line (see illustration, p. 156).

Such are a few illustrations of what I have termed formal composition, in which the geometric and structural plans of pure ornament or ornamental line maybe utilized to combine, control, or even suggest figure designs.

These are a few examples of what I call formal composition, where the geometric and structural designs of pure ornament or ornamental lines can be used to combine, control, or even suggest figure designs.

[157] Informal Composition

Casual Writing

II. While formal compositions, though naturally falling into classes and types, may be varied to a very great extent, when we come to informal compositions the variations are unlimited, and a vista of extraordinary and apparently endless choice, invention, and selection opens out before the designer, co-extensive with the variety of nature herself.

II. While formal writing, although it typically fits into certain categories and styles, can be greatly varied, informal writing offers limitless options. It presents an extraordinary and seemingly endless range of choices, creativity, and selections for the creator, matching the diversity found in nature itself.

In seeking harmonious and expressive composition in the pictorial direction the guides are much less definite and secure. Individual feeling and instinct, which must have an important influence in all kinds of designing, are in this direction paramount. Yet even here, if we look beneath the apparent freedom and informality, we find certain laws at work which seem to differ only in degree from the more definite and constructive control of line which we have been considering. In the first place, there are our direct impressions from nature; and, secondly, our conscious aims and efforts to express an idea in our minds. We have the same restricted and definite forms of language and materials in each case—line, form, space, brushes, pencil, colour, paper, canvas, or clay. We are taken by some particular scene: the composition of line and form at a particular spot attracts us more than another. We do not stop as a rule to ask why, since it usually takes all our time and our best skill to get into shape what we are seeking—and carry away with us an artistic record of the place. We have seen that in the case of certain natural structures, shells, leaves, flowers, the fundamental structural lines are so beautiful that they not only form ornament in themselves, [158]but furnish the basis for whole types and families of ornament. When we look at a landscape, putting aside for the moment all the surface charms of colour and effect, and concentrating our attention upon its lines of structures, we shall find that it owes a great part of its beauty to the harmonious relation of its leading lines, or to certain pleasant contrasts, or a certain impressiveness of form and mass, and at the same time we shall perceive that this linear expression is inseparable from the sentiment or emotion suggested by that particular scene.

In trying to create a harmonious and expressive composition in visual art, the guidelines are much less clear and certain. Individual feelings and instincts, which are crucial in all types of design, play a primary role here. Yet even in this apparent freedom and casualness, if we look closely, we can find certain principles at work that only differ in degree from the more structured control of lines we've discussed. First, we have our direct impressions from nature; and second, our conscious goals and efforts to express ideas in our minds. We use the same limited and specific forms of language and materials in each case—lines, shapes, space, brushes, pencils, colors, paper, canvas, or clay. We're often captivated by a particular scene: the arrangement of lines and shapes at one spot draws us in more than others. We typically don’t stop to question why, as it usually takes all our time and skill to shape what we’re aiming for and take away an artistic memory of the place. We’ve observed that in certain natural forms, like shells, leaves, and flowers, the fundamental structural lines are so beautiful that they not only serve as decoration in themselves, [158] but also provide the basis for entire types and families of ornamentation. When we look at a landscape, setting aside the surface delights of color and effect, and focusing on its structural lines, we’ll find that a significant part of its beauty comes from the harmonious relationships of its main lines, certain pleasing contrasts, or a particular impressiveness of form and mass, while at the same time, we’ll see that this linear representation cannot be separated from the feelings or emotions suggested by that specific scene.

A gentle southern landscape—undulating downs, and wandering sheep-walks; the soft rounded masses of the sheep upon smooth cropped turf—all these are so many notes or words in the language of line and form which go to express the idea of pastoral life. They are inextricably bound up with inseparable associations conveyed by such lines and forms. The undulating lines of resting or dancing figures would only give point, true emphasis, and variety, and a note of contrast in the forms would serve to bring out the general sentiment more strongly.

A gentle southern landscape—rolling hills and meandering sheep paths; the soft, rounded shapes of sheep on well-groomed grass—all these are like notes or words in the language of line and form that express the idea of rural life. They are closely tied to the feelings conveyed by those lines and shapes. The flowing lines of resting or dancing figures would add emphasis, variety, and contrast, which would enhance the overall sentiment even more.

Substitute rugged rocks, swollen torrents, wind-tossed trees and stormy skies, and all is changed. Such things cannot be expressed without much more emphatic lines and masses, and the use of opposing angles and energetic curves of movement which would be destructive of the sentiment of peace, in other cases. Yet even then to convey the expression of energy and rapid movement, concerted groups of lines are none the less necessary (see illustration, p. 159).

Substituting rough rocks, rushing streams, wind-blown trees, and stormy skies changes everything. These elements can't be captured without stronger lines and shapes, and the use of contrasting angles and dynamic curves, which would typically disrupt the sense of calm. Still, even to express energy and quick movement, well-coordinated groups of lines are equally essential (see illustration, p. 159).

[160]Such comparisons indicate not only that there is a necessary association of ideas with certain lines and forms, but also that certain relations and associations of line of a similar character are necessary to produce a harmonious composition, and one which conveys a definite and pervading sentiment or emotion, just as we saw that the controlling lines of structural curves, spirals, and angles require to be in relation, and to be re-echoed by the character of the design they inclose or which is built upon them.

[160]These comparisons show that there's a necessary connection between certain ideas and specific lines and shapes. They also reveal that certain relationships and connections between similar lines are essential for creating a harmonious composition that expresses a clear and strong feeling or emotion. This is similar to how the main lines of structural curves, spirals, and angles need to relate to each other and resonate with the style of the design they encompass or that is built upon them.

The same law holds true in figure composition. The sense of repose and restfulness necessary to sitting or reclining groups depends upon the gentle declivities of the curves and their gradual descent to the horizontal.

The same rule applies to figure composition. The feeling of calm and relaxation needed for sitting or reclining groups relies on the gentle slopes of the curves and their gradual drop to the horizontal.

Draw a figure sitting rigid, tense, and alert, and you destroy the sense of repose at once, and you are obliged also to resort to angles, still more emphatic where strong action is to be expressed; while to express continual or progressive movement, a choice of associated lines of action in different stages of progress leading up to the crescendo of the final one (as in a group of mowers) would be necessary (see illustrations, p. 161). We cannot, then, in any composition have too definite a conception. We must, at any sacrifice of detail, bring out the main expression and meaning. Every group of figures must be in the strictest relation to each other and to the central interest or expression of the design. You cannot, for instance, in a procession of figures, make your faces turn all sorts of ways without stopping the onward movement which is essential to the idea of a [162] procession. This would not preclude variety, but the general tendency must be in one direction. Every line in a composition must lead up to the central idea, and be subordinated or contributory to it (see illustration, Nos. 1 and 2, p. 163).

Draw a figure sitting stiff, tense, and alert, and you instantly lose the sense of calm. You also have to use even more pronounced angles where strong action needs to be shown; to depict ongoing or progressive movement, you'd need to choose a series of related lines of action at different stages leading up to the peak of the final one (like in a group of mowers) (see illustrations, p. 161). In any composition, we can't have too clear a concept. We must prioritize key expressions and meanings, even at the expense of detail. Every group of figures has to relate strictly to one another and to the main focus or expression of the design. For example, in a procession of figures, you can't have faces looking every which way without interrupting the forward movement that’s crucial to the idea of a [162] procession. This doesn’t mean you can’t have variety, but the overall direction must be consistent. Every line in a composition should lead to the central idea and be subordinate or contribute to it (see illustration, Nos. 1 and 2, p. 163).

The same with masses: you cannot put a number of forms together without some sort of relation, either of general character and contour or some uniting line. We may learn this principle from nature also. Look at a heap of broken stones and débris, which in detail may contain all sorts of varieties of form, as we find them tumbled down a steep place, as the rocky bed of a mountain stream, a heap of boulders upon a hillside, or the débris from a quarry or mine; in each case the law of gravity and the persistence of force working together arrange the diverse forms in masses controlled by the lines, which express the direction and degree of descent, and the pressure of force. The same thing may be seen on any hilly ground after heavy rain; the scattered pebbles are arranged in related groups, combined and composed by the flow of miniature streams, which channel the face of the ground and form hollows for their reception (see Nos. 3 and 4, p. 163). The force of the tides and currents upon the sea-shore illustrates the same principle and affords us magnificent lessons in composition, not only in the delicate lines taken by the sculptured sand, but in the harmonious grouping of masses of shingle and shells, weeds and drift, arranged by the movement of the waves.

The same goes for masses: you can't combine different shapes without some kind of relationship, either in general form and outline or through a connecting line. We can learn this principle from nature as well. Take a look at a pile of broken stones and debris, which may include all sorts of shapes, as we find them scattered down a steep slope, like the rocky bed of a mountain stream, a pile of boulders on a hillside, or the leftovers from a quarry or mine; in each instance, the law of gravity and the influence of force work together to organize the varied forms into masses guided by the lines that show the direction and level of descent, and the pressure of force. You can see the same thing on any hilly ground after heavy rain; the scattered pebbles are grouped together in related clusters, formed by the flow of small streams that shape the landscape and create hollows for them to settle in (see Nos. 3 and 4, p. 163). The impact of tides and currents on the shoreline illustrates the same principle and provides us with amazing lessons in composition, not just in the delicate lines sculpted in the sand, but also in the harmonious arrangement of clusters of pebbles, shells, seaweed, and driftwood, organized by the movement of the waves.

(3) Lines Left by a Watercourse, (4) Lines Governing Fallen Débris from a Quarry.

Principles of Harmonious Composition

Principles of Balanced Design

So that we may see that the principles of harmonious composition are not the outcome of merely [164] capricious fancy or pedantic rule, but are illustrated throughout the visible world by the laws and forces of the material universe. It is for the artist to observe and apply them in his own work of re-creation.

So we can understand that the principles of harmonious composition don't come from random whims or strict rules, but are shown all around us by the laws and forces of the physical universe. It's up to the artist to notice and use these principles in their own creative work.


CHAPTER VII

Of the Relief of Form—Three Methods—Contrast—Light and Shade, and Modelling—The Use of Contrast and Planes in Pattern Designing—Decorative Relief—Simple Linear Contrast—Relief by Linear Shading—Different Emphasis in relieving Form by Shading Lines—Relief by means of Light and Shade alone without Outline—Photographic Projection—Relief by different Planes and Contrasts of Concave and Convex Surfaces in Architectural Mouldings—Modelled Relief—Decorative Use of Light and Shade, and different Planes in Modelling and Carving—Egyptian System of Relief Sculpture—Greek and Gothic Architectural Sculpture, influenced by Structural and Ornamental Feeling—Sculptural Tombs, Medals, Coins, Gems—Florentine Fifteenth-century Reliefs—Desideriodi Settignano.

Of the Relief of Form—Three Methods—Contrast—Light and Shade, and Modeling—The Use of Contrast and Planes in Pattern Designing—Decorative Relief—Simple Linear Contrast—Relief by Linear Shading—Different Emphasis in Relieving Form by Shading Lines—Relief using Light and Shade alone without Outline—Photographic Projection—Relief through different Planes and Contrasts of Concave and Convex Surfaces in Architectural Moldings—Modeled Relief—Decorative Use of Light and Shade, and different Planes in Modeling and Carving—Egyptian System of Relief Sculpture—Greek and Gothic Architectural Sculpture, influenced by Structural and Ornamental Feeling—Sculptural Tombs, Medals, Coins, Gems—Florentine Fifteenth-century Reliefs—Desideriodi Settignano.

We come now to the consideration of the various means and methods of expressing relief in line and form.

We now turn to discussing the different ways and techniques of expressing relief through line and shape.

We may define a form in outline and give it different qualities of expression by altering the quality and consistency of our outline, and we may obtain very different kinds of decorative effect by the use of lines of various degrees of thickness or thinness; but if we want to give it force and colour, and to distinguish it from its background more emphatically, we must add to our outline.

We can outline a shape and give it different expressive qualities by changing the quality and consistency of our outline. We can achieve various decorative effects by using lines of different thicknesses; however, if we want to add strength and color, and make it stand out more from its background, we need to enhance our outline.

Three Methods of Expressing Relief

3 Ways to Show Relief

There are three principal methods or systems of giving relief by adding to our outline.

There are three main methods or systems for providing support by expanding our outline.

One is the method of giving relief to form by contrasts of tone, colour, or tint.

One way to create relief is by using contrasts of tone, color, or tint.

[166]Another by means of the expression of light and shade: and the third by means of modelling in relief.

[166]Another through the use of light and shadow: and the third through the technique of three-dimensional modeling.

Now, still keeping to expression by means of line, the three arms I have sketched (p. 167) illustrate: (1) the form in outline alone; (2) the contrast method; and (3) the light and shade method. The three pots underneath illustrate the same three stages in a simpler manner.

Now, still using lines for expression, the three arms I've drawn (p. 167) show: (1) the shape in just outlines; (2) the contrast method; and (3) the light and shade method. The three pots below demonstrate the same three stages in a simpler way.

In number one we see the outline defining the form pure and simple: in number two the form is relieved by a half-tone formed of diagonal lines, forming a plane or background behind it. The arm is still further relieved by the dark drapery. Number three shows the relief carried further by lines expressive of the modelling of the arm and the rounding of the pot, and also by cast shadows from the forms.

In number one, we see the outline clearly defining the form, straightforward and simple. In number two, the form is enhanced by a half-tone created with diagonal lines, adding a plane or background behind it. The arm is further highlighted by the dark drapery. Number three takes the relief further with lines that convey the shape of the arm and the curvature of the pot, as well as cast shadows from the forms.

The system of expressing relief I have termed relief by contrast includes two kinds of contrast: there are the contrasts of line and form, and there are the contrasts of planes of tone or tint and local colour. We may consider that the contrast method covers generally all forms of pattern and certain kinds of pictorial design. The method of expressing relief by means of line covers generally all forms of design in black and white, graphic sketching, pen-drawing, and work with the point of all kinds.

The way of showing relief that I call relief by contrast includes two types of contrast: one is the contrast of line and form, and the other is the contrast of tones or tints and local colors. We can think of the contrast method as encompassing all types of patterns and certain styles of pictorial design. The way of expressing relief through line generally applies to all kinds of designs in black and white, graphic sketches, pen drawings, and work using various points.

Of the Use of Contrast and Planes

The Use of Contrast and Planes

Taking the principle of contrast as applied to pattern design, we can, even within the limited range of black and white and half-tint (as expressed by lines), get a considerable amount of decorative effect. In the first place by bringing out our pattern, [168] previously outlined, upon a black ground (as in Nos. 1 and 2, p. 169), increasing the richness of effect, and getting a second plane by treating the lower part in an open tint of line.

Applying the principle of contrast to pattern design, we can achieve a significant decorative effect even with the limited palette of black, white, and half-tint (represented by lines). First, by showcasing our pattern, which has been previously outlined, against a black background (as seen in Nos. 1 and 2, p. 169), we enhance the richness of the effect and create a second layer by treating the lower part with a lighter tint of lines.

Simple contrasts of dark upon light or light upon dark are effective, and sufficient for many purposes, such as borders (as in Nos. 2 and 3, p. 169).

Simple contrasts of dark on light or light on dark work well and are enough for many uses, like borders (as shown in Nos. 2 and 3, p. 169).

When a lighter kind of relief and effect is required, the recurring forms in a border are often sufficiently emphasized by a tint of open lines: movement and variety being given by making them follow the minor curves of the successive forms, as in this instance (No 4, p. 169) the movement of the water is suggested behind the fish.

When a more subtle type of relief and effect is needed, the repeated shapes in a border are often highlighted enough by a shade of open lines: movement and variety are created by having them follow the gentle curves of the shapes, as shown in this example (No 4, p. 169) where the movement of the water is suggested behind the fish.

The relation of the plain ground-work to the figure of the pattern is also an important point; indeed the plain parts of the pattern, or the interstices and intervals of the pattern, are as essential to the pattern as the figured parts.

The connection between the plain background and the pattern's design is also a crucial aspect; in fact, the plain sections of the pattern, or the spaces and gaps within it, are just as important to the overall design as the patterned areas.

In designs intended for various processes of manufacture, such as printed or woven textiles, wall-papers, etc., where blocks or rollers are used to repeat the pattern, the extent of plain in proportion to figured parts must be governed in some measure by the practicable size of the repeat: but within certain limits great variety of proportion is possible.

In designs meant for different manufacturing processes, like printed or woven textiles, wallpapers, etc., where blocks or rollers are used to repeat the pattern, the amount of plain area compared to the patterned parts should be influenced to some extent by the feasible size of the repeat. However, a wide variety of proportions is possible within certain limits.

A simple but essentially decorative principle is to preserve a certain equality between the figured masses and the ground masses. The leaf patterns (Nos. 6 and 7, p. 169) consist simply of the repetition and reversal of a single element. An emphatic effect is obtained by bringing the leaves out black upon a white ground (as in No. 6), while a flatter [170] and softer effect is the result of throwing them upon a plane of half-tint expressed by horizontal lines, with a similar effect of relief to that which would be given by the warp, if the pattern were woven.

A straightforward yet mainly decorative principle is to maintain a certain balance between the patterned areas and the background. The leaf designs (Nos. 6 and 7, p. 169) are simply created by repeating and flipping a single element. A striking effect is achieved by placing the leaves in black on a white background (as seen in No. 6), while a flatter and softer effect comes from presenting them on a background of half-tones defined by horizontal lines, giving a similar sense of depth as if the pattern were woven.

For larger surfaces, greater repose and dignity in pattern may be obtained by a greater proportion of the repeat being occupied by the ground (as in No. 5, p. 169).

For larger surfaces, you can achieve more elegance and dignity in the pattern by having a larger portion of the repeat taken up by the background (as in No. 5, p. 169).

Indeed we may consider as a general principle that the larger the interspaces of the ground, plane, or field of the pattern, the lighter in tint they should be, or the necessary flatness is apt to be lost. Relief in pattern design may be said to be adding interest and richness without losing the flatness and repose of the design as a whole. When pattern and ground are fairly equally balanced in quantity the ground may be rich and dark, and darkest as the interstices, where the ground is shown, become less. The figure of a pattern relieved as light upon a dark plane, as a rule, requires to be fuller in form than dark-figuring upon a light ground.

Indeed, we can generally say that the larger the gaps in the ground, plane, or field of the pattern, the lighter their color should be, or else the necessary flatness might be lost. Relief in pattern design means adding interest and depth without sacrificing the overall flatness and calmness of the design. When the pattern and the background are fairly balanced in quantity, the background can be rich and dark, and it becomes darkest as the gaps where the background shows become smaller. Typically, a pattern that stands out as light against a dark background needs to be fuller in form than a dark pattern on a light background.

Decorative Relief

Decorative Relief

In decorative work the use of contrast in the relief of parts of a design is often useful and effective, as, for instance, the dark shading or treatment in black or flat tone of the alternating under side of a turn-over leaf border.

In decorative work, using contrast in the relief of different parts of a design is often helpful and effective. For example, the dark shading or treatment in black or flat tone of the underside of a turn-over leaf border.

The decorative value of this principle is recognized by heraldic designers in the treatment of the mantling of the helmet, which in earlier times is treated simply as a hanging or flying strip of drapery with a lining of a different colour, by which it is relieved as it hangs in simple spiral folds. This ornamental element became developed by the [171]designers of the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries into elaborate scroll designs springing from the circlet of the helmet and surrounding the shield: but the principle of the turned-up lining remained, often variegated and enriched with heraldic patterns (see illustrations, pp. 172, 173).[4]

The decorative value of this principle is acknowledged by heraldic designers in how they treat the mantling of the helmet. In earlier times, it was simply seen as a hanging or flying strip of fabric with a different colored lining, creating a simple spiral fold effect. This ornamental element evolved in the hands of designers from the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries into intricate scroll designs that emerged from the circlet of the helmet and surrounded the shield. However, the principle of the turned-up lining remained, often varied and enhanced with heraldic patterns (see illustrations, pp. 172, 173).[4]

[4] The increased importance given to the mantling in later times may have been due to the disappearance of the housings of the knight's horse and his surcoat, which originally displayed his arms and colours. The mantling of later times displayed the heraldic colours of the knight, when, being clad in plate armour, there was no other means of displaying them except on the shield. Decoratively, of course, the mantling is of great value to the heraldic designer, enabling him to form much more graceful compositions, to combine diverse and rigid elements with free and flowing lines and masses, and to fill panels with greater richness and effect, whether carved or painted, or both.

[4] The growing significance of mantling in later periods may have come from the loss of the knight's horse armor and their surcoat, which originally showcased their arms and colors. The mantling of later times displayed the knight's heraldic colors, as wearing plate armor left little other option for showcasing them besides the shield. Decoratively, mantling holds a lot of value for heraldic designers, allowing them to create much more graceful compositions, blend different rigid elements with flowing lines and shapes, and fill panels with more richness and impact, whether carved, painted, or both.

Use of Diapered Backgrounds

Use of Diapered Backgrounds

The principle, too, of counterchange in heraldry answers to our principle of relief by contrast, and though its chief charm lies in its ornamental range of form and colour combinations, it can be expressed in black and white, and it remains a universal principle throughout decorative art. The decorative effect and charm of the relief of large and bold forms upon rich and delicate diapers is also an important resource of the designer. The monumental art of the Middle Ages affords multitudes of examples of this principle in ornamental treatment. The miniaturist of the twelfth and thirteenth centuries constantly relieved his groups of figures upon a diapered ground. The architectural sculptor relieved the broad masses of flowing drapery and the bold projection of his effigies and recumbent figures by delicately chiselled diapers upon the surface of the wall behind them. This treatment [174] may frequently be seen in the recessed tombs of the fourteenth century.

The principle of counterchange in heraldry corresponds to our principle of relief through contrast. Its main appeal lies in the variety of forms and color combinations, but it can also be shown in black and white. This principle remains a key concept across all decorative arts. The decorative effect and beauty of large, bold forms against rich, delicate backgrounds are also important tools for designers. The monumental art of the Middle Ages offers many examples of this principle in ornamental design. Miniaturists in the twelfth and thirteenth centuries often used diapered backgrounds to highlight their groups of figures. Architectural sculptors emphasized the broad masses of flowing drapery and the bold protrusion of their effigies and reclining figures by using finely crafted diapers on the walls behind them. This technique can often be seen in the recessed tombs of the fourteenth century. [174]

The incisor of memorial brasses, again, more especially in continental examples, shows a fondness for the same principle. The long vertical lines of drapery of ladies and ecclesiastics, the broad masses of the heraldic surcoat, or armour of the knights, the rich and heavy furred gowns of the burghers, are often relieved upon beautiful diapered or arabesque grounds, generally embodying some heraldic device, motto, or emblem of the person or family whose tomb it ornaments. Such decoration is strictly linear, yet within its own limits, and perhaps because of them, we find in this province of design extremely admirable work, no less for delineation of character and decorative treatment than for ornamental invention controlled by strict economy of line.

The style of memorial brasses, especially in examples from the continent, demonstrates a clear preference for the same principle. The long vertical lines of the drapery worn by ladies and clergy, the broad shapes of the heraldic surcoat or armor of the knights, and the rich, heavy fur gowns of the townspeople are often set against beautiful patterned or arabesque backgrounds, usually featuring some heraldic symbol, motto, or emblem of the individual or family whose tomb it decorates. This decoration is fundamentally linear, yet within its own boundaries, and perhaps because of them, we find in this area of design exceptionally impressive work, remarkable for its portrayal of character, decorative style, and ornamental creativity regulated by a strict economy of line.

Relief of Form by Linear Shading

Relief of Form through Linear Shading

This brings us to the consideration of our second method of relief by means of line.

This leads us to discuss our second method of relief using line.

Take any simple allied elements to form a repeating pattern, say spiral shells, place them at certain rhythmic intervals, and we can unite and at the same time give them relief by filling in the ground by a series of waved lines to suggest the ribbed sand. Add a few dots to soften and vary the effect, and we get a pattern of a certain balance and consistency (No. 1, p. 177).

Take any simple connected elements to create a repeating pattern, like spiral shells, and position them at specific rhythmic intervals. We can combine them and also give them depth by filling in the background with a series of wavy lines to suggest ribbed sand. Add a few dots to soften and diversify the effect, and we'll achieve a pattern that has a sense of balance and consistency (No. 1, p. 177).

With the more varied and complex floral form, but treated in a very abstract way, placing the daisies in a line, horizontally, and reversing the sprig for the alternate row, we have another motive, which is connected and steadied as well as relieved by the suggestion of grass blades in [176] groups of three slightly radiated vertical strokes (No. 2, p. 177). A pattern of two elements, again, may be formed in a still more simple way by linear contrast, as in No. 3, where the pyramidal trees are formed by a continuous serpentine stroke of the pen terminating in a spiral stem. The diagonal arrangement of the trees produces a chequer, the intervals of which can be varied by the contrasting black masses of the birds.

With a more varied and complex floral design, but approached in a very abstract manner, we arrange the daisies in a horizontal line and flip the sprig for the alternating row. This creates another motif that is connected, balanced, and visually complemented by the suggestion of grass blades in [176] groups of three slightly diverging vertical lines (No. 2, p. 177). A simpler two-element pattern can also be created through linear contrast, as seen in No. 3, where the pyramidal trees are made with a continuous serpentine pen stroke ending in a spiral stem. The diagonal positioning of the trees forms a checkered pattern, with spacing that can be adjusted by the contrasting black shapes of the birds.

Relief in Pattern Design by Means of Simple Linear Contrasts (2), (3)

In graphic drawing, lines to express forms in the relief of light and shade are often needed to give additional force even where no great degree of realism is desired. A tint formed by horizontal lines is sufficient to relieve a face from the background and give it solidity, while local colour may be given to the hair, and at the same time serve to relieve the leaves of a wreath encircling the head (see illustration, p. 178).

In graphic drawing, lines are often needed to express shapes with light and shadow, adding more impact even when high realism isn’t the goal. A shade created by horizontal lines is enough to separate a face from the background and give it depth, while color can be applied to the hair, simultaneously helping to set off the leaves of a wreath around the head (see illustration, p. 178).

Relief by Adding Shading Lines to Outline.

The rich effect of clustered apples growing among their leaves could hardly be suggested without the use of lines expressive of light and shade, the interstices of the deepest shade running into solid black (p. 178). In adding lines in this kind of way to give relief or extra richness or force, the draughtsman is really designing a system of lines upon his outline basis, which may have quite as decorative a quality as the outline itself. At the same time nothing is more characteristic of the artist than the way in which such lines are used, and of course the choice of direction and arrangement of such lines will make all the difference in the effect of the drawing.

The rich look of clustered apples growing among their leaves is hard to convey without using lines that express light and shadow, with the darkest areas blending into solid black (p. 178). When an artist adds lines like this for depth or additional richness and impact, they are actually creating a system of lines based on their outline, which can be just as decorative as the outline itself. At the same time, nothing showcases the artist's style more than how these lines are used, and obviously, the choice of direction and arrangement of these lines will significantly affect the drawing's overall impact.

Diagonal Shading

Diagonal Shading

Where the object is to express the figure in broad masses of light and shade, the use of a [178] series of diagonal lines is an effective, and probably the most ready and rapid, method when working with the pen (see p. 179). This system of expressing the broad surfaces of shade was much used by the Italian masters of the Renaissance [180] in their rapid pen sketches and studies of figures, and a certain breadth and style is given to their drawings owing in part to the simplicity of this linear treatment.

When the goal is to depict the figure using broad areas of light and shadow, employing a series of diagonal lines is an effective and likely the quickest method when working with a pen (see p. 179). This approach to illustrating large shaded areas was frequently utilized by the Italian masters of the Renaissance in their quick pen sketches and figure studies. The simplicity of this linear technique contributes to a certain boldness and style in their drawings.

Emphasis

Emphasis

No doubt the simpler the system of line adopted in giving relief to figures the better, if the particular expression aimed at is accomplished, and, as a general rule, we should endeavour to get the necessary force and depth without the use of cross-line, or many different directions of line in shading a figure: but, given any power of draughtsmanship, the individuality of the artist is bound to come in, and it is not likely, nor is it to be desired, that any two artists in line should give exactly the same account of natural fact, or reproduce the images in their minds in the same forms, any more than we should expect two writers to express their ideas in the same terms.

No doubt, the simpler the line system used to create relief in figures, the better, as long as the intended expression is achieved. Generally, we should try to achieve the necessary strength and depth without using cross-hatching or multiple line directions in shading a figure. However, with any level of drawing skill, the artist's individuality will inevitably come into play. It’s unlikely, and not desirable, that any two artists using line will depict the same natural elements or reproduce the images in their minds in identical forms, just as we wouldn't expect two writers to express their ideas in the same way.

The kind and degree of emphasis upon different parts, the selection of moment or fact, would all naturally make considerable differences in the treatment. The three sketches of the skirt dancer are given as instances of the different effects and expression to be obtained in rendering the same subject (p. 181).

The way you emphasize different parts and choose specific moments or facts will naturally lead to significant differences in how everything is treated. The three sketches of the skirt dancer are examples of the different effects and expressions that can be achieved when portraying the same subject (p. 181).

In a the broad relief of the white dress against the tones of the floor and background, and the darker note of the hair, are the facts chiefly dwelt upon. In b the form of the figure is brought out in broad light and shade and cast shadow, and the dress relieved by radiating folds. In c quicker movement is given, the lines of the successive wave-shaped folds radiating spirally from the shoulders being the chief means of conveying this, [182] while the head and arms are thrown into strong relief against a dark background, the cast shadow being of a lighter tone.

In a, the bright white dress stands out against the colors of the floor and background, with the darker hair providing contrast. In b, the figure's shape is highlighted by strong light and shadow, with the dress enhanced by flowing folds. In c, there's a sense of movement, created by the spiral lines of the wavy folds radiating from the shoulders, which is the main way this feeling is conveyed, [182], while the head and arms are clearly defined against a dark background, with the cast shadow being a lighter shade.

The direction of line used in relieving forms, and expressing modelling and details, must depend much upon individual taste and feeling as well as knowledge of form. The element of beauty of design also comes in, and the question between this and force or literalness—the difference between a study or direct transcript from nature, and a design with a purely ornamental aim, or a composition directed mainly to the expression of a particular idea or emotion.

The way lines are used to create shapes and show details should largely depend on personal taste and feelings, as well as an understanding of form. The aspect of beauty in design is also involved, raising the question of the balance between this beauty and strength or accuracy—the difference between a study or a direct representation from nature, and a design that focuses purely on decoration, or a composition primarily aimed at expressing a specific idea or emotion.

Such considerations will ultimately determine the choice and use of line, the degree of relief and emphasis, for these and the direction of the line itself are the syllables and the words which will convey the purport of the work to the mind of the beholder.

Such factors will ultimately decide the choice and use of line, the level of relief and emphasis, because these and the direction of the line itself are the syllables and words that will communicate the meaning of the work to the viewer's mind.

Study of the masters of line—Dürer, Titian, Mantegna, Holbein—will inform us as to its capacities and limitations. The limitations, too, of method and material will be a powerful factor in the determination of style in the use of line and in the economy of its use.

Studying the masters of line—Dürer, Titian, Mantegna, Holbein—will help us understand its capabilities and constraints. The limitations of techniques and materials will also significantly influence the style in how line is used and how efficiently it is utilized.

The bold firm line suitable to the facsimile woodcut, the broad and simple treatment of line with solid black useful in the plank-cut line block to be used with colour blocks, the comparatively free and unconditioned pen-drawing for the surface-printed process block—all these will finally give a certain character to our work beyond our own idiosyncrasies in the use of the pen or the brush.

The strong, clear lines ideal for the printed woodcut, the straightforward and bold line treatment with solid black that works well in the plank-cut blocks meant to be paired with color blocks, and the relatively loose and unrestricted pen drawings for the surface-printed process blocks—these will ultimately impart a distinct character to our work that goes beyond our individual styles with the pen or brush.

Albert Dürer's Principle in the Treatment of Drapery: From The Woodcut in the “;Life of the Virgin”; Series.

[184]Useful things may be learned by the way, such as Albert Dürer's principle of giving substance to his figures and details, more especially seen in his treatment of drapery, when the lines run into solid black and express the deeper folds and give emphasis and solidity to the figure (p. 183). The reproductions here given of sketches of drapery by Filippino Lippi and Raphael also show the same principle.

[184] Useful lessons can be learned along the way, like Albert Dürer's technique of adding depth to his figures and details, particularly in how he portrays drapery. He uses strong black lines that create deeper folds and add emphasis and substance to the figure (p. 183). The reproductions included here of drapery sketches by Filippino Lippi and Raphael also illustrate the same approach.

A figure or object of any kind, seen in full light and shade, is relieved at any of its edges either as dark against light, or as light against dark, and we recognize it as a solid form in this way; the boundaries of natural light and shade defining it, and projecting it from the background upon the vision. There may be infinite modulations, of course, [186] between the light part, the half-tones, and the darkest parts; but this broad principle governs all work representing light and shade.

A figure or object of any type, seen in full light and shadow, stands out at its edges either as dark against light or light against dark, allowing us to recognize it as a solid form. The boundaries of natural light and shadow define it and separate it from the background in our vision. There can be countless variations between the light areas, the mid-tones, and the darkest parts; however, this fundamental principle governs all artwork that represents light and shadow. [186]

It is, in fact, the principle of the relief of form represented upon a plane surface.

It is, in fact, the principle of the relief of form shown on a flat surface.

Raphael: Studies of Drapery.

[187] Relief by Light and Shade Alone

[187] Relief Using Only Light and Shadow

If the draughtsman's object be to represent the appearance of a figure or any object in full natural light and shade with the pen or other point, he could do so without using outline at all, but by simply observing this principle and defining the boundaries of light on dark or half-tone in their proper masses and relations. The pen sketch of the man with the hoe (p. 188) is intended to illustrate this method.

If the draftsman's goal is to show the appearance of a figure or any object in full natural light and shadow using a pen or other tool, he can do it without any outlines at all. He just needs to follow this principle, defining the boundaries of light on dark or mid-tones in their right masses and relationships. The pen sketch of the man with the hoe (p. 188) is meant to illustrate this technique.

There is also the method of representing form in relief by means of working with white line only upon a dark ground, the modelling and planes of surface being entirely expressed in this way (as in a, p. 189). This may be termed drawing by means of light, and may be contrasted with the opposite method of working by means of black line only on a light ground, or drawing by means of shade (as in b, p. 189).

There’s also the technique of showing form in relief by only using white lines on a dark background, with the modeling and surface planes fully represented this way (as in a, p. 189). This can be called drawing with light, which contrasts with the opposite method of working with black lines on a light background, or drawing with shade (as in b, p. 189).

Yet another method, and one in which the effect of relief can be obtained more readily and rapidly, perhaps, is by working on a half-toned paper, drawing in the form with pencil, chalk, or brush, blocking in the darker shadows and heightening the highest lights with touches of white. These white touches, however, should be strictly limited to the highest lights. This method is represented by the half-tone blocks used in this book, those which were taken from drawings made on brown paper and touched with white.

Yet another approach, which can achieve relief effects more easily and quickly, is to work on a half-toned paper. You can sketch the form with pencil, chalk, or brush, fill in the darker shadows, and add the brightest highlights with touches of white. However, these white highlights should be limited to just the brightest areas. This technique is shown in the half-tone blocks used in this book, which were made from drawings on brown paper and highlighted with white.

The Principle of the Photograph

The Principle of Photography

The definition of form by means of light is strictly the principle of the photograph, which comprehends and illustrates its complementary of relief by means of shade, and I think it is due to the influence of the photograph that modern black-and-white artists [190] have so often worked on these principles. The drawings of Frederick Walker and Charles Keene may be referred to as examples. I shall, however, hope to return to this branch of the subject later.

The definition of form through light is essentially the principle of photography, which captures and showcases its relief through shadow. I believe it's the impact of photography that has led modern black-and-white artists [190] to frequently work based on these principles. The works of Frederick Walker and Charles Keene serve as examples. However, I hope to revisit this aspect of the topic later.

Relief in Architectural Mouldings

Relief in Architectural Moldings

So far we have been considering the relief of form by means of line. We now come to what may be termed the relief of form by actual form and plane, or modelling in actual light and shade, as in architecture and sculptors' and carvers' work. Then relief is gained by the contrast of actually different planes, forms, surfaces, and textures. The simplest illustrations of the principles of modelled relief are to be found in architectural mouldings, by means of which buildings are relieved and enriched, and important structural or functional parts are emphasized, as in cornices and ribs of vaults, arches, and openings.

So far, we've been looking at how to create relief in shapes using lines. Now, we turn to what might be called the relief of form through actual shapes and planes, or modeling in real light and shadow, like in architecture and the work of sculptors and carvers. Here, relief comes from the contrast of truly different planes, shapes, surfaces, and textures. The simplest examples of these principles of modeled relief can be found in architectural moldings, which enhance and enrich buildings, highlighting important structural or functional elements like cornices, ribs of vaults, arches, and openings.

Place a concave moulding side by side with a convex one either horizontally or vertically, and a certain pleasant effect of contrasting light and shade is the result, reminding one of the recurring concave and convex of the rolling waves of the sea (a, p. 191).

Place a curved molding next to a bulging one, either horizontally or vertically, and you'll get a nice effect of contrasting light and shadow, similar to the continuous curves of the rolling waves of the sea (a, p. 191).

A series of flat planes of different widths and at different levels also produces a pleasant kind of relief useful in a picture frame or the jamb of a door (b).

A set of flat surfaces with varying widths and at different heights also creates a nice kind of relief that's useful in a picture frame or the side of a door (b).

All architectural mouldings might be said to be modifications or combinations of the principles illustrated by these two.

All architectural moldings can be considered variations or combinations of the principles shown by these two.

Very different feeling may be expressed in mouldings, and if we compare the two types, the classical and the Gothic, the comparatively broad and simple effect of the former (c, d, e, f, g) [192] contrasts with the richness and variety and the stronger effect of light and shade, produced by deep undercutting, in the latter (h, i, j, k).

Very different feelings can be expressed in moldings, and if we compare the two types, the classical and the Gothic, the relatively broad and simple effect of the former (c, d, e, f, g) [192] contrasts with the richness and variety, along with the stronger effects of light and shadow, created by deep undercutting in the latter (h, i, j, k).

The Romans, however, produced rich and highly ornate effects in the use of these types of mouldings, as they reappeared in the Corinthian order, the ovolo cut into the egg and dart, with the Astralagus beneath, the Cyma recta above the brackets of the cornice casting a bold shadow, and both in the cornice and the hollow beneath the dentils enriched with carving, as seen in the splendid fragment of the Forum of Nerva.

The Romans, however, created rich and intricate effects with these types of moldings, as seen again in the Corinthian order, with the ovolo shaped into egg and dart patterns, the Astragalus below, and the Cyma recta above the brackets of the cornice casting a strong shadow. Both the cornice and the hollow under the dentils were enhanced with carvings, like those found in the stunning fragment of the Forum of Nerva.

When we pass to the more complex problems of figure modelling and sculpture, it is but carrying on and developing the same principle of the contrast of planes, of the relief of plane upon plane, of forms upon one plane, to forms upon forms in many planes. From the contrast of bead and hollow we come to consider the contrast between the rounded limb and the sinuous folds of drapery; from the rhythm of the acanthus scroll we turn to the less obvious but none the less existing rhythm of the sculptural frieze.

When we move on to the more complex issues of figure modeling and sculpture, we are simply continuing and expanding on the same idea of contrasting planes, of relief between different planes, and of forms on one plane interacting with forms across multiple planes. From the contrast of a bead and a hollow space, we start to think about the contrast between a rounded limb and the flowing folds of fabric; from the rhythm of the acanthus scroll, we shift our attention to the subtler but equally important rhythm found in the sculptural frieze.

Line, we may say, controls the modeller's and sculptor's composition, but form and its treatment in light and shade give him his means of ornament. The delicate contours of faces and limbs contrasted with the spiral and radiating folds of drapery, or rich clusters of leaves and fruits, the forms of animals and the wings of birds—these are his decorative resources.

Line controls the composition of the modeller and sculptor, but form and how it reacts to light and shadow provide the tools for decoration. The subtle curves of faces and limbs contrasted with the flowing and spiral folds of drapery, or vibrant clusters of leaves and fruits, the shapes of animals, and the wings of birds—these are the decorative materials he works with.

Egyptian Reliefs

Egyptian Reliefs

The early stages of sculpture in relief may be seen in the monumental work of ancient Egypt.

The early stages of relief sculpture can be seen in the monumental work of ancient Egypt.

Simple incised work appears to have been the [194]first stage, and the forms afterwards slightly modelled or rounded at the edges into the hollow of the sunk outline.

Simple incised work seems to have been the [194]first stage, and the shapes were then slightly modeled or rounded at the edges into the hollow of the sunk outline.

Large figures and tables of hieroglyphic inscription were thus cut upon vast mural surfaces, and carried across the joints of the masonry, without disturbing the flatness and repose of the wall surface (p. 195). The Egyptians, indeed, seem to have treated their walls more as if they were books for record and statement, symbol and hieroglyphic.

Large figures and tables of hieroglyphic writing were carved onto huge wall surfaces and flowed across the joints of the masonry without disrupting the smoothness and calm of the wall (p. 195). The Egyptians really seemed to view their walls more like books for recording and expressing ideas, symbols, and hieroglyphs.

Messrs. Perrot and Chipiez, in their "History of Ancient Art in Egypt," speak of three processes in the treatment of Egyptian reliefs (vol. ii., p. 284):

Messrs. Perrot and Chipiez, in their "History of Ancient Art in Egypt," discuss three methods used in the creation of Egyptian reliefs (vol. ii., p. 284):

  1. That followed by the Greeks, in which the figures are left standing out from a smooth bed, sometimes slightly hollowed near the contours (see illustration, p. 196).
  2. Where the figures are modelled in relief in a sunk hollow, from an inch to one and a half inch deep.
  3. Where the surface of the figures and the bed or field of relief are kept on one level (see illustration, p. 196), the contours indicated by hollow lines cut into the stone; very little modelling, little more than silhouette, in which the outline is shown by a hollow instead of by the stroke of a pencil or brush.

One would be inclined to reverse the order of these three processes, on the supposition that No. 3 was the earliest process, and that it arose, as I have conjectured, from the practice of representing forms by incised lines only.

One might want to change the order of these three processes, assuming that No. 3 was the earliest and that it developed, as I've speculated, from the practice of showing shapes using only carved lines.

There is certainly a strong family likeness as to [197] method between the Egyptian reliefs and the Assyrian, the Persian, and the archaic Greek; and there is a far greater difference in treatment between archaic Greek relief sculpture and the work of the Phidian period than between the archaic work of the three races named.

There is definitely a strong family resemblance in the methods between the Egyptian reliefs and those of the Assyrians, Persians, and archaic Greeks; and there is a much bigger difference in style between archaic Greek relief sculpture and the work from the Phidian period than there is among the archaic works of the three mentioned cultures.

The strictly mural and decorative conditions which governed ancient sculpture no doubt gave to Greek sculpture in its perfection a certain dignity, simplicity, and restraint, and also accounted in a great measure for that rhythmic control of invisible structural and ornamental line which asserts itself in such works as the Pan-Athenaic frieze. It was strictly slab sculpture, and became part of the surface of the wall.

The strict mural and decorative rules that defined ancient sculpture undoubtedly gave Greek sculpture its perfect blend of dignity, simplicity, and restraint. These rules also largely influenced the rhythmic control of the unseen structural and decorative lines that stand out in works like the Pan-Athenaic frieze. It was essentially slab sculpture, seamlessly integrated into the wall's surface.

Gothic Sculpture

Gothic Sculpture

The structural and ornamental feeling also asserts itself strongly in Gothic sculpture, owing to its close association with architecture, as, when it was not an integral part of the structure, it was always an essential part of the expression of the building, and it was this which controlled its treatment decoratively, in its scale and its system and degree of relief.

The structural and decorative aspects are also very prominent in Gothic sculpture, mainly because of its close connection to architecture. When it wasn’t a key part of the structure, it was always an important part of how the building was expressed. This connection influenced how it was treated artistically, including its scale, style, and level of detail.

In the porches of the Gallo-Roman churches of France of the twelfth century, the figures occupying the place of shafts became columnar in treatment, the sinuous formalized draperies wrapped around the elongated figures, or falling in vertical folds, as in the figures in the western door of Chartres Cathedral (p. 199). The lines of the design of the sculptured tympanum were strictly related to the space, and the degree and treatment of the relief clearly felt in regard to the architectural effect (p. 201).

In the entrances of the twelfth-century Gallo-Roman churches in France, the figures that replaced the shafts became more column-like in style, with flowing, stylized draperies wrapped around the elongated figures or cascading in vertical folds, similar to the figures on the western door of Chartres Cathedral (p. 199). The design lines of the sculpted tympanum were closely connected to the space, and the level and style of the relief were clearly considered in relation to the architectural impact (p. 201).

[198] Architectural Influence

Architectural Influence

In the sculptured tombs of the Middle Ages, with their recumbent figures and heraldic enrichments, again, we see this architectonic sense influencing the treatment of form and relief, as these monuments were strictly architectural decorations, often incorporating its forms and details, and often built into the structure of the church or cathedral itself, as in the case of the recessed and canopied tombs of the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries.

In the sculpted tombs of the Middle Ages, with their reclining figures and decorative heraldry, we can again see this architectural influence shaping how form and relief are treated. These monuments served as architectural decorations, often incorporating their designs and details, and were frequently integrated into the church or cathedral structure itself, as seen with the recessed and canopied tombs from the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries.

As sculptures became detached from the building and wall, and appeared in full relief in the round, though still, as it were, carrying a reminiscence of their origin with them in the shape of the moulded pedestal, architectural control became less and less felt, statues in consequence being less and less related to their surroundings. The individual feeling of the sculptor or the traditions of his school and training alone influenced his treatment, until we get the incidental and dramatic or sentimental isolated figure or group of modern days.

As sculptures became separated from the building and wall, standing out in full relief, they still carried a reminder of their origins through the shaped pedestal. The influence of architecture became less significant, leading to statues being less connected to their surroundings. The personal style of the sculptor or the traditions of his training became the main influences on their work, resulting in the standalone and often dramatic or sentimental figures or groups we see in modern times.

Medals and Coins

Medals and Coins

It is noteworthy, however, that even in the smaller works of the modeller, carver, or sculptor of the Middle Ages or the early Renaissance, a sense of decorative fitness and structural sense is always present. We see it in the carved ornaments of seats and furniture, in the design and treatment of coins and seals and gems and medals. These latter from the time of the ancient Greeks afford beautiful examples of the decorative treatment of relief in strict relation to the object and purpose. The skill and taste of the Greeks seemed to have been largely inherited by the artists of the earlier Italian Renaissance, such as Pisano, whose famous medal of the Malatesta of Rimini affords a splendid [200] instance not only of the treatment of the portrait and subject on the reverse perfectly adapted to its method and purpose, but also of the artistic use of lettering as a decorative feature (see p. 203).

It’s important to note that even in the smaller works of the modeller, carver, or sculptor from the Middle Ages or early Renaissance, there's always a sense of decorative suitability and structural awareness. We observe this in the carved decorations of seats and furniture, and in the design and treatment of coins, seals, gems, and medals. The latter, dating back to the ancient Greeks, provide beautiful examples of decorative relief that are closely linked to the object and its purpose. The skill and taste of the Greeks seem to have been largely passed down to the artists of the earlier Italian Renaissance, like Pisano, whose famous medal of the Malatesta of Rimini is a stunning example of how the treatment of the portrait and subject on the reverse is perfectly suited to its method and purpose, as well as the artistic use of lettering as a decorative element (see p. 203).

The treatment and relief of figures and heads upon the plane surfaces of metals and coins, the composition controlled by the circular form, have always been a fine test of both modelling and decorative skill and taste. Breadth is given by a flatness in the treatment of successive planes of low relief, which rise to their highest projection from the ground, in the case of a head in profile, about its centre. The delicate perception of the relation of the planes of surface is important, as well as the decorative effect to be obtained by arrangement of the light and shade masses and the contrast of textures, such as hair and the folds of drapery, to the smooth contours of faces and figures, and the rectangular forms of lettering.

The treatment and relief of figures and heads on flat metal surfaces and coins, with the design shaped by circular forms, have always been a great test of both modeling and decorative skill and taste. A sense of breadth is achieved through the flatness in the treatment of successive layers of low relief, which rise to their highest point from the background; for a profile head, this point is typically around its center. The subtle ability to perceive the relationship between the surface planes is crucial, as is the decorative effect created by arranging light and shadow, along with the contrast of textures, such as hair and fabric folds, against the smooth curves of faces and figures, and the sharp edges of lettering.

In gems we see the use made of the concave ground, which gives an effective relief to the figure design in convex upon it. Bolder projection of prominent parts are here necessary in contrast to the retiring planes, the work being on so small a scale, and also in view of its seal-like character; for, of course, it is the method of producing form by incision, and modelling by cutting and hollowing out, that gives the peculiar character to gems and seals; and it is in forming human figures that the building up of the form by a series of ovals, spoken of in a previous chapter, becomes really of practical value: the method of hollowing the stone or metal in cutting the gem or making a [202] die and the character of the tool leading naturally in that direction.

In gems, we can see how concave surfaces are used to create effective relief for the convex designs on them. It’s important to have bolder projections of the prominent parts to contrast with the recessed areas, especially since the work is on such a small scale and has a seal-like quality. This technique relies on creating form through incision and shaping by cutting and hollowing, which gives gems and seals their distinctive character. When creating human figures, building the form using a series of ovals, as mentioned in a previous chapter, is particularly useful. The process of hollowing the stone or metal while cutting the gem or making a [202] die naturally leads in that direction, given the nature of the tools used.

Desiderio di Settignano

Desire of Settignano

Perhaps the most delicate and beautiful kind of sculptured or modelled relief is to be found in the work of the Florentine school of the fifteenth century, more especially that of Donatello and Desiderio di Settignano, who seem indeed to have caught the feeling and spirit of the best Greek period, with fresh inspiration and suggestion from nature and the life around them, as well as an added charm of grace and sweetness.

Perhaps the most delicate and beautiful type of sculpted or modeled relief can be found in the work of the Florentine school from the fifteenth century, especially that of Donatello and Desiderio di Settignano. They really managed to capture the essence and spirit of the best Greek era, with new inspiration and ideas drawn from nature and the life around them, along with an extra charm of elegance and sweetness.

It is difficult to imagine that marble carving in low relief can be carried to greater perfection than it is in the well-known small relief by Desiderio di Settignano of the "Madonna and Child," now in the Italian Court of the South Kensington Museum. The delicate yet firmly chiselled faces and hands, the smooth surfaces of the flesh, and the folds of drapery, emerging from, or sinking into, the varied planes of the ground, for refinement of feeling and treatment seem almost akin to the art of the painter in the tenderness of their expression.

It's hard to believe that marble carving in low relief can be done any better than in the famous small relief by Desiderio di Settignano of the "Madonna and Child," now in the Italian Court of the South Kensington Museum. The delicate yet precisely carved faces and hands, the smooth flesh surfaces, and the folds of drapery, either rising from or embedding into the varying planes of the background, for refinement of emotion and treatment feel almost similar to the painter's art in the softness of their expression.


CHAPTER VIII

Of the Expression of Relief in Line-drawing—Graphic Aim and Ornamental Aim—Superficial Appearance and Constructive Reality—Accidents and Essentials—Representation and Suggestion of Natural Form in Design—The Outward Vision and the Inner Vision.

Of the Expression of Relief in Line Drawing—Graphic Goals and Decorative Goals—Surface Appearance and Structural Reality—Incidental Details and Key Features—Representation and Implication of Natural Form in Design—The External Perspective and the Internal Perspective.

I have already said that when we add lines or tints of shadow, local colour or surface, to an outline drawing, we are seeking to express form in a more complete way than can be done in outline alone. These added lines or tints give what we call relief. That is their purpose and function, whether by that added relief we wish to produce an ornamental effect or simply to approach nearer to the full relief of nature, for of course the degrees of relief are many.

I've already mentioned that when we add lines or shades of color and texture to an outline drawing, we aim to represent form in a more complete way than what can be achieved with just an outline. These added lines or shades create what we refer to as relief. That's their purpose and function, whether we want to create an ornamental effect or simply get closer to the full relief of nature, since there are, of course, many degrees of relief.

Relief in Line-Drawing

Relief in Line Art

What may be called the natural principle of relief—that system of light and shade by which a figure or any solid object is perceived as such by the eye—consists in each part of the form being thrown into more or less contrast by appearing as dark on light upon its background, more especially at its edges. A figure wholly dark, say in black drapery, appearing against a light ground, might be supposed to be flat if no cast shadow was seen; the same with the reverse—a light figure upon a dark ground—except that in this latter [205] case, unless the light was very level and flat, a certain concentration of light upon the highest parts, or indicating a modulation of shadow in interstices, might betray its solidity (see p. 206).

What can be called the natural principle of relief—that way light and shadow work together to help us see a figure or any solid object—comes from each part of the shape standing out against its background, especially at the edges. A completely dark figure, like one in black clothing, appearing against a light background could look flat if there was no visible shadow; the same applies to the opposite—a light figure on a dark background—but in this latter case, unless the light is very even and flat, a concentration of light on the highest parts, or subtle shadows in the gaps, might reveal its three-dimensionality (see p. 206).

The Two Principles of Contrast in Black and White.

But if we place a figure so that the light falls from one side, we perceive that it at once stands out in bold relief in broad planes of light and shade, further emphasized by cast shadows (p. 207).

But if we position a figure so that the light hits it from one side, we immediately see that it stands out in strong contrast with broad areas of light and shadow, which is further highlighted by the shadows it casts (p. 207).

Treatment of the Same Figure in Light And Shade.

It would be possible to represent or to express a figure or object so lighted by means of laying in the modulations and planes of shadow only, or by means of adding the light only on a toned ground. In sketching in black and white, it is a good plan to accustom oneself to complete as one goes along, as far as may be, putting in outline and shadow together; but this needs a power of direct drawing and a correctness of eye only to be gained by continual practice. A slight preliminary basis of light lines to indicate the position and proportions, and yet not strong enough to need rubbing out, is also a good method for those who do not feel certain enough for the absolutely direct method of drawing.

You can depict a figure or object illuminated by just using shading and highlights, or by adding light on a toned background. When sketching in black and white, it’s helpful to get into the habit of working on outlines and shadows at the same time, as much as possible. However, this requires skill in direct drawing and a keen eye, which can only be developed through consistent practice. A light initial sketch with faint lines to show the position and proportions—without being so dark that it needs erasing—can also be a good approach for those who aren’t confident enough to use the direct drawing method.

Expression of Form by Light and Shade: (1) Light and Shade Without Outline; (2) Light and Shade Enforced by Outline.

Now in drawing, as I think I have pointed out before, no less than in all art, there are two main governing principles of working which may be distinguished.

Now in drawing, as I believe I've mentioned before, just like in all art, there are two main guiding principles of working that can be identified.

  1. The graphic aim.
  2. The ornamental or decorative aim.

The Graphic Aim

The Graphic Goal

[208] The graphic aim—the endeavour to represent a form exactly as it appears—a power always valuable to acquire whatever may be our ultimate purpose, leaves the draughtsman great freedom in the choice and use of line, or other means of obtaining relief, local tint, and tone.

[208] The goal of accurately depicting a form as it looks—an ability that is always worthwhile to master, no matter what our final objective is—gives the artist significant freedom in selecting and applying lines, or other methods to achieve depth, color, and shading.

In line-work the broad relief of the flat tones of shadow may be expressed in lines approaching the straight, diagonally sloping from right to left, or from left to right, as seems most natural to the action of the hand.

In line work, the wide relief of the flat shadow tones can be shown in lines that are nearly straight, slanting diagonally from right to left, or from left to right, depending on what feels most natural for the hand's movement.

The quality of our lines will depend upon the quality we are seeking to express. We shall be led to vary them in seeking to express other characteristics, such as textures and surfaces.

The quality of our lines will depend on the quality we aim to express. We'll be inspired to change them while trying to convey other features, like textures and surfaces.

In drawing fur or feathers, for instance, we should naturally vary the quality and direction of line, using broken lines and dots for the former, and flowing smooth fine lines for the latter, while extra force and relief would be gained by throwing them up upon solid black grounds. Solid black, also, to represent local colour, or material such as velvet, is often valuable as a contrast in black and white line-drawing, giving a richness of effect not to be obtained in any other way (see No. 2, p. 213). Its value was appreciated by the early German and Italian book-illustrators, and in our own time has been used almost to excess by some of our younger designers, who have been largely influenced by Hokusai and other Japanese artists, who are always skilful in the use of solid blacks.

In drawing fur or feathers, for example, we should naturally vary the quality and direction of the lines, using broken lines and dots for fur, and smooth, flowing lines for feathers. We can add extra emphasis and depth by placing these elements against solid black backgrounds. Solid black is also useful to represent local color or materials like velvet, providing a contrast in black and white line drawing that creates a richness of effect that can't be achieved any other way (see No. 2, p. 213). Early German and Italian book illustrators valued this technique, and today, some of our younger designers have used it almost excessively, heavily influenced by Hokusai and other Japanese artists, who are always skilled at incorporating solid blacks.

Linear Expression of Features, Feathers and Fur: Notes from Nature.

In line-drawing a very useful principle to observe, to give solidity to figures and objects, is to let one's lines—say of drapery or shadow—run into solid blacks in the deepest interstices of the forms, as when folds of drapery are wrapped about a figure, or in the deeper folds themselves (No. 1, p. 213).

In line drawing, a helpful principle to keep in mind for giving figures and objects more solidity is to let your lines—like those for drapery or shadow—fade into solid blacks in the deepest gaps of the forms, such as when fabric folds are wrapped around a figure or in the deeper folds themselves (No. 1, p. 213).

Sketches to Illustrate (1) The Graphic And (2) The Decorative Treatment of Draped Figures.

[210] The Ornamental Aim

The Decorative Goal

I have spoken of the graphic and the ornamental aims as distinct, and so they may for practical purposes be regarded; although in some cases it is possible to combine a considerable amount of graphic force with decorative effect, and even in purely graphic art there should always be the controlling influence of the sense of composition which must be felt throughout all forms of art.

I have discussed the graphic and decorative goals as separate, and for practical reasons, they can be viewed that way; however, in some cases, it’s possible to mix a significant amount of graphic strength with decorative effect. Even in purely graphic art, there should always be a guiding influence of composition that can be sensed in all forms of art.

For the simplest ornamental function, however, very little graphic drawing is needed, over and above the very essential power of definition by pure outline, and feeling for silhouette; but a sense for the relief of masses upon a ground or field, and of the proportions and relations of lines and masses or distribution of quantities, is essential. Now an ornamental effect may be produced by the simple repetition of some form defined in outline arranged so as to fall into a rhythmic series of lines.

For the most basic decorative purpose, only a minimal amount of graphic drawing is necessary, aside from the crucial ability to define shapes using pure outlines and a sense of silhouette. However, having an appreciation for the relief of shapes on a background, as well as the proportions and relationships between lines and shapes or the distribution of elements, is essential. An ornamental effect can be created by simply repeating a form defined by its outline, arranged to create a rhythmic sequence of lines.

A series of birds upon a plan of this kind, for instance, would form a frieze on simple bordering in abstract line alone, and might be quite sufficient for some purposes. The same thing would be capable of more elaborate treatment and different effect by relieving the birds upon a darker ground, by defining the details of their forms more, or by alternating them in black or white, or by adopting the simple principle of counterchange (see p. 215).

A series of birds on a design like this could create a frieze with just simple lines, which might work well for certain needs. It could also be treated in a more complex way to achieve different effects by placing the birds on a darker background, emphasizing their details more, alternating them in black and white, or using the straightforward concept of counterchange (see p. 215).

Decorative Treatment of Birds.

Flowers or figures would be capable of the same simple and abstract treatment; and almost any form in nature, reduced to its simplest elements of recurring line and mass, and rhythmically [212] disposed, would give us distinct decorative motives.

Flowers or shapes could be treated in the same simple and abstract way; nearly any form in nature, simplified to its basic elements of recurring lines, shapes, and rhythmically arranged, would provide us with clear decorative ideas. [212]

The Ornamental Aim

The Decorative Goal

It is quite open to the designer to select his lines and forms straight from nature, and, bearing in mind the necessity for selection of the best ornamental elements, for a certain simplification, and the rhythmical treatment before mentioned, it is good to do so, as the work is more likely to have a certain freshness than if some of the well-known historic forms of ornament are used again. We may, however, learn much from the ornamental use of these forms, and use similar forms as the boundaries of the shape of our pattern units and masses.

The designer has complete freedom to choose shapes and lines directly from nature. Keeping in mind the need to select the best decorative elements, simplify where necessary, and apply the rhythmic approach mentioned earlier, this method is beneficial, as it is more likely to bring a sense of freshness compared to reusing some of the familiar historical ornament styles. However, we can learn a lot from the decorative use of these traditional forms and can incorporate similar shapes as the boundaries for our pattern units and masses.

It is good practice to take a typical shape such as the Persian radiating flower or pine-apple, and use it as the plan for quite a different structure in detail, taking some familiar English flower as our motive. The same with the Indian and Persian palmette type. It is also desirable, as before pointed out, to draw sprays within formal boundaries for ornamental use. By such methods we may not only learn to appreciate the ornamental value of such forms, but by such adaptation and re-combination produce new varieties of ornament (see p. 217).

It’s a good idea to take a familiar shape like the Persian radiating flower or pineapple and use it as a base for a completely different detailed structure, incorporating a well-known English flower as our inspiration. The same applies to the Indian and Persian palmette style. Additionally, as mentioned before, it's beneficial to draw sprays within formal boundaries for decorative purposes. Through these methods, we can not only learn to appreciate the decorative value of these forms but also create new varieties of ornament through adaptation and recombination (see p. 217).

Floral Designs Upon Typical Inclosing Shapes of Indian and Persian Ornament.

We may perceive how distinct are the two aims as between simple graphic drawing, or delineation, and what we call design, or conscious arrangements of line or form. While planes of relief, varied form and surface, values of light and shade, and accidental characteristics are rather the object with the graphic draughtsman, typical form and structure, and recurring line and mass, are [213] sought for by the ornamentist. Both series of facts, or qualities, or characteristics, are in nature.

We can see how different the two goals are between straightforward graphic drawing and what we refer to as design, or deliberate arrangements of lines or shapes. While the graphic artist focuses on aspects like planes of relief, varied forms and surfaces, light and shadow values, and random features, the designer aims for typical forms, structures, and recurring lines and masses. Both sets of facts or characteristics exist in nature.

Selection

Choice

[214] Judicious selection, however, is the test of artistic treatment; selection, that is, with a view to the aim and scope of the work. The truth of superficial appearance or accidental aspect is one sort of truth: the truth of the actual constructive characteristics—be they of figure, flower, or landscape—is another. Both belong to the thing we see—to the object we are drawing; but we shall dwell upon one truth or set of truths rather than the other, in accordance with our particular artistic aim, though, whatever this may be, and in whatever direction it may lead us, we shall find that selection of some sort will be necessary.

[214] Choosing wisely, however, is the key to effective artistic expression; selection, that is, with consideration of the purpose and range of the work. The truth of what appears on the surface or incidental aspects is one type of truth: the truth of the actual structural qualities—whether of figure, flower, or landscape—is another. Both refer to the thing we see—the subject we are drawing; but we will focus on one truth or set of truths over the other, based on our specific artistic goal. Regardless of what that goal may be, or what path it takes us down, we will find that some form of selection will be essential.

In making studies, however pure and simple, the object of which is to discover facts and to learn mastery of form, our aim should be to get as much truth as we can, truth of structure as well as of aspect. But these (as far as we can make them) exhaustive studies should be accompanied or followed by analytical studies made from different points of view and for different purposes.

In conducting studies, no matter how straightforward, with the goal of uncovering facts and mastering form, we should strive to uncover as much truth as possible, both in terms of structure and appearance. However, these thorough studies should be paired with or succeeded by analytical studies conducted from various perspectives and for different objectives.

Studies, for instance, made with a view to arrangements of line only—to get the characteristic and beautiful lines of a figure, a momentary attitude, the lines of a flower, or a landscape: studies with a view, solely, to the understanding of structure and form, or again, with the object of seizing the broad relations of light and shade, or tone and colour—all are necessary to a complete artistic education of the eye.

Studies, for example, focused solely on the arrangement of line—to capture the distinctive and beautiful lines of a figure, a fleeting pose, the lines of a flower, or a landscape: studies aimed specifically at understanding structure and form, or at grasping the overall relationships of light and shadow, or tone and color—all are essential for a well-rounded artistic education of the eye.

Accidents and Essentials

Accidents and Essentials

If we are drawn as students rather towards the picturesque and graphic side of art, we shall probably [216] look for accidents of line and form more than what I should call the essentials, or typical line and form, which are the most valuable to the decorative designer.

If we, as students, tend to be more attracted to the visual and striking aspects of art, we will likely focus more on the randomness of lines and shapes rather than what I would consider the fundamental or typical lines and shapes, which are the most important for a decorative designer.

In both directions some compact or compromise with nature is necessary in any really artistic re-presentation.

In both directions, some balance or compromise with nature is essential for any truly artistic representation.

The painter and the sculptor often seek as complete representation as possible, and what may be called complete representation is within the range of their resources. Yet unless some individual choice or feeling impresses the work of either kind it is not a re-presentation, but becomes an imitation, and therefore inartistic.

The painter and the sculptor often aim for as complete a representation as they can, and what can be considered a complete representation is limited by their resources. However, unless some personal choice or emotion is reflected in their work, it’s not a re-presentation; instead, it turns into an imitation, which is therefore unartistic.

The decorative designer and ornamentist seek to suggest rather than to re-present, though the decorator's suggestion of natural form, taking only enough to suit or express the particular ornamental purpose, must be considered also as a re-presentation. How much, or how little, he will take of actual nature must depend largely upon his resources, his object, and the limitations of his material—the conditions of his work in short; but his range may be as wide as from the flat silhouetted forms of stencils or simple inlays to the highly-wrought mural painting.

The decorative designer and ornament artist aim to suggest rather than to re-present, although the decorator's suggestion of natural forms, using just enough to fit or convey a specific ornamental purpose, can also be seen as a re-presentation. The extent to which he draws from actual nature depends largely on his resources, his goals, and the limitations of his materials—the conditions of his work, in short; but his range can span from the flat, silhouetted shapes of stencils or simple inlays to the intricately detailed mural painting.

Design motive, individual conception and sentiment, apart from material, must, of course, always affect the question of the choice and degree of representation of nature. The painter will sometimes feel that he only wants to suggest forms, such as figures or buildings, half veiled in light and atmosphere, colours and forms in twilight, or half lost in luminous depths of shadow.

Design motives, personal ideas, and feelings, aside from the materials used, always impact how one chooses to represent nature and to what extent. A painter might sometimes feel that they only want to hint at shapes, like figures or structures, partially obscured by light and atmosphere, colors and shapes in twilight, or somewhat hidden in glowing shadows.

Dancing Figure with the Governing Lines of the Movement.

The Outward Vision and Inner Vision [220]

The External Perspective and Internal Perspective [220]

The decorative designer will sometimes want to emphasize forms with the utmost force and realism at his command, as in some crisp bit of carving or emphatic pattern, to give point and relief in his scheme of quantities.

The decorative designer will sometimes want to emphasize shapes with the strongest force and realism at their disposal, like in a sharp piece of carving or bold pattern, to add emphasis and depth to their design.

There is no hard-and-fast rule in art, only general principles, constantly varied in practice, from which all principles spring, and into which, if vital, they ought to be capable of being again resolved.

There are no strict rules in art, only general principles that are always adapted in practice, from which all principles come and into which, if they're meaningful, they should be able to be reinterpreted.

But a design once started upon some principle—some particular motive of line or form—then, in following this out, it will seem to develop almost a life or law of growth of its own, which as a matter of logical necessity will demand a particular treatment—a certain natural consistency or harmony—from its main features down to the smallest detail as a necessity of its existence.

But once a design is based on a specific principle—some unique idea of line or shape—it seems to take on a life of its own as it evolves. This process logically requires a certain approach—a natural consistency or harmony—that must be present from the main elements all the way down to the smallest details for it to truly exist.

We might further differentiate art as, on the one hand, the image of the outward vision, and, on the other, as the outcome or image of the inner vision.

We can further distinguish art as, on one side, the representation of the outward vision, and on the other side, as the result or representation of the inner vision.

The first kind would include all portraiture, by which I mean faithful portrayal or transcript whether of animate or inanimate nature; while the second would include all imaginative conceptions, decorative designs, and pattern inventions.

The first type would cover all portraiture, meaning accurate representation or reproduction of both living and non-living subjects; the second type would encompass all creative ideas, decorative designs, and pattern creations.

The outward vision obviously relies upon what the eye perceives in nature. Its virtue consists in the faithfulness and truth of its graphic record, in the penetrating force of observation of fact, and the representative power by which they are reproduced on paper or canvas, clay or marble.

The outward vision clearly depends on what the eye sees in nature. Its strength lies in the accuracy and honesty of its visual representation, in the sharpness of its observation of reality, and in the ability to reproduce these observations on paper or canvas, clay or marble.

1 and 2, Mountain And Crag Sculpture: Coast Lines, Gulf Of Nauplia.
Lines of Movement in Water: Shallow Stream Over Sand.

The image of the inner vision is also a record, but of a different order of fact. It may be often [222] of unconscious impressions and memories which are retained and recur with all or more than the vividness of actuality—the tangible forms of external nature calling up answering, but not identical, images in the mind, like reflections in a mirror or in still water, which are similar but never the same as the objects they reflect.

The image of inner vision is also a record, but it's a different kind of fact. It often comes from unconscious impressions and memories that are kept and come back with all or even more vividness than real life—the physical forms of the outside world triggering related but not identical images in the mind, like reflections in a mirror or still water, which look similar but are never exactly the same as the objects they reflect.

But the inner vision is not bound by the appearances of the particular moment. It is the record of the sum of many moments, and retains the typical impress of multitudinous and successive impressions—like the composite photograph, where faces may be printed one over another until the result is a more typical image than any individual one taken separately.

But inner vision isn’t limited by what we see in the moment. It captures the total of many moments and holds the typical imprint of numerous and successive impressions—like a composite photograph, where faces can be layered on top of one another until the result is a more representative image than any single one taken alone.

The inner vision sees the results of time rather than the impressions of the moment. It sees space rather than landscape: race rather than men: spirits rather than mortals: types rather than individuals.

The inner vision sees the outcomes of time instead of the impressions of the moment. It sees space rather than scenery: races rather than people: spirits rather than humans: types rather than individuals.

The inner vision hangs the mind's house with a mysterious tapestry of figurative thoughts, a rich and fantastic imagery, a world where the elements are personified, where every tree has its dryad, and where the wings of the winds actually brush the cheek.

The inner vision decorates the mind's space with a mysterious tapestry of imaginative ideas, vibrant and fantastical images, a realm where elements come to life, where every tree has its dryad, and where the winds' wings genuinely caress the cheek.

The inner vision re-creates rather than represents, and its virtue consists in the vividness and beauty with which, in the language of line, form, and colour, these visions of the mind are recorded and presented to the outward eye.

The inner vision re-creates instead of just representing, and its value lies in the vividness and beauty with which these mental images are captured and shown to the outside world through lines, shapes, and colors.

There is often fusion here again between two different tendencies, habits of mind, or ways of regarding things. In all art the mind must work [223]through the eye, whether its force appears in closeness of observation or in vivid imaginings. The very vividness of realization even of the most faithful portraiture is a testimony to mental powers.

There’s often a blend here again between two different tendencies, ways of thinking, or perspectives. In all art, the mind must work through the eye, whether its strength shows in detailed observation or in bright imaginings. The very vibrancy of even the most accurate portraits is proof of mental abilities.

The difference lies really in the focus of the mental force; and, in any case, the language of line and form we use will neither be forcible or convincing, neither faithful to natural fact nor true to the imagination, without close and constant study of external form and of its structure as well as its aspect.

The difference really comes down to the focus of the mental energy; and, in any case, the language of line and shape we use won’t be powerful or convincing, nor will it accurately reflect reality or resonate with the imagination, without careful and ongoing study of the external form, its structure, and its appearance.


CHAPTER IX

Of the Adaptation of Line and Form in Design, in various materials and methods—Mural Decoration—Fresco-work of the Italian Painters—Modern Mural Work—Mural Spacing and pattern Plans—Scale—The Skirting—The Dado—Field of the Wall—The Frieze—Panelling—Tapestry—Textile Design—Persian Carpets—Effect of Texture on Colour—Prints—Wall-paper—Stained Glass.

Of how line and shape are adapted in design, using different materials and techniques—Wall Decoration—Fresco work by Italian painters—Contemporary mural work—Spacing and pattern plans for murals—Scale—The baseboard—The dado—Wall area—The frieze—Paneling—Tapestry—Textile design—Persian carpets—How texture affects color—Prints—Wallpaper—Stained glass.

We have been considering hitherto the choice and use of line and form, and various methods of their representation in drawing, both from the point of view of the graphic draughtsman and that of the ornamental designer.

We have been looking at the selection and use of lines and shapes, and different ways to represent them in drawings, from both the perspective of the graphic artist and the decorative designer.

We now come to consider the subject solely from the latter standpoint (the point of view of ornamental design); and it will be useful to endeavour to trace the principles governing the selection of form and use of line as influenced by some of the different methods and conditions of craftsmanship, and as adapted to various decorative purposes.

We will now focus on the topic from the perspective of ornamental design. It will be helpful to explore the principles that guide the choice of form and the use of line, as these are affected by various craftsmanship methods and conditions, and how they are suited for different decorative purposes.

Mural Decoration

Mural Art

The most important branch of decorative art may be said to be mural decoration, allied as it is with the fundamental constructive art of all—architecture, from which it obtains its determining conditions and natural limitations.

The most important branch of decorative art is mural decoration, as it is connected to the essential constructive art of all—architecture, which provides its defining conditions and natural limitations.

Its history in the past is one of splendour and dignity, and its record includes some of the finest [225]art ever produced. The ancient Asiatic nations were well aware of its value not only as decoration but as a record.

Its history is filled with grandeur and respect, and it showcases some of the best [225]art ever created. The ancient Asian nations recognized its worth not only as decoration but also as a historical record.

Giotto: “;Chastity”; (Lower Church, Assisi).

The palace and temple and tomb-walls of ancient Egypt, Persia, and Assyria vividly illustrate the life and ideas of those peoples, while they conform to mural conditions. The painted council halls and churches of the Middle Ages fulfil the same purpose in a different spirit; but mural decoration in its richest, most imaginative and complete form was developed in Italy, from the time of Giotto, whose famous works at the Arena Chapel at Padua and Assisi are well known, to the time of Michael Angelo, who in the sublime ceiling of the Sistine Chapel seemed to touch the extreme limits of mural work, and in fact might be said to have [226]almost defied them, painting mouldings in relief and in perspective to form the framework of pictures where figures on different scales are used. In the Sistine Chapel the series of earlier frescoes on the lower wall by Botticelli, Lorenzo di Credi, Ghirlandajo, Pinturicchio, and other Florentine painters of the fifteenth century are really more strictly mural in feeling, and safer as guides in general treatment, than the work of the great master himself. They have much of the repose and richness as well as the quiet decorative effect of tapestry.

The palace, temple, and tomb walls of ancient Egypt, Persia, and Assyria clearly showcase the life and beliefs of those cultures, while fitting into the context of mural art. The painted council halls and churches of the Middle Ages serve the same purpose, though in a different style; however, mural decoration reached its most imaginative and complete form in Italy, starting from Giotto, whose renowned works at the Arena Chapel in Padua and Assisi are well-known, up to Michelangelo, who in the stunning ceiling of the Sistine Chapel seemed to push the boundaries of mural work, perhaps even defying them by painting relief and perspective moldings to create a framework for pictures featuring figures of varying scales. In the Sistine Chapel, the series of earlier frescoes on the lower wall by Botticelli, Lorenzo di Credi, Ghirlandajo, Pinturicchio, and other Florentine painters from the fifteenth century actually convey a more strictly mural feeling and are safer references for general treatment than the works of the great master himself. They possess a lot of the calm and richness, as well as the subtle decorative effect of tapestry.

Fresco-Work of Italian Painters

Fresco Art by Italian Artists

The frescoes in the Palazzo Publico at Siena, Pinturicchio's work in the Piccolomini Chapel and the Appartimenti Borgia, the Campo Santo at Pisa and the Riccardi Chapel of Benozzo Gozzoli at Florence, may be mentioned as among the gems of mural painting.

The frescoes in the Palazzo Publico in Siena, Pinturicchio's work in the Piccolomini Chapel and the Appartimenti Borgia, the Campo Santo in Pisa, and the Riccardi Chapel by Benozzo Gozzoli in Florence are all considered masterpieces of mural painting.

Modern Mural Work

Contemporary Mural Art

We have but little important mural painting in this country. Doubtless, from various traces discovered under Puritan whitewash, the walls of our mediæval churches were painted as frequently as in continental countries, but so completely did artistic tradition and religious sentiment change after the Reformation that the opportunities have been few and the encouragement less for mural painting. An attempt to revive fresco-painting was made in our Houses of Parliament, and various scenes from our national history have been rendered with varying degrees of merit; but they have chiefly demonstrated the need of continuous practice in such work on the part of our painters and the absence of a true decorative instinct.

We have very little significant mural painting in this country. Clearly, from the various traces found beneath Puritan whitewash, the walls of our medieval churches were painted as often as in continental countries, but after the Reformation, artistic traditions and religious sentiments changed so much that there have been few opportunities and even less encouragement for mural painting. An effort to revive fresco painting was made in our Houses of Parliament, and different scenes from our national history have been depicted with varying degrees of success; however, they mainly highlight the need for our painters to practice this work continuously and the lack of a genuine decorative instinct.

It is to the honour of Manchester that her [227]Town Hall contains one of the most important and interesting pieces of mural painting by one of the most original of modern English artists—Ford Madox Brown—a work conceived in the true spirit of mural work, being a record of local [228]history, as well as a decoration, while distinctly modern in sentiment and showing strong dramatic feeling, as well as historical knowledge.

It’s a point of pride for Manchester that her [227]Town Hall houses one of the most significant and fascinating pieces of mural art by one of the most innovative modern English artists—Ford Madox Brown. This piece was created in the true spirit of mural work, serving as both a record of local [228]history and a decorative element, while being distinctly modern in its sentiment and exhibiting strong dramatic emotion, as well as a deep understanding of history.

The chapel on which Mr. F. J. Shields is engaged in London will probably be unique in its way as a complete piece of mural decoration by an English artist of singular individuality, sincerity, and power, as well as decorative ability.

The chapel that Mr. F. J. Shields is working on in London will likely be one-of-a-kind as a complete work of wall decoration by an English artist who has a unique style, genuine intention, and strong skill, along with impressive decorative talent.

But unfortunately opportunities for important mural decoration of this kind are very rare in England. The art is not popularized: we have no school of trained mural designers, and we have no public really interested. Our commercial system and system of house tenure are against it. Our only chance is in public buildings, which indeed have always been its best field. Yet we neglect, I think, a most important educational influence. The painted churches and public halls of the Middle Ages filled in a great measure the place of public libraries. A painted history, a portrait, a dramatic or romantic incident told in the vivid language of line, form, and colour, is stamped upon the memory never to be forgotten. It would be possible, I think, to impart a tolerably exact knowledge of the sequence of history, of the conditions of life at different epochs, of great men and their work, from a well-imagined series of mural paintings, without the aid of books; and in this direction, perhaps, our school walls would present an appropriate field.

But unfortunately, opportunities for significant mural decoration like this are very rare in England. The art isn't well-known: we don't have a school for trained mural designers, and there's no real public interest. Our commercial system and housing policies work against it. Our only real chance lies in public buildings, which have always been the best venue for this kind of art. Yet, I believe we’re missing a crucial educational opportunity. The painted churches and public halls of the Middle Ages largely took the place of public libraries. A painted history, a portrait, a dramatic or romantic moment expressed in the vibrant language of lines, forms, and colors sticks in the memory forever. I think it would be possible to convey a fairly accurate understanding of historical sequences, the conditions of life across different eras, significant figures and their contributions, through a well-conceived series of mural paintings, without needing books; and in this regard, perhaps our school walls would be a fitting location.

Modern opportunities of mural decoration are chiefly domestic. The country mansion, or the modest home of the suburban citizen, affords the principal field in our time for the exercise of the [229]taste or ingenuity of the wall-decorator. In this comparatively restricted field, taste is perhaps of more consequence than any other quality. A sense of appropriateness, a harmonizing faculty, a power of arrangement of simple materials—these are invaluable, for, more than any others, they go to the making of a livable interior.

Modern opportunities for mural decoration are mostly found in homes. The country mansion or the modest suburban house provides the main setting today for the creativity and skills of wall decorators. In this relatively limited area, having good taste is likely more important than any other quality. An understanding of what’s suitable, the ability to create harmony, and the knack for arranging simple materials—these are essential, as they contribute significantly to creating a comfortable living space.

Mural Spacing and Pattern Plans

Mural Spacing and Pattern Plans

On first thought it would almost seem as if the designer was less technically restricted in this direction of mural work than any other; yet he will soon feel that he cannot produce an artistic and thoughtful scheme without taking many things into consideration which really belong to the conditions or natural limitations of his work.

At first glance, it might seem like the designer has more freedom in creating murals than in other forms of artwork. However, they will quickly realize that to create an artistic and thoughtful design, they must consider various factors that are actually tied to the conditions and natural limitations of their work.

There is, firstly, the idea of the wall itself—part of the house-structure—a shelter and protection or boundary. It is no part of a designer's business to put anything upon the wall in the way of decoration which will induce anyone to forget that it is a wall—nothing to disturb the flatness and repose.

There is, first of all, the concept of the wall itself—part of the structure of the house—providing shelter, protection, or a boundary. It's not the designer's role to add any decorations to the wall that would make anyone forget that it is a wall—nothing to disrupt its flatness and calmness.

The four walls of a room inclose a space to dwell in, in comfort and security. The windows show us outward real life and nature. The walls should not compete with the windows. Nature must be translated into the terms of line and form and colour, and invention and fancy may be pleasantly suggestive in the harmonious metre and rhythm of pattern.

The four walls of a room create a space to live in comfortably and safely. The windows give us a view of real life and nature outside. The walls shouldn't compete with the windows. Nature needs to be transformed into lines, shapes, and colors, with creativity and imagination adding a nice touch to the balanced flow and rhythm of the design.

A wall surface extends horizontally and vertically, but the vertical extension seems to assert itself most to the eye.

A wall surface stretches both horizontally and vertically, but the vertical stretch tends to stand out the most to our eyes.

Any arrangement of lines of the trellis or diaper order logically covers a wall surface, and may be appropriately used as a basis for a wall pattern, [230]whether merely to mark the positions of a simple spray or formal sprig pattern, or as a ground-plan for a completely filled field of repeating ornament, whether painted, stencilled, or in the form of wall-paper or textile hanging.

Any arrangement of lines in a trellis or diaper pattern logically covers a wall surface and can be appropriately used as a foundation for a wall design, [230]whether to indicate the spots for a simple spray or formal sprig pattern, or as a base for a fully filled area of repeating decoration, whether it's painted, stenciled, or in the form of wallpaper or fabric hanging.

In the simple geometric net of squares or diamonds or circles, however, there is nothing that emphatically marks adaptability to a vertical position. Such plans in themselves are equally appropriate to the floor in the form of paving and parquet. The ogee plan, however, and its variant, the vertical serpentine or spiral plan, at once suggest vertical extension, the former perhaps by its leaf-like points arranging themselves scale-wise, and the latter by its suggestion of ascending movement.

In the basic geometric layout of squares, diamonds, or circles, there’s nothing that clearly indicates adaptability to a vertical position. These designs are just as suitable for flooring, like paving or parquet. However, the ogee design, and its variation, the vertical serpentine or spiral design, immediately suggest vertical growth—the former perhaps through its leaf-like points organized in a scaled manner, and the latter through its implication of upward movement.

It is noteworthy that in the course of the historic evolution of mural decoration, designs based upon these systems constantly recur. They are part of the pattern-designer's vocabulary of line, and among the principal, though simplest, terms by which he is able to express vertical extension.

It’s important to note that throughout the historical development of mural decoration, designs based on these systems keep reappearing. They are a part of the pattern designer's vocabulary of lines, serving as some of the main, yet simplest, ways for them to express vertical extension.

The question of scale in designing mural decoration of any sort is very important. This demands a certain power of realizing the effect of certain lines and masses if carried out, and the relation of one part to another as well as to the dimensions of the walls and the room itself. Here, as indeed throughout art, a reference to the human figure will give us our key, since after all decoration goes to form a background for humanity. With natural flowers and leaves it is always right to design for mural purposes on the same scale as nature.

The issue of scale in designing mural decoration of any kind is crucial. It requires the ability to envision the impact of specific lines and shapes once executed, as well as how each part relates to one another and to the sizes of the walls and the room itself. Here, as in all art, referring to the human figure will be our guide, since decoration ultimately serves as a backdrop for people. When using natural flowers and leaves, it's always best to design murals at the same scale as nature.

Diagram Showing the Principal Fundamental Plans or Systems of Line Governing Mural Spacing and Decorative Distribution.

Scale

Scale

Scale in design should be also considered in [232] relation to the general character of a building and its purpose, the use and lighting of a living room: its dimensions and proportions, and relation to other rooms. There is great range for individual taste and fancy.

Scale in design should also be considered in [232] relation to the overall character of a building and its purpose, as well as the use and lighting of a living room: its dimensions and proportions, and how it relates to other rooms. There’s a lot of room for personal taste and creativity.

The artist would naturally look to the capacity of the space which he had to decorate, and what it suggested to his mind. He might want to emphasize a long, low room by horizontal lines, or to accentuate a lofty one by verticals.

The artist would naturally consider the size of the space he had to decorate and what it inspired in him. He might want to highlight a long, low room with horizontal lines, or emphasize a tall room with vertical lines.

Diagram to Show (1) How the Apparent Depth of a Space Is Increased by the Use of Vertical Lines, and (2) How the Apparent Width Is Increased by the Use of Horizontal Lines.

By the judicious use of line and scale in design, the designer holds a certain power of transformation in his hands, not to speak of the transforming effect of colour of different keys and tones, the apparent contraction or expansion of surfaces by patterns of different character and scale.

By wisely using line and scale in design, the designer has a unique power to transform things, not to mention the changing effects of color in different shades and tones, and how patterns of various styles and sizes can make surfaces seem larger or smaller.

It would obviously not do to regard any wall merely as so much expanse of surface available for sketching unrelated groups and figures upon, as they might be jotted down in a sketch-book, and to offer it as decoration. In an interior thus treated, we should lose all sense of repose, dignity, and proportion.

It’s obviously not a good idea to see any wall just as a blank space for randomly drawing groups and figures, like you would in a sketchbook, and call it decoration. In an interior designed this way, we would lose any sense of calm, dignity, and proportion.

Use and custom, which fix and determine so many things in social life without written laws, have also prescribed certain divisions of the wall, which, in regard to the exigencies of life and habit and modern conditions generally, seem natural enough.

Use and custom, which shape and dictate many aspects of social life without formal laws, have also established specific divisions of the wall that, considering the needs of life, habits, and today's circumstances, appear quite natural.

The Skirting

The Skirting

The lower parts of the walls of most modern dwellings being generally occupied by furniture placed against them, and liable to be soiled or injured, it would be out of place to put important and elaborate ornament or figure designs extending [234] to the skirting. The wooden skirting, of about nine inches or a foot in depth, which is placed along the foot of the wall in our modern rooms, is the armour-plating to protect the plaster, which otherwise might be chipped and litter the floor. It is perhaps the last relic of the more substantial and extensive wood panelling and wainscotting which, up to the latter part of the last century, covered the lower walls of the more comfortable houses, and has been revived in our own day. The decorator may use panelling, or wainscotting, or a simple chair-rail above plain painting, wall-paper, dado, or stencilling, or a dado of matting, as methods of covering, and at the same time decorating, the lower walls of rooms.

The lower parts of the walls in most modern homes are usually taken up by furniture against them, making them prone to getting dirty or damaged, so it wouldn’t make sense to put important and intricate designs or decorations all the way down to the baseboard. The wooden baseboard, about nine inches to a foot deep, runs along the bottom of the wall in our modern rooms, serving as a protective barrier for the plaster, which might otherwise get chipped and clutter the floor. It's probably the last remnant of the more substantial and extensive wood paneling and wainscoting that covered the lower walls of cozier homes until the late part of the last century and has made a comeback today. Decorators can use paneling, wainscoting, or a simple chair rail above plain paint, wallpaper, dado, stenciling, or even a dado of matting as options for covering and decorating the lower walls of rooms.

The use of the dado of a darker colour and of wainscot is, no doubt, due to considerations of wear and tear, and so, like the origin of much ornamental art, may be traced to actual use and constructive necessity. When the wood-work of a room—the doors and window frames—is of the same colour and character as the dado, a certain agreeable unity is preserved, and it forms a useful plain framing to set off the patterned parts of the wall. This wainscot or dado framing with the wood-work should be as to colour arranged to suit the general scheme adopted. Where paint is used, white for the wood-work usually has the best effect.

The use of a darker dado and wainscoting is likely because of wear and tear, and much like the origins of many decorative arts, it can be traced back to practical use and construction needs. When the woodwork in a room—the doors and window frames—is the same color and style as the dado, it creates a pleasing unity and provides a simple frame to highlight the patterned areas of the wall. This wainscot or dado framing should be color-coordinated with the woodwork to match the overall design scheme. When paint is used, white for the woodwork usually looks the best.

Field of the Wall

Wall Field

The largest space of wall occurs above the chair-rail, or dado, and, according to modern habits and usage, portable property in the shape of framed pictures, etc., is usually placed here [236] along the eye-line, so that any decoration on this—the main field of the wall—is regarded as subsidiary to what is placed upon it; but, of course, pictures can be used as the central points of a decorative scheme. On the upper part of a wall, below the plaster cornice, the mural designer has the chance of putting a frieze, and a frieze usually gives the effect of additional height to a room, besides enriching the wall.

The biggest space on the wall is above the chair rail or dado, and, following modern trends, personal items like framed pictures are typically displayed here [236] at eye level, making any decoration on this main section of the wall seen as secondary to what’s hung on it; however, pictures can certainly serve as focal points in a decor scheme. In the upper section of the wall, just below the plaster cornice, the mural designer has the opportunity to add a frieze, which generally creates the illusion of extra height in a room and enhances the wall's appearance.

An effective treatment of a large room, and one which is more reposeful than cutting up the wall into these portions, as in dado, field, and frieze, is to carry up wood panelling to the frieze, and let this (the frieze) be the important decorative feature.

An effective way to treat a large room, and one that feels more calming than dividing the walls into sections like dado, field, and frieze, is to extend wood paneling up to the frieze, making it the main decorative element.

Supposing the room was twelve feet high, one could afford to have eight feet of panelling, and then a frieze of four feet deep. In this case one would look for an interesting painted frieze of figures—some legend or story to run along the four sides of the room, and in such a case it might be marked with considerable pictorial freedom.

If the room is twelve feet high, you could have eight feet of paneling and then a four-foot deep frieze. In that case, you’d want an eye-catching painted frieze of figures—some legend or story that runs along all four sides of the room, and in that scenario, it could be done with a lot of artistic freedom.

More formal figure design or ornamental work in coloured plaster-work, stucco, and gesso could also be appropriately used in such a position, as also on the ceiling.

More formal figure design or decorative work in colored plaster, stucco, and gesso could also be suitably used in such a position, as well as on the ceiling.

Now as regards choice of line and form in their relation to the decoration of such mural spaces. Taking the lower wall, dado, or panelling, one reason why panelling has so agreeable an effect is, I think, that the series of vertical and horizontal lines seem to express the proportions, while they emphasize the flatness and repose of the wall, and when used beneath a painted frieze they lead the eye upwards, forming a quiet framing of rectangular [237] lines below to the ornate and varied design of the frieze. Where we are limited to decorating a wall by means of plain painting, stencils, or wall-paper, this idea of reposeful constructive lines and forms on the lower wall should still dominate upon the field. Subject to our repeating plan we may be freer both in line and form, using free scrolls, branch-work, fruit, and flower masses at pleasure, because the space is more extended, and we shall feel the necessity in a repeating pattern of spreading adequately over it; but such designs, however fine in detail, should be constructed upon a more or less geometric base or plan. We are, as regards the main field of the wall, still unavoidably, though not disadvantageously, influenced by the tradition of the textile hanging or arras tapestry, no doubt; and certainly there is no more rich and comfortable lining for living rooms than tapestry, or, at the same time, more reposeful and decoratively satisfying. But, of course, where we can afford arras tapestry (such as the superb work of William Morris and his weavers), we ought not to allow anything to compete with it upon the same wall. It is sufficient in itself.

Now, regarding the choice of lines and shapes in relation to decorating mural spaces. Taking the lower wall, dado, or paneling, one reason paneling has such a pleasing effect is that the series of vertical and horizontal lines seem to express proportions while emphasizing the flatness and calm of the wall. When used beneath a painted frieze, they draw the eye upward, creating a quiet framing of rectangular [237] lines below the ornate and varied design of the frieze. When we are limited to decorating a wall using plain painting, stencils, or wallpaper, this idea of restful constructive lines and shapes on the lower wall should still dominate the space. Depending on our repeating design, we have more freedom in line and form, using free scrolls, branch work, fruit, and flower clusters as we wish, since the space is more extensive, and we’ll feel the need to spread adequately over it in a repeating pattern. However, such designs, no matter how beautiful in detail, should be based on a more or less geometric foundation or plan. As for the main area of the wall, we are still inevitably influenced, though not disadvantageously, by the tradition of textile hangings or tapestry. Certainly, there’s no richer and more comfortable lining for living rooms than tapestry, which is also quite calming and decoratively satisfying. But of course, where we can afford arras tapestry (like the exquisite work of William Morris and his weavers), we shouldn’t let anything compete with it on the same wall. It stands out on its own.

Arras Tapestry: Diagrams to Show the Principle of Working and Surface Effect: (1) Vertical Position of Warp as Worked in the Loom and Relief Effect of the Wefts; (2) Enlarged Section of Warp as Hung (Horizontal); (3) Single Threads of Warp and Weft; (4) Warp and Weft as in the Loom (Vertical).

Tapestry

Tapestry

Of what splendour of colour and wealth of decorative and symbolical invention tapestry was capable in the past may be seen in magnificent Burgundian specimens of the fifteenth century, now in the South Kensington Museum.

The stunning colors and rich decorative and symbolic creativity of tapestry in the past can be seen in the magnificent Burgundian examples from the fifteenth century, which are now in the South Kensington Museum.

Tapestry hangings of a repeating pattern and quiet colour could be used appropriately beneath painted upper walls, or a frieze, as no doubt frequently was the custom in great houses in the Middle Ages.

Tapestry hangings with a repeating pattern and subtle colors could be nicely placed under painted upper walls or a frieze, which was likely a common practice in large homes during the Middle Ages.

Appartimenti Borgia [238]

Borgia Apartments [238]

In the Appartimenti Borgia in the Vatican, for instance, which consists of lofty vaulted rooms with frescoes by Pinturicchio upon the upper walls between the spans of the vaulting, and upon the vaulting itself, we may see, about eleven feet from the floor, along the moulding, the hooks left for the tapestry hangings, which completed the decoration of the room. The lower walls are now largely occupied by book-shelves; but books themselves may form a pleasant background, as one may often observe in libraries, especially when the bindings are rich and good in tone: and here, too, we get our verticals and horizontals again.

In the Borgia Apartments in the Vatican, for example, there are high vaulted rooms with frescoes by Pinturicchio on the upper walls between the vaults and on the vaults themselves. About eleven feet up from the floor, we can see the hooks left for tapestry hangings that completed the room's decor. The lower walls are mostly filled with bookshelves, but books can provide a nice backdrop, as you often see in libraries, especially when the bindings are rich and visually appealing. Here, too, we find our verticals and horizontals again.

So long as the feeling for the repose and flatness of the wall surface is preserved, there are no special limitations in the choice of form. It becomes far more a matter of treatment of form and subject in perfectly appropriate mural design. There is one principle, however, which seems to hold good in the treatment of important figure subjects to occupy the main wall surfaces as panels: while pictorial realization of a kind may be carried quite far, it is desirable to avoid large masses of light sky, or to attempt much in the way of atmospheric effect. It is well to keep the horizon high, and, if sky is shown, to break it with architecture and trees.

As long as the sense of calm and flatness of the wall surface is maintained, there aren't any specific limitations on the choice of form. It becomes much more about the treatment of form and subject in perfectly fitting mural design. However, there is one principle that seems to apply when dealing with important figure subjects on the main wall surfaces as panels: while pictorial realization can go quite far, it's best to avoid large expanses of bright sky or trying too hard for an atmospheric effect. It's advisable to keep the horizon high, and if the sky is included, to interrupt it with architecture and trees.

Still more important is it to observe this in tapestry. It is very noticeable how tapestry design declined after the fifteenth century or early years of the sixteenth, when perspective and pictorial planes were introduced, and sky effects to emulate painting, and thus the peculiarly mural feeling was lost, with its peculiar beauty, richness, and repose.

It's even more important to notice this in tapestry. It's clear that tapestry design declined after the 15th century or the early 16th century, when perspective and pictorial planes were introduced, along with sky effects trying to mimic painting. As a result, the unique mural quality was lost, along with its distinct beauty, richness, and tranquility.

Figure of Laura, from the Burgundian Tapestries: The Triumphs of Petrarch (South Kensington Museum).

[240]In the translation into tapestry even of so tapestry-like a picture as that of Botticelli's "Primavera," it is noteworthy how Mr. Morris has felt the necessity of reducing the different planes, and the chiaroscuro of the painting, by more leafy and floral detail; making it, in short, more of a pattern than a picture.

[240]In the translation into tapestry of a painting as tapestry-like as Botticelli's "Primavera," it's interesting to see how Mr. Morris has recognized the need to simplify the different layers and the light and shadow of the artwork by adding more leafy and floral details; transforming it, in essence, into more of a pattern than a picture.

The Frieze

The Frieze

A frieze is susceptible of a much more open, lighter, and freer treatment than a field. A frieze is one of the mural decorator's principal means of giving lightness and relief to his wall. In purely floral and ornamental design the field of close pattern, formal diaper, or sprigs at regular intervals may be appropriately relieved by bolder lines and masses, and a more open treatment in the frieze. The frieze, too, affords a means of contrast in line to the line system of the field of the wall, its horizontal expression usefully opposing the verticals or diagonals of the wall pattern below. The frieze may be regarded as a horizontal border, and in border designs the principle of transposition of the relation of pattern to ground is a useful one to bear in mind, as leading always to an effective result. I mean, supposing our field shows a pattern mainly of light upon dark, the frieze might be on the reverse plan, a dark pattern on a light ground.

A frieze can be treated in a much more open, lighter, and freer way than a field. It’s one of the main tools for mural decorators to add lightness and depth to a wall. In purely floral and decorative designs, a tightly patterned field with formal diaper designs or evenly spaced sprigs can be enhanced by bolder lines and more open designs in the frieze. The frieze also provides a contrasting line to the line system of the wall's field, with its horizontal layout effectively opposing the vertical or diagonal patterns below. The frieze can be seen as a horizontal border, and when creating border designs, it’s helpful to remember the principle of changing the relationship between the pattern and the background, as this leads to effective results. For instance, if the field has a pattern that’s mostly light on dark, the frieze might follow the opposite scheme, featuring a dark pattern on a light background.

And whereas, as I have said, one would exclude wide light spaces from our mural field, in the frieze one might effectively show a light sky ground throughout, and arrange a figure or floral design upon that.

And as I mentioned, while we would keep large light areas out of our mural space, in the frieze we could effectively display a light sky background throughout, and place a figure or floral design on top of that.

The principle governing the treatment of main and lower wall spaces or fields, which teaches the designer to preserve the repose of the surface, may [241]be said to rule also in all textile design, and textile design has, as we have seen in the form of tapestry, and hangings of all kinds, a very close association with mural decoration.

The principle that guides the treatment of main and lower wall spaces or fields, which instructs the designer to maintain a calmness in the surface, can also be applied to all textile design. As we've observed with tapestry and various types of hangings, textile design is closely linked to mural decoration.

Textile Design

Fabric Design

Any textile may be considered, from the designer's point of view, as presenting so much surface [242]for pattern, whether that surface is hung upon a wall, or curtains a door or a window, or is spread in the form of carpets or rugs upon floors, or over the cushions of furniture, or adapts itself to the variety of curve surface and movement of the human form in dress materials and costume. Textile beauty is beauty of material and surface, and unless the pattern or design upon it or woven with it enhances that beauty of material and surface, and becomes a part of the expression of that material and surface, it is better without pattern.

Any textile can be seen, from a designer's perspective, as offering a certain amount of surface [242] for pattern, whether that surface is on a wall, as curtains for a door or window, laid out as carpets or rugs on floors, or covering furniture cushions. It also adapts to the curves and movement of the human body in clothing and costumes. The beauty of textiles lies in the material and surface, and unless the pattern or design on it or woven into it enhances that beauty, making it part of the material and surface's expression, it's better off without a pattern.

To place informal shaded flowers and leaves upon a carpet, for instance, where the warp is very emphatic, and the process of weaving necessitates a stepped or rectangularly broken outline, is to mistake appropriate decorative effect, capacity of material, and position in regard to the eye. We cannot get away, in a carpet, from the idea of a flat field starred with more or less formal flowers, and colour arrangements which owe their richness and beauty, not to the relief of shading, but to the heraldic principle of relieving one tint or colour upon another. The rich inlay of colour which a Persian or any Eastern carpet presents is owing to its being designed upon this principle; and in Persian work that peculiarly rich effect of colour, apart from fine material, is owing to the principle of the use of outlines of different colours defining and relieving the different forms in the pattern upon different grounds. The rectangular influence arising from the technical conditions of the work gives a definite textile character to the design [243] which is very agreeable; besides, as a question of line and form, in a carpet or rug which is rectangular [244] in shape and laid usually upon rectangular floors, the squareness of form harmonizes with the conditions and surroundings of the work in use. The Persian designer, indeed, appears to be so impressed with this feeling, that he uses a succession of borders around the central field of his carpet or rug, still further emphasizing the rectangularity; while he avoids the too rigid effect of a series of straight lines which the crossing of the threads of the weft at right angles to the warp might cause, by changing the widths of his subsidiary borders and breaking them with a constant variety of small patterns, and inserting narrow white lines between the black lines of the border.

To place informal shaded flowers and leaves on a carpet, for example, where the warp is very prominent, and the weaving process requires a stepped or rectangularly broken outline, is to misunderstand the appropriate decorative effect, the ability of the material, and its visual positioning. In a carpet, we can't escape the idea of a flat field adorned with more or less formal flowers, with color arrangements that gain their richness and beauty, not from shading relief, but from the principle of contrasting one shade or color against another. The vibrant mix of colors in a Persian or any Eastern carpet is due to this design principle; in Persian work, that uniquely rich color effect, aside from the fine materials, comes from using different colored outlines to define and contrast the various forms in the pattern against different backgrounds. The rectangular influence stemming from the technical aspects of the work gives a distinct textile character to the design, which is very pleasing; furthermore, regarding line and form, a carpet or rug that is rectangular in shape and typically placed on rectangular floors blends well with the conditions and environment where it is used. The Persian designer seems so aware of this that he incorporates a series of borders around the central field of his carpet or rug, further highlighting the rectangular aspect; he also prevents the overly rigid effect of a series of straight lines that could result from the weft threads crossing the warp at right angles by varying the widths of his secondary borders, mixing them with a constant variety of small patterns, and inserting narrow white lines between the black lines of the border.

Sketch to Illustrate Treatment of Borders in a Persian Rug.

Effect of Texture on Colour

Impact of Texture on Color

In tapestry the effect of the emphatic warp worked vertically in the loom, but hung horizontally, has a very important influence upon the effect. If we took a piece of paper coloured with a flat even tint, and folded it in ridges, the quality of the tint would be at once changed, and so in tapestry the passing of the wool of the wefts, which form the pattern or picture, over the strong lines of the warp—which are broad enough to take the outlines of the cartoon upon them—produces that soft and varied play of colour—really colour in light and shade—which, over and above the actual dyes and artistic selection of tints, gives the peculiar charm and effect in tapestry.

In tapestry, the impact of the bold warp, which is set vertically in the loom but hangs horizontally, significantly affects the overall appearance. If we take a piece of paper that’s colored with a flat, even shade and then fold it into ridges, the nature of that color immediately changes. Similarly, in tapestry, the way the wool of the wefts—forming the design or image—passes over the strong warp lines, which are wide enough to capture the outlines of the cartoon, creates that soft and varied interplay of colors—essentially color in light and shadow. This effect, along with the actual dyes and artistic choices in color selection, contributes to the unique charm and appeal of tapestry.

This sheen and variety are more or less evident in all textiles, and a good textile pattern only adds to the variety and richness of the surface. [245] The different thicknesses or planes of surface and the difference of their texture caused by the different wefts being brought to the surface of the [246] cloth or silk (from the simplest contrast of line presented by the simplest arrangements of warp and weft, to the complexities of many-coloured silk stuffs and brocade) alone give a value to the surface pattern.

This shine and variety are pretty clear in all textiles, and a good textile pattern just enhances the variety and richness of the surface. [245] The different thicknesses or planes of the surface and the differences in their texture, caused by the various wefts being brought to the surface of the [246] fabric or silk (ranging from the simplest contrast of line seen in basic warp and weft arrangements to the complex designs of multi-colored silk fabrics and brocade) contribute to the value of the surface pattern.

In cut velvet the same principle of contrast of surface is emphasized still further, the rich deep nap of the less raised parts contrasting pleasantly with the mat effect of the ground.

In cut velvet, the same principle of surface contrast is highlighted even more, with the rich, deep texture of the lower raised areas contrasting nicely with the matte finish of the background.

In designs for such material one should aim at boldly blocked-out patterns in silhouette—bold leaf and fruit forms say—designed on the principle of the stencil.

In designs for this material, you should focus on strong, outlined patterns in silhouette—like bold leaf and fruit shapes—created based on the stencil principle.

Prints

Prints

With prints the range is of course freer, the material itself suggesting something lighter and more temporary. It seems highly probable that printed cotton was originally a substitute for embroidered linen or more sumptuous materials. There are certainly instances of very similar patterns in Indian and Persian work in silk embroidery, and also in printed cotton. In some cases the print is partly embroidered, which seems to mark a transitional stage, and recalls the lingering use of illumination in the early days of the printing press, in another department of art.

With prints, the possibilities are definitely broader, as the material itself implies something lighter and more temporary. It seems likely that printed cotton was initially used as a substitute for embroidered linen or more luxurious fabrics. There are definitely examples of very similar patterns in Indian and Persian silk embroidery, as well as in printed cotton. In some cases, the print is partially embroidered, which appears to represent a transitional phase and reminds us of the continued use of illumination in the early days of the printing press in another area of art.

Anything that will repeat as a pattern in what can be produced by line, dot, and tints of colour, and engraved upon wood-blocks or copper rollers, can be printed of course; and, as is generally the case with an art which has no very obvious technical [247] limitations, it is liable to be caught by the imitative spirit, and cheap and rapid production and demand for novelties (so-called) generally end [248] in loss of taste and deterioration of quality, especially in design. From the artistic point of view we can only correct this by bearing in mind similar considerations to those which hold good as general principles and guides in designing for textiles generally, having regard to the object, purpose, and position—to the ultimate use of the material, and differentiating our designs, as in the case of other textile design accordingly.

Anything that can be repeatedly created through lines, dots, and colors, and engraved on wood blocks or copper rollers, can obviously be printed. However, like many art forms without clear technical restrictions, it can easily fall victim to imitation. This leads to cheap and quick production, and an ongoing demand for so-called novelties, which typically results in a decline in taste and quality, especially in design. To address this from an artistic standpoint, we need to keep in mind principles similar to those that guide textile design as a whole, considering the object, purpose, and context—taking into account the material's ultimate use, and adjusting our designs accordingly, just like in other textile design.

Thus in the matter of plan and direction of line and character of form we shall at once find natural distinctions and divisions, as our design is for hanging, or spreading horizontally, or wearing; and these different functions will also determine scale and choice and treatment of form and colour.

So, when it comes to planning and directing the style and shape, we'll immediately notice natural differences and categories, depending on whether our design is for hanging, laying flat, or wearing. These different purposes will also influence the size, selection, and handling of form and color.

There is no doubt that with patterns printed more range may be allowed than with patterns to be woven, where line and form are both controlled by the necessities of being reproduced by so many points to the inch. At the same time the object of all design and pattern work being the greatest beauty compatible with the material and conditions, one should seek, not such effects as merely test the capacity or ingenuity of the machine, but rather such as appear to be most decoratively appropriate and effective.

There’s no doubt that printed patterns can offer more variety than woven patterns, where line and shape are limited by the requirements of being created with a certain number of threads per inch. At the same time, since the goal of all design and pattern work is to achieve the greatest beauty possible while respecting the material and conditions, one should aim for effects that are not just a test of the machine's capability or creativity, but rather those that seem most decoratively suitable and effective.

There appears to be no mechanical reason why cotton should not be printed all over with landscapes and graphic sketches, and people clothe themselves with them as with Christmas numbers, or turn their couches, chairs, and curtains into scrap albums, but there is every reason on the score of taste why these things should not be done.

There doesn't seem to be any mechanical reason why cotton can't be printed with landscapes and graphic designs, and people wear them like holiday specials or transform their couches, chairs, and curtains into scrapbooks, but there are plenty of reasons based on taste why this shouldn't happen.

(1) Contrasting Surfaces of Warp and Weft in Woven Silk Hanging; (2) Stencil Principle.

[250]With any textile, as I have said, we are as designers dealing with surface. It is surface ornament that is wanted also in printed cotton. Now good line and form and pure tints have the best effect, because they do not break the surface into holes, and give a ragged or tumbled appearance, which accidental bunches of darkly-shaded flowers in high relief undoubtedly do. If small rich detail and variety are wanted, we should seek it in the inventive spirit of the Persian and Indian, and break our solid colours with mordants or arabesques in colour of delicate subsidiary pattern instead of using coarse planes of light and shadow, or showing up ragged and unrelated forms upon violent grounds.

[250]With any fabric, as I mentioned, we as designers are focused on the surface. It's surface decoration that we also want in printed cotton. Clean lines, good shapes, and solid colors create the best effect because they keep the surface intact and avoid a messy or chaotic look, which can result from random clusters of dark flowers in high relief. If we want intricate details and variety, we should draw inspiration from Persian and Indian designs and add interest to our solid colors with delicate patterns or motifs, rather than relying on harsh contrasts of light and shadow or showcasing jagged and unrelated shapes against bold backgrounds.

The true idea of a print pattern is of something gay and fanciful: bright and fresh in colour, and clear in line and form: a certain quaintness is allowable, and in purely floral designs there is room for a considerable degree of what might be called naturalism, so far as good line-drawing and understanding of flower form goes, emphasis of colour being sought by means of planes of colour, rather than by planes of shadow.

The real concept of a print pattern is something cheerful and imaginative: bright and fresh in color, and clear in shape and design. A certain charm is acceptable, and in purely floral designs, there's room for a significant level of what could be considered naturalism, to the extent that it shows good line drawing and understanding of flower shapes, focusing on color through planes of color instead of planes of shadow.

I had intended to touch upon other provinces of design, but I have taken up so much space with those I have been discussing already that I can only now briefly allude to these.

I wanted to talk about other areas of design, but I've already used so much space discussing the ones I have that I can only briefly mention the others now.

Wall-Paper

Wallpaper

Of wall-paper, which may be regarded in the light of more or less of a substitute for mural painting, and also textile wall-hangings, much the same general principles and many of the same remarks apply as have been already used in regard to mural decoration. The designer has [252] much freedom as to motive, and his ingenuity is only bounded by or concentrated in a square of twenty-one inches. If he has succeeded in making an agreeable pattern which will repeat not too obviously over an indefinite space, to form a not obtrusive background, and which can be printed and sold to the ordinary citizen, he is supposed to have satisfied the conditions.

When it comes to wall paper, which can be seen as a kind of substitute for mural painting, and also to textile wall hangings, similar basic principles and many of the same observations apply as those already mentioned about mural decoration. The designer has a lot of freedom when it comes to themes, and their creativity is only limited to a square of twenty-one inches. If they manage to create a pleasing pattern that can repeat subtly over a large area, forming a background that's not intrusive, and can be printed and sold to the average person, they are considered to have met the requirements.

But he may be induced to go further and attempt the design of a complete decoration as far as dado, field, frieze, and ceiling go; and this would involve all the thought necessary to the mural painter, narrowed down to the exigencies of mechanical repeat.

But he might be encouraged to take it a step further and try to create a complete decoration covering the dado, field, frieze, and ceiling; and this would require all the thought needed by a mural painter, focused on the demands of mechanical repetition.

Allied to the wall is the window, and in glazing and the art of the glass-painter we have another very distinct and beautiful sphere of line design. In plain leading the same law of covering vertical surface holds good as to selection of plan and system of line: almost any simple geometric net is appropriate, if not too complex or small in form to hold glass or to permit lead to follow its lines. Leaded panels of roundels (or "bull's eyes") of plain glass have a good effect in casements where a sparkle of light rather than outward view is sought for.

Attached to the wall is the window, and in the glazing and the skills of the glass artist, we find another distinct and beautiful area of line design. With basic leading, the same principle of covering vertical surfaces applies to the choice of layout and line system: almost any simple geometric pattern works well, as long as it isn't too complex or small for the glass or to allow the lead to trace its lines. Leaded panels of roundels (or "bull's eyes") made of plain glass look great in windows where the aim is to catch a sparkle of light rather than provide an outside view.

Stained Glass

Stained Glass

When we come to designing for stained glass we should still bear in mind the fundamental net of lead lines which forms the basis of our pattern, or glass picture, as it were: and the designer's object should be to make it good as an arrangement of line independently of the colour, while practical to the glazier.

When designing stained glass, we should still keep in mind the essential network of lead lines that forms the foundation of our pattern, or glass image, if you will. The designer's goal should be to create a pleasing arrangement of lines that stands on its own, regardless of color, while also being practical for the glazier.

(1) Stained Glass Treatment: Inclosure of Form and Colour by Lead Lines; (2) Sections.

Although lead is very pliable, too much must [254] not be expected of it in the way of small depressions and angles: the boundary lines of the figures, which should be the boldest of all, should be kept as simple as possible, not only on this account, but because complex outlines cannot well be cut in glass. A head, for instance, is inclosed in sweeping line, and the profile defined within the lead line by means of painting. A hand would be defined on the same principle. Each different colour demands a different inclosure of lead, although in the choice of glass much variation of tint can be obtained, as in the case of pot metal running from thin to thick glass, which intensifies the colour, and many kinds of what is called flashed. Yet to the designer, from the point of view of line, glass design is a kind of translucent mosaic, in which the primal technical necessity of the leading which holds the glory of the coloured light together, really enhances its splendour, and in affording opportunities for decoration and expressive linear composition imparts to the whole work its particular character and beauty.

Although lead is very flexible, we shouldn’t expect too much of it in terms of creating small dips and angles. The outlines of the figures, which should be the most prominent, need to remain as simple as possible, not only for this reason but also because complex shapes are difficult to cut in glass. For example, a head is enclosed with smooth lines, and the profile is defined within the lead line through painting. A hand would be defined in the same way. Each different color requires a different lead enclosure, although you can achieve a lot of color variations with different types of glass, like pot metal that ranges from thin to thick glass, which deepens the color, and many types of what's called flashed glass. However, for the designer, glass design is like a form of translucent mosaic, where the essential technical necessity of the leading that holds the colored light together actually enhances its brilliance. Additionally, it creates opportunities for decoration and expressive line composition, giving the whole work its unique character and beauty.

This after all is the principle to cling to in all designing, to adapt our designs to the particular distinctive character and beauty of the material for which they are destined, to endeavour to think them out in those materials, and not only on paper. Whatever the work may be—carving, inlays, modelling, mosaic, textiles—through the whole range of surface decoration, we should think out our designs, not only in relation to the limitations of their material, but also in their relation to each other, to their effect in actual use, and even to their possible use in association [255]together, which, of course, is of paramount importance in designing a complete room or any comprehensive piece of decoration.

This is the principle to hold onto in all design: to adapt our designs to the unique character and beauty of the material they are meant for, and to think them through in those materials, not just on paper. No matter the work—carving, inlays, modeling, mosaic, textiles—throughout all forms of surface decoration, we should develop our designs considering not just the limitations of the material, but also how they relate to one another, their effectiveness in actual use, and their potential to work together, which is crucial when designing a fully realized room or any large-scale decoration. [255]

And when we leave plane surfaces and seek to invent appropriate, that is to say, expressive ornament allied to concave and convex surfaces, to the varied forms of pottery for instance, metal-work, and glass vessels, furniture, and accessories of all kinds, we shall find the same laws and principles hold good which should guide us in all design—to adapt design to the characteristics and conditions of the material, to its structural capacity, its use and purpose, as well as to use or invention in line, both as a controlling plan or base of ornament, as well as a means of the association and expression of form.

And when we move beyond flat surfaces and try to create suitable, or in other words, expressive decoration for curved and shaped surfaces, like different types of pottery, metalwork, glassware, furniture, and all sorts of accessories, we’ll discover that the same rules and principles apply that should guide us in all design: adapting the design to the qualities and conditions of the material, considering its structural abilities, its intended use and function, as well as applying design in line, both as a foundational plan or basis for decoration, and as a way to connect and express form.


CHAPTER X

Of the Expression and Relief of Line and Form by Colour—Effect of same Colour upon different Grounds—Radiation of Colour—White Outline to clear Colours—Quality of Tints relieved upon other Tints—Complementaries—Harmony—The Colour Sense—Colour Proportions—Importance of Pure Tints—Tones and Planes—The Tone of Time—Pattern and Picture—A Pattern not necessarily a Picture, but a Picture in principle a Pattern—Chiaroscuro—Examples of Pattern-work and Picture-work—Picture-patterns and Pattern-pictures.

Of the Expression and Relief of Line and Form by Color—Effect of the same Color on different Backgrounds—Radiation of Color—White Outline to brighten Colors—Quality of Tints contrasted with other Tints—Complementaries—Harmony—The Color Sense—Color Proportions—Importance of Pure Tints—Tones and Planes—The Tone of Time—Pattern and Picture—A Pattern isn’t necessarily a Picture, but a Picture is basically a Pattern—Chiaroscuro—Examples of Pattern-work and Picture-work—Picture-patterns and Pattern-pictures.

Perhaps the most striking means of the expression of relief of line and form, certainly the most attractive, is by colour. By colour we obtain the most complete and beautiful means of expression in art.

Maybe the most impressive way to express relief of line and form, definitely the most appealing, is through color. With color, we achieve the most complete and beautiful means of expression in art.

Relief of Line and Form by Colour

Relief of Line and Form through Color

Our earliest ideas of form are probably derived through the different colours of objects around us, by which they are thrown into relief upon the background, or against other objects; and, as I mentioned in the first chapter, we reach outline by observing the edges of different masses relieved as dark or light upon light or dark grounds, so now, in my last, we come again to the consideration of the definition of line and form by colour, and their relief and expression upon different planes or fields of colour.

Our earliest perceptions of shape likely come from the various colors of objects around us, which makes them stand out against the background or alongside other objects. As I discussed in the first chapter, we identify outlines by noticing the edges of different shapes that contrast as dark or light on either light or dark backgrounds. Now, in this final chapter, we return to discussing how color helps define lines and shapes, and how they stand out and convey meaning on different color planes or fields.

There is first the colour of the object itself—the local colour—and then the colour of the ground [258] upon which it is relieved, both of which in their action and reaction upon each other will greatly affect the value of the local colour and the degree of relief of the form upon it.

There’s the actual color of the object itself—the local color—and then the color of the background [258] that it stands out against. Both of these colors interact with each other and will significantly influence the intensity of the local color and how much the shape stands out from it.

One of the best and simplest ways to ascertain the real value of a colour and its effect upon different grounds or fields is to take a flower—say a red poppy, and place it against a white paper ground, blocking in the local colour as relieved upon white, as near as may be to its full strength, with a brush, and defining the form as we go along. Then try the same flower upon grounds of different tints—green, blue, yellow—and it will be at once perceived what a different value and expression the same form in the same colour has upon different tinted grounds. A scarlet poppy would appear clearest and darkest upon white; it would show a tendency upon a blue ground to blend or blur at its edges, and also on yellow and green to a less extent.

One of the easiest and most effective ways to determine the true value of a color and how it looks on different backgrounds is to take a flower—like a red poppy—and place it against a white paper background. Paint the local color as it appears against white, as close to its full strength as possible, using a brush, while defining the shape as you go. Then, try the same flower against backgrounds of different colors—green, blue, yellow—and you'll quickly see how the same shape in the same color has a different value and expression on different colored backgrounds. A scarlet poppy would look brightest and darkest against white; it would start to blend or blur at its edges on a blue background, and somewhat on yellow and green as well.

Sketch to Show Effect of the Same Colour and Form upon Different Coloured Grounds.

It is this tendency to lose the edges of forms owing to the radiation of colours, and to mingle with the colour of the background, which makes a strong outline so constantly a necessity in decorative work. One may use a black on a white, a brown, or a gold outline (as in cloisonné), the nature of the outline being generally determined by the nature of the work. In stained glass the outline must be black, and this black is of the greatest value in enhancing by opposition the brilliance of the colours of the glass it incloses, stopping out the light around it as it does in solid lead when placed in the window.

It’s this tendency to lose the clear shapes due to the spreading of colors and to blend into the background that makes a strong outline essential in decorative work. You can use a black outline on white, brown, or a gold outline (like in cloisonné), with the type of outline usually determined by the work itself. In stained glass, the outline must be black, and this black really enhances the brightness of the colors in the glass by contrasting with it, blocking out the light around it just like solid lead does when placed in a window.

(1) Principle of the Effect of the Blending or Blurring of Colours at Their Edges; (2) Use of Black and White Outline to Clear the Edges of Coloured Forms upon Different Coloured Grounds.

Clearing Coloured Forms

Clearing Color Forms

A white outline produced by a resist or a mordant [260] in a printed textile, where the colours used are full and rich, often has a good effect, lightening the effect while giving point and definition to certain leading forms. Instances of the use of white outlines may be found in Eastern carpets, where the main colours, being dark blue and yellows on rich red, are relieved in parts by a dull white outline. Also in Persian carpets of the sixteenth or seventeenth century, the scrollwork in red is often relieved by an ivory white outline on blue.

A white outline created by a resist or a mordant [260] in a printed textile, where the colors used are vibrant and rich, often has a great effect, lightening the overall appearance while adding emphasis and definition to certain key shapes. Examples of white outlines can be seen in Eastern carpets, where the main colors, typically dark blue and yellows on deep red, are complemented in areas by a dull white outline. Similarly, in Persian carpets from the sixteenth or seventeenth century, the red scrollwork is frequently highlighted by an ivory white outline against blue.

It is always a good practice in blocking in flowers, either from nature or as parts of a design, to leave a white outline at the junctions—that is to say, where one petal overlaps another, or where there is a joint in the stem, or a fold in the leaf—and to show the ribbings, markings, and divisions of flower and leaf.

It's always a good idea when blocking in flowers, whether from nature or as part of a design, to leave a white outline at the intersections—specifically, where one petal overlaps another, or where there's a joint in the stem, or a fold in the leaf—and to highlight the ribbings, markings, and divisions of the flower and leaf.

By judiciously changing the quality of our tints it is possible to make different colours in a pattern tell clearly. To relieve red upon blue, for instance, one would use an orange red upon greenish blue, or scarlet upon a gray blue—the general principle being apparently a kind of compensating balance between colours, so that in taking from one you give to another.

By carefully adjusting the quality of our colors, we can make different shades in a pattern stand out distinctly. To make red pop against blue, for example, you could use an orange-red on a greenish-blue background, or scarlet on a gray-blue one—the general idea being a sort of balancing act between colors, where taking away from one color adds to another.

A full red and blue used together, as we have seen, would show a tendency to purple, unless separated by outlines; so that if the blue was full and rich, the red would have to approach brown or russet; or if the red was a full one—a crimson red—the blue would have to approach green.

A full red and blue used together, as we've seen, would lean towards purple unless kept apart by outlines; so if the blue was vibrant and rich, the red would need to get closer to brown or russet; or if the red was a bright crimson, the blue would need to get closer to green.

Harmony

Balance

This may be because of the necessary complements in colours, which we see in nature, and [261]which prepossess the eye, and make it demand these modifications to satisfy the sense of harmony.

This might be due to the essential color complements that we observe in nature, and [261]that capture our attention, prompting us to seek these changes to achieve a sense of harmony.

When daylight struggles with candle- or lamp-light, one may notice that upon the white cloth of a dinner-table the light is blue and the shadows yellow or orange—the orange deepening as with the fading daylight the blue grows deeper, until the colour of the light and the shadow change places. The same principle may be noticed in firelight, but the redder the flame the greener will be the shadows.

When daylight clashes with candle or lamp light, you might notice that on the white tablecloth of a dinner table the light appears blue and the shadows are yellow or orange—the orange becoming more intense as the fading daylight makes the blue darker, until the colors of the light and the shadow switch places. You can see the same thing with firelight, but the redder the flame, the greener the shadows will be.

Harmony in colour may be said to consist—apart from the general acknowledgment of the law of complementaries, in giving quality to the raw pigments by gradation, by a certain admixture or infusion of other colours.

Harmony in color can be described—besides the general agreement on the law of complementary colors—as enhancing the basic pigments through gradation and by mixing in other colors.

To begin with the negatives—white and black—white may be creamy or silvery; black may be of a greenish or a bluish or brownish tone; then the primaries—red, blue, yellow, or red, green, violet—red may range from crimson to orange and russet; yellow may approach green or gold; green may be first cousin to blue; blue may be turquoise on the one hand, and touch purple upon the other; and so on through infinite variations of half tints and tones.

To start with the negatives—white and black—white can be creamy or silvery; black can have a greenish, bluish, or brownish hue; then there are the primary colors—red, blue, yellow, or red, green, violet—red can vary from crimson to orange and russet; yellow can lean towards green or gold; green can be closely related to blue; blue can be turquoise on one side and touch purple on the other; and so forth through countless variations of shades and tones.

No doubt it is an easier matter to harmonize half tints than full bright colours, which may account for the prevalence of the former in decorative work. Nature's pattern-book, too, is full of half tones and mixed tints.

There’s no question that it’s easier to blend softer shades than bright colors, which might explain why the former are more common in decorative work. Nature’s guide is also filled with soft tones and blended hues.

The Colour Sense

The Color Sense

We may not all see colour precisely in the same way, and the same colour may appear to be of a different tint to different eyes; and it seems [262]certain that climate and surroundings affect the colour sense: light and colour will stimulate the delight in colour; while, where grayness and dullness characterize the surroundings of life, the colour sense will grow weak, or, if it is manifested at all, it will show a tendency to grayness and heaviness of tint.

We might not all perceive color exactly the same way, and the same color can look like a different shade to different people; it also seems clear that climate and environment influence our sense of color. Bright light and vivid colors can enhance our appreciation for color, whereas in settings dominated by grayness and dullness, our sense of color may become weaker or, if it appears at all, it may lean towards grayness and heaviness in shade.

The art of the different peoples of the world illustrates this, and, as we may see by turning from east to west, or from north to south, or even from winter to summer, in the main the love of colour follows the sun, like the rainbow.

The art from various cultures around the world shows this, and if we look from east to west, or from north to south, or even from winter to summer, we can see that, for the most part, the love of color follows the sun, just like a rainbow.

We can all do something to cultivate our sense of colour, however, and there is no better way than studying the harmonies and varieties of nature. Even the town-dweller is not altogether deprived of the sight of the sky, which constantly unfolds the most beautiful compositions both of form and colour.

We can all do something to enhance our sense of color, and there’s no better way than observing the harmonies and varieties in nature. Even those who live in the city aren’t completely missing out on the beauty of the sky, which consistently presents the most stunning combinations of shape and color.

As to the choice of colours in decorative design, so far as that is not narrowed by the particular conditions of the work, we must be guided by much the same considerations as would serve us in designing generally, and must, of course, think of appropriateness to position and purpose. Much depends, too, upon proportions of colour, and a beautiful and harmonious effect may be produced in a room by keeping the colour in a particular key, or even delicately varying the designs and tints of one or two colours. The same might be said in arranging a scheme of colouring for any particular piece of design—say, a painted panel or a textile pattern; although such things must ultimately be governed by their relation to other [263]parts in any general scheme—circumstances necessitate their being often designed apart. Still, if the colour of a pattern has been carefully thought out, or rather harmoniously felt, as a real organic thing, it is sure to fit into its place when its time comes.

When it comes to choosing colors in decorative design, unless limited by the specific needs of the project, we should follow much the same principles as we would in general design. It's essential to consider what’s appropriate for the setting and purpose. The balance of colors is also crucial; a beautiful and harmonious look can be achieved in a room by sticking to a specific color palette or even subtly varying the designs and shades of one or two colors. The same applies when creating a color scheme for something like a painted panel or a textile pattern. However, these elements need to relate to other parts of the overall design scheme, and often they are designed separately. Still, if the color of a pattern is thoughtfully and organically considered, it will undoubtedly find its place when the time is right.

In arranging our design of colour we can have no better guide, as to proportions and quality, than nature, and should do well, as a matter of practice, to take a flower, or the plumage of a bird, or the colours of a landscape, and adapt them to some particular pattern or scheme of decoration, following the relative degrees of tint and their quantities as nearly as possible. To do this successfully requires some invention and taste; but successful, or unsuccessful, one could hardly fail to learn something positive and valuable about colour, if the attempt was conscientiously made; and fresher motives and sweeter colour would be more likely to result from such study.

When planning our color design, we can't find a better reference for proportions and quality than nature. It's a good idea to take a flower, the feathers of a bird, or the colors of a landscape and adapt them to a specific pattern or decoration scheme, closely following the shades and their amounts. Successfully doing this requires some creativity and taste; however, whether it turns out well or not, you'd definitely learn something useful and valuable about color if you approach it seriously. Plus, you'll likely discover fresher ideas and more appealing colors through this kind of study.

Importance of Pure Tints

Significance of Pure Tints

I think it is a very important thing in all decorative work to keep one's colours pure in quality, and to avoid muddy or heavy tints. Brown is an especially difficult colour to use, because of its generally heavy effect as a pigment, and the difficulty of harmonizing it with other colours except as an outline; and even here it makes all the difference whether it is a cool or a hot shade. A hot brown is most destructive of harmony in colours. It is safe, as a rule, to make it lean to green, or bronze, or gold.

I believe it's really important in all decorative work to keep your colors pure in quality and to stay away from muddy or dark shades. Brown is especially tricky to work with because it tends to have a heavy effect as a pigment, and it’s hard to blend it with other colors unless it’s used as an outline; and even then, it matters a lot if it’s a cool or warm shade. A warm brown can really throw off the harmony of colors. Generally, it's safer to lean towards green, bronze, or gold with it.

As a general rule it is well to work either in a range of cool tints—a cool key of colour, or the [264]reverse—a warm and rich one. Few cool harmonies can be better than ultramarine and turquoise on greenish white, of which the Persians and Indians are so fond in tile-work. They are delightful to the eye, while peculiarly adapted to the work, owing their quality to the oxide of copper, which the firing brings out so well.

As a general rule, it's a good idea to work either with a range of cool colors—a cool color scheme—or the opposite—a warm and rich one. Few cool color combinations are better than ultramarine and turquoise on a greenish-white background, which the Persians and Indians love in tile work. They are pleasing to the eye and particularly suited for the work, thanks to the quality from the copper oxide that the firing enhances so well.

Blues and greens and grays, relieved with white and yellow and orange: or, reds and yellows, relieved with white and opposed by blacks, generally answer: or a range of reds together, or range of blues, or of yellows, with black and white for contrast and accent. Blue and white, too, can be modified in quality; black may be greenish in tone, or brownish, bluish, or purplish according to the harmony aimed at. White may be pure or ivory-toned, cream-coloured or influenced by other colours, and should vary in degree according to the strength of the harmony. This brings us to the question of tone.

Blues, greens, and grays, complemented by white, yellow, and orange; or reds and yellows, paired with white and contrasted by blacks, usually work well together. You can have a range of reds, a range of blues, or yellows, with black and white serving as contrast and highlights. Blue and white can also be adjusted in quality; black can take on a greenish, brownish, bluish, or purplish tint depending on the harmony you’re aiming for. White can be pure or have an ivory tone, cream color, or be influenced by other colors, and it should vary in intensity based on the strength of the harmony. This leads us to the topic of tone.

Tones and Planes

Tones and Planes

Now the ornamentist, the designer of patterns, relies for his effect upon the use of certain planes and oppositions of tints to relieve and express his design, to emphasize its main motive, to bring out or to subdue its lines and forms. He knows that cool flat tints—blues, greens, grays—will make forms and surfaces retire, and he makes use of them for flat and reposeful effects, such as wall and ceiling surfaces, adopting the natural principle of colour in landscape and sky.

Now the designer, the creator of patterns, depends on the use of specific planes and color contrasts to enhance and express his design, highlight its main theme, and bring out or soften its lines and shapes. He understands that cool flat colors—blues, greens, grays—will make forms and surfaces recede, and he uses them for flat and calming effects, like on walls and ceilings, following the natural principles of color found in landscapes and the sky.

He uses richer and more varied colour in textile hangings and carpets, furniture, and accessories—reds, yellows, greens, crimson, russets, orange, gold—which answer to the brighter flowers and [265]parterres of our gardens, as things to be near the eye and touch, and to occur as lesser quantities in a scheme of interior colour design.

He uses richer and more varied colors in textile hangings and carpets, furniture, and accessories—reds, yellows, greens, crimson, russets, orange, gold—that match the brighter flowers and [265]beds of our gardens, serving as things that are pleasing to the eye and touch, and appearing in smaller quantities within an overall color scheme for interior design.

In the colour design of patterns, harmonious and rich effects can be produced by the use of pure colour alone, no doubt, if carefully proportioned, and separated by outline; though harmony is more difficult to attain in pure colours used in their full strength; and for their due effect, and to avoid harshness, such a treatment really requires out-door light or special conditions of lighting, or the strong light of eastern or southern countries, to soften the effect.

In color design for patterns, you can create beautiful and rich effects using pure colors, as long as they're well-proportioned and outlined. However, achieving harmony with pure colors at full strength can be tricky. To get the right effect and avoid harshness, it's best to work under outdoor light or specific lighting conditions, like the strong light found in eastern or southern countries, which helps to soften the overall effect.

And since we have to adapt our designs to their probable surroundings, we usually consciously select certain tones or shades of a colour, rather than use it absolutely pure or in its full strength. The beautiful tone which time gives to all colour-work is difficult to rival, but no conscious imitation of it is tolerable.

And since we need to adjust our designs to their likely environments, we usually intentionally choose specific tones or shades of a color instead of using it completely pure or at its full intensity. The beautiful tone that time gives to all color work is hard to match, but any conscious imitation of it is unacceptable.

But so long as our aim is strictly to make a colour scheme of any kind in relation to itself, or in harmony with its conditions, we are on a safe and sound path. It is this relativity which is the important thing in all decorative art, and which, more distinctly than any other quality, distinguishes it from pictorial art; although pictorial art is under the necessity of the same law in regard to itself; and in its highest forms, as in mural work, is certainly subject to relativity in its widest sense.

But as long as our goal is simply to create a color scheme that relates to itself or matches its surroundings, we're on solid ground. This connection is what truly matters in all decorative art, and it clearly sets it apart from pictorial art. However, pictorial art also has to follow this same principle regarding itself, and in its most advanced forms, like mural art, it definitely adheres to relativity in its broadest sense.

Pattern and Picture

Design and Image

At first sight it might appear as if there were an essential fundamental natural difference between a pattern and a picture, but when we come [266]to consider it, it appears to be rather a distinction than a difference.

At first glance, it might seem like there’s a significant and fundamental natural difference between a pattern and a picture, but when we take a closer look, it seems more like a distinction than an actual difference. [266]

A pattern may be an arrangement of lines, forms, and a harmony of planes and tones of colour.

A pattern can be an arrangement of lines, shapes, and a balance of surfaces and shades of color.

But these words would describe in general terms a picture also.

But these words would generally describe a picture as well.

Certain recurrences of line and form; certain re-echoing notes of the same, or allied colour, are necessary to both pattern and picture. The abstract ingredients appear to be the same in both cases.

Certain repeats of lines and shapes; certain echoing notes of the same or related colors, are essential to both pattern and picture. The basic elements seem to be the same in both instances.

A picture indeed may be considered as a pattern of another sort, and the real difference is that whereas a pattern is not necessarily a picture, a picture is bound to be a pattern—a pattern having its quantities, its balance of masses, its connecting lines, its various planes, its key of colour, its play of contrasts, its harmony of tones.

A picture can definitely be seen as a kind of pattern, and the main difference is that while a pattern doesn't have to be a picture, a picture must be a pattern. A pattern includes its measurements, its balance of shapes, its connecting lines, its different planes, its color scheme, its contrasts, and its tonal harmony.

Technically, a picture may be considered as an informal pattern, mainly of tone and values; while a pattern may be considered as a formal pattern, mainly of planes of colour.

Technically, a picture can be seen as an informal pattern, primarily of tones and values; while a pattern can be viewed as a formal pattern, mainly of color planes.

The ancient art of the East was all frankly pattern-work, whatever the subject pictured. Egyptian, Persian, Indian, Chinese, Moorish and Arabian art, in all their varieties, show the dominating sense of pattern, and the invention of the instinctive decorators in the use of colour.

The ancient art of the East was all about pattern, no matter the subject represented. Egyptian, Persian, Indian, Chinese, Moorish, and Arabian art, in all their forms, showcase a strong emphasis on pattern and the creativity of instinctive decorators in their use of color.

The Japanese, also, are instinctive decorators, though in a less formal and more impressionistic way, and with much more naturalistic feeling. Their pictures printed from colour blocks, as well as their "kakimonos," painted on silk, are frankly [267]pattern-pictures, the pattern motive being quite as strong or stronger than the graphic or representative motive.

The Japanese are also natural decorators, but in a more casual and impressionistic style, with a much more natural feeling. Their pictures, printed from color blocks, along with their "kakimonos" painted on silk, are clearly pattern-based, with the pattern being just as strong, if not stronger, than the graphic or representative elements. [267]

Mediæval and early Renaissance painting in Europe was frankly more or less formal and of the nature of ornament, and even in its freest and fullest development, in the works of the great masters of the sixteenth century of Venice and Florence, a certain decorative or architectural feeling was never forgotten.

Medieval and early Renaissance painting in Europe was mostly formal and served an ornamental purpose. Even in its most expressive and complete form, as seen in the works of the great masters of the sixteenth century from Venice and Florence, a certain decorative or architectural sense was always present.

Painting was still in close association with architecture, and was the chief adornment of churches and palaces; thus it preserved a peculiar distinction and dignity of style. The Dutch school did more perhaps to break these old decorative and architectural traditions than any other, with their domestic and purely naturalistic motives, their pursuit of realism, atmospheric effect, and chiaroscuro—that fascinating goal of painting.

Painting was still closely tied to architecture and served as the main decoration for churches and palaces, which gave it a unique distinction and dignity in style. The Dutch school probably did more than any other to challenge these old decorative and architectural traditions, focusing on domestic and purely natural themes, their quest for realism, atmospheric effects, and chiaroscuro—that captivating aim of painting.

Chiaroscuro

Light and shadow

Yet there were some of the seventeenth-century masters, and of the best, such as De Hooghe and Ver Meer of Delft, who showed themselves very much alive to decorative effect, which their power of chiaroscuro—the power of painting things in their proper atmosphere, as lost in transparent depths of shadow, or found in luminous mystery—only seemed to enhance.

Yet there were some of the seventeenth-century masters, and some of the best, like De Hooghe and Ver Meer of Delft, who demonstrated a keen awareness of decorative effect. Their skill in chiaroscuro—the ability to paint things in their true atmosphere, as if lost in transparent depths of shadow or revealed in luminous mystery—only seemed to enhance this effect.

As a wonderful instance of ornamental and dignified design carried into every detail with most careful draughtsmanship, and yet beautiful in chiaroscuro and grave colour, there is no finer [268] example than J. Van Eyck's portrait-picture of "Jan Arnolfini and his Wife" in our National Gallery. Such pictures as these would tell as [269] rich and precious gems upon the wall, and would form the centres to which the surrounding colour patterns and decoration would lead up, as in the picture the little mirror reflecting the figures shines upon the wall, a picture within a picture.

As a stunning example of elegant and dignified design that pays attention to every detail with meticulous craftsmanship, and which is also beautiful in light and shadow and deep color, there's no better example than J. Van Eyck's portrait of "Jan Arnolfini and his Wife" in our National Gallery. Pictures like this would be like rich and precious gems on the wall, serving as focal points to which the surrounding colors and decorations would draw attention, much like how the small mirror reflecting the figures sparkles on the wall, creating a picture within a picture.

It is instructive from any point of view to study the quantities and relations of colour, and their tones and values, in such works.

It's valuable from any perspective to examine the amounts and relationships of color, along with their shades and values, in such works.

Ver Meer of Delft [270]

Vermeer of Delft

Take Ver Meer's "Lady at a Spinet" in our National Gallery.

Take Ver Meer's "Lady at a Spinet" in our National Gallery.

We have a plain white wall, exquisite in tone, upon which the crisp gold of the small picture inclosing a brownish landscape with a blue and white sky, and the broad black frame of the picture of Cupid tell strongly, yet fall into plane behind the figure in white satin—quite a different quality of white, and warmer and brighter than the wall. The bodice is a steely blue silk, which is repeated in the velvet seat of the chair; while the blue and white landscape upon the open lid of the spinet repeats the blue and white landscape on the wall, and the blue and white motive is subtly re-echoed in a subdued key in the little tiles lining the base of the wall. The floor is a chequer of black and white (mottled) marble, which gives a fine relief to the dress and repeats the emphatic black of the picture frame; the stand of the spinet is also black striated marble. Quiet daylight falls through the greenish white of the leaded panes. The pink-brown woodwork of the spinet and chair prevent the colour scheme from being cold. The flesh is very pale and ivory-like in tone, but the dress is enlivened by little crisp scarlet and gold touches in the narrow laces which tie the sleeves.

We have a simple white wall, beautiful in tone, on which the sharp gold of the small picture framing a brownish landscape with a blue and white sky, along with the broad black frame of the picture of Cupid, stand out but also fade into the background behind the figure in white satin—totally a different shade of white, warmer and brighter than the wall. The bodice is a cool blue silk, which matches the velvet seat of the chair; while the blue and white landscape on the open lid of the spinet echoes the blue and white landscape on the wall, and the blue and white theme is subtly revisited in a muted way in the little tiles lining the base of the wall. The floor is a checkerboard of black and white (mottled) marble, which provides a nice contrast to the dress and reflects the bold black of the picture frame; the stand of the spinet is also black striped marble. Soft daylight filters through the greenish-white leaded panes. The pinkish-brown woodwork of the spinet and chair keeps the color scheme from feeling too cold. The skin is very pale and ivory-like, but the dress is brightened by little sharp scarlet and gold accents in the narrow laces that tie the sleeves.

The little picture is a gem of painting and truth of tone, and at the same time might well suggest a charming scheme of colour to an ornamentist.

The small painting is a masterpiece in both art and color, and it could easily inspire a beautiful color scheme for a designer.

Van Eyck

Van Eyck

Examine the Van Eyck in the same way, and we shall find a very rich but quiet scheme of colour in a lower key, highly decorative, yet presented with extraordinary realistic force, united with extreme refinement and exquisite chiaroscuro, and [271]truth of tone and value, as a portrait-picture, and piece of interior lighting.

Look at the Van Eyck in the same way, and you'll discover a very rich but subtle color scheme in a lower key, highly decorative, yet presented with incredible realistic power, combined with extreme refinement and beautiful chiaroscuro, and [271]truth of tone and value, as a portrait and a piece of interior lighting.

It is like taking an actual peep into the inner life of a Flemish burgher of the fifteenth century.

It’s like taking a real look into the inner life of a Flemish merchant from the fifteenth century.

One seems to breathe the still air of the quiet room, the gray daylight falling through the leaded casements, one of which stands open, and shows a narrow strip of luminous sky and suggestion of a garden with scarlet blossoms in green leaves.

One seems to inhale the calm air of the quiet room, the gray daylight streaming through the leaded windows, one of which is open, revealing a narrow strip of bright sky and hinting at a garden with red flowers among green leaves.

The man is clad in a long mantle of claret-brown velvet edged with fur, over black tunic and hose. He wears a quaint black hat upon his head, which almost foreshadows the tall hat of the modern citizen. The pale strange face looks paler and stranger beneath it, but is in character with the long thin hands. The figure gives one the impression of legal precision and dryness, and a touch of clerical formality. The wife is of a buxom and characteristic Flemish type, in a grass-green robe edged with white fur, over peacock blue; a crisp silvery white head-dress; a dark red leather belt with silver stitching. Her figure is relieved upon the subdued red of the bed hangings, continued in the cover of the settle and the red clogs. The wall of the room, much lost in transparent shade, is of a greenish gray tone, and in the centre, between the figures, a circular convex mirror sparkles on the wall reflecting the backs of the figures. Thin lines delicately repeat the red in the mirror frame, which has a black and red inner moulding. A string of amber beads hangs on the wall, and repeats the shimmer of the bright brass candelabra which hangs aloft, and which is drawn carefully enough for a craftsman to reproduce.

The man is dressed in a long claret-brown velvet coat trimmed with fur, worn over a black tunic and tights. He sports an unusual black hat on his head, which almost resembles the tall hats worn by modern citizens. His pale, strange face appears even paler and stranger beneath it, matching his long, thin hands. The overall impression of his figure conveys a sense of legal precision and dryness, along with a hint of clerical formality. The wife has a curvy, distinctive Flemish look, wearing a grass-green dress trimmed with white fur over peacock blue; a crisp silvery white headpiece; and a dark red leather belt with silver stitching. Her figure stands out against the muted red of the bed curtains, which also extends to the cover of the bench and the red clogs. The walls of the room, mostly lost in soft shadows, are a greenish-gray shade, and in the center, between the figures, a round convex mirror sparkles on the wall, reflecting their backs. Thin lines delicately echo the red in the mirror frame, which has a black and red inner molding. A string of amber beads hangs on the wall, shimmering alongside the bright brass chandelier that hangs above, meticulously crafted so that a skilled artisan could replicate it.

Pattern-Pictures [272]

Pattern Images [272]

Both designer and painter may find abundant suggestion in this picture, which, with Ver Meer's "Lady at the Spinet," I should describe as pattern-pictures—that is to say, while they are thoroughly painter's pictures, and give all the peculiar qualities of oil-painting in the rendering of tone and values, they yet show in their colour scheme the decorative quality, and might be translated into patterns of the same proportions and keys of colours.

Both the designer and the painter might find plenty of inspiration in this artwork, which, along with Ver Meer's

As examples of what might be termed picture-patterns we might recur to the wall paintings, as I have said, of ancient Egypt and early art generally, for their simplest forms; but to take a much later instance, and from the art of Florence in the fifteenth century, look at Botticelli's charming little picture of "The Nativity," in the National Gallery. It has all the intentional, or perhaps instinctive, ornamental aim of Italian art, and its colour scheme shows a most dainty and delicate invention in the strictest relation to the subject and sentiment, and is arranged with the utmost subtlety and the nicest art.

As examples of what could be called picture-patterns, we can look back at the wall paintings of ancient Egypt and early art in general for their simplest forms. However, to take a much later example from the art of Florence in the fifteenth century, check out Botticelli's lovely little painting "The Nativity" in the National Gallery. It embodies all the intentional, or maybe instinctive, ornamental quality of Italian art, and its color scheme shows a beautifully delicate creativity that's closely tied to the subject and sentiment, arranged with the utmost subtlety and skill.

Botticelli

Botticelli

The ring of angels above, for instance, is partly relieved upon a gilded ground—to represent the dome of heaven. They bear olive branches, and the colour of their robes alternates in the following order: rose, olive (shot with gold), and white.

The circle of angels above, for example, is partially set against a gold background—to symbolize the dome of heaven. They hold olive branches, and the color of their robes alternates in this order: pink, olive (tinged with gold), and white.

The rose-coloured angels have olive and white wings; the white angels, rose and olive wings; and the olive angels, white and rose wings.

The pink angels have green and white wings; the white angels, pink and green wings; and the green angels, white and pink wings.

This part of the picture by itself forms a most beautiful pattern motive, while it expresses the idea of peace and goodwill.

This section of the artwork creates a beautiful pattern on its own and conveys a sense of peace and goodwill.

Then on the brown and gold thatch of the [273]stable occur three more angels in white, rose, and green, respectively. Against a pale sky rise rich olive-green trees, forming the background.

Then on the brown and gold thatch of the [273]stable are three more angels in white, pink, and green. Against a light sky, lush olive-green trees rise, creating the backdrop.

The Virgin strikes the brightest ray of colour [274]in red under-robe and sky-blue mantle. There is a gray white ass and a pale brown cow behind her.

The Virgin shines with the brightest colors [274]in a red under robe and a sky-blue cloak. Behind her stands a gray-white donkey and a light brown cow.

St. Joseph is in steel gray with a golden orange mantle over.

St. Joseph is dressed in steel gray with a golden orange cloak.

The brightest white occurs in the drapery upon which the infant Christ lies.

The purest white is found in the fabric that the baby Christ is lying on.

An angel with a group of men appears, kneeling on the left relieved against white rocks; their colours are—the angel's wings—peacock blue and green, and a pale rose robe. The next figure is in scarlet; the next yellow; and the third man wears pale rose over rich grass-green.

An angel with a group of men shows up, kneeling on the left against white rocks. Their colors are—the angel's wings—peacock blue and green, and a light rose robe. The next figure is dressed in scarlet; the next one in yellow; and the third man wears light rose over deep grass green.

Of the shepherds on the right the first one is in russet and white, the next steely gray, and the angel is in white with rose and pale green wings.

Of the shepherds on the right, the first one is dressed in brown and white, the next is a steely gray, and the angel is in white with pink and light green wings.

The ground is generally warm white and brown, with dark olive-coloured grass and foliage, so that the pattern of the picture is mainly a ground of olive, gold, and white, relieved by spots of rose, white, blue, yellow, and rose-red and scarlet—the colour in the groups of angels embracing men in front being the deepest in tone.

The ground is mostly warm shades of white and brown, with dark olive-colored grass and plants, creating a pattern of olive, gold, and white, highlighted by patches of rose, white, blue, yellow, and shades of rose-red and scarlet—the colors in the groups of angels embracing men in the foreground being the richest in tone.

The first angel in this group (on the left) wears green shot with gold, with shot green and gold wings, the human being in dark olive and rich crimson red.

The first angel in this group (on the left) wears green with gold accents, has green and gold wings, and a human figure in dark olive and deep crimson red.

Next is a white angel with pale rose wings; the man in gray with a red mantle over.

Next is a white angel with light pink wings; the man in gray wearing a red cloak over it.

Last is an angel in rose, with rose and red wings, the man being in scarlet with gray mantle over. All the men hold olive branches, and the group emphatically illustrates the idea of "on earth peace and goodwill towards men," thus [275]ending on the keynote both of colour and idea given in the ring of angels above.

Last is an angel in pink, with pink and red wings, the man dressed in scarlet with a gray cloak over him. All the men are holding olive branches, and the group clearly represents the concept of "peace on earth and goodwill towards men," thus [275] concluding with the unifying theme of both color and idea presented in the circle of angels above.

Thus it is not only a lovely picture, but an exquisite pattern.

So, it's not just a beautiful image, but also a stunning design.

Holbein

Holbein

Another instance of a picture-pattern extremely strong and brilliant in its realization of the full force and value of bright colour opposed by the strongest black and white, may be found in Holbein's splendid "Ambassadors," also in our National Collection.

Another example of a picture-pattern that is incredibly strong and vivid in its use of bright colors contrasted with deep black and white can be found in Holbein's stunning "Ambassadors," which is also part of our National Collection.

Botticelli

Botticelli

The circular picture of the Madonna and Child, with St. John and an angel, by Botticelli, is also [276]another beautiful instance of pictorial pattern, and of design well adapted and adequately filling its space, while full of delicate draughtsmanship, poetic sentiment, and extremely ornate in its colour.

The round painting of the Madonna and Child, with St. John and an angel, by Botticelli, is also [276] another lovely example of visual pattern and a design that fits perfectly in its space, while showcasing delicate drawing, poetic feeling, and vibrant colors that are quite elaborate.

Carlo Crivelli

Carlo Crivelli

Still more strictly ornamental in character and aim is Carlo Crivelli's "Annunciation." Amazingly [277]rich in invention, and beautifully designed detail, and magnificently decorative in its colour scheme of brick reds and whites, and pale pinks and steel grays, and yellows, varied with scarlet [278]and black, green, blue and gold, in the costumes and draperies, sparkling with jewels, and brightened with rays and patterns of gold.

Even more focused on ornamental details and aesthetics is Carlo Crivelli's "Annunciation." It's incredibly rich in creativity, showcasing beautifully crafted details, and features a stunning color palette of brick reds, whites, pale pinks, steel grays, and yellows, mixed with scarlet, black, green, blue, and gold in the costumes and draperies, which are adorned with jewels and illuminated with rays and patterns of gold.

Perugino

Perugino

Hardly less ornamental in its more conscious grace and Renaissance feeling is Perugino's triptych of the Virgin adoring, with St. Michael on one wing and St. Raphael and Tobias on the other. It is a splendid deep-toned harmony of blues, and warm flesh tones and golden hair, varied by opals, rose red, bronze, green, white, and purple and orange.

Hardly less decorative in its intentional elegance and Renaissance vibe is Perugino's triptych of the Virgin in adoration, featuring St. Michael on one side and St. Raphael with Tobias on the other. It's a stunning deep-toned blend of blues, warm skin tones, and golden hair, accented by opals, rose red, bronze, green, white, purple, and orange.

Perugino: “;The Virgin in Adoration, with St. Michael and St. Raphael and Tobias”; (National Gallery).

Titian

Titian

Titian's "Bacchus and Ariadne" is, perhaps, more what I have described as a pattern-picture, and is of a much later type. The full flush of colour and pagan joy of the Renaissance is here paramount, expressed with the masterly freedom of drawing and magnificent colour sense of the great [279]Venetian master. Yet, looking through the life, the movement, the swing and vitality of the figures, and the power and poetry by which the story is conveyed, we shall find a fine ornate design, sustaining an extremely rich and sumptuous pattern of colour. We have a spread of deep-toned blue sky barred with silvery white and gray clouds, great masses of brown and green foliage swaying against it, above a band of deep blue sea, and a field of rich golden brown earth. Warm flesh tones, deep and pale, break upon this with a gorgeous pattern of flying rose, blue, scarlet, orange, and white draperies, varied with the spotted coats of the leopards, the black of the dog, and the copper vessel and warm white of tumbled drapery.

Titian's "Bacchus and Ariadne" is, perhaps, more of what I would call a pattern-picture and belongs to a much later style. The vibrant colors and joyful, pagan spirit of the Renaissance are front and center here, conveyed with the masterful drawing and stunning color sense of the great Venetian artist. However, when we look beyond the life, movement, and energy of the figures, along with the power and beauty through which the story is told, we discover an exquisite design that supports a richly intricate pattern of color. There’s a broad expanse of deep blue sky marked with silvery white and gray clouds, large clusters of brown and green foliage swaying against it, above a band of deep blue sea, and a stretch of rich golden brown earth. Warm skin tones, both deep and light, emerge amidst a stunning pattern of fluttering rose, blue, scarlet, orange, and white fabrics, interspersed with the spotted coats of leopards, the black of the dog, and the copper vessel along with the warm white of draped fabric.

[280]Keats might have had this picture in his mind when he wrote the song in "Endymion":

[280]Keats might have had this image in his mind when he wrote the poem in "Endymion":

As I sat on the light blue hills, There was the sound of party-goers: the streams
Into the wide stream that was a shade of purple. It was Bacchus and his crew!
"The serious trumpet sounds, and silver resonates
The sound of clashing cymbals created a joyful noise—
It was Bacchus and his crew!
"Like a flowing vintage, they approached," Crowned with green leaves and faces all aflame; Everyone is joyfully dancing through the lovely valley,
"To scare you, Melancholy!"

The "Sacred and Profane Love" of the same painter, in the Borghese Gallery at Rome, is an even more splendid example of colour and tone, and is probably the finest of all Titian's works.

The "Sacred and Profane Love" by the same painter, in the Borghese Gallery in Rome, is an even more stunning example of color and tone, and it's likely the best of all Titian's works.

Paul Veronese

Paul Veronese

In Paul Veronese we find a cooler key of colour generally, with a fondness for compositions of figures with classical architecture, the rich patterned robes and varied heads contrasting pleasantly with the severe verticals and smooth surfaces of the marble columns—a sumptuous and dignified kind of picture-pattern, and fully adapted to the decoration of Venetian churches and palaces of the Renaissance.

In Paul Veronese's work, there's a generally cooler color palette, displaying a preference for compositions featuring figures alongside classical architecture. The richly patterned robes and diverse hairstyles contrast nicely with the strong vertical lines and smooth surfaces of the marble columns. This creates a lavish and dignified visual style, well-suited for decorating Venetian churches and Renaissance palaces.

F. Madox Brown

F. Madox Brown

Madox Brown's "Christ washing St. Peter's Feet," now in the Tate Gallery, is a modern picture-pattern, and an extremely fine one.

Madox Brown's "Christ Washing St. Peter's Feet," now in the Tate Gallery, is a contemporary artwork, and a truly impressive one.

These are but a few instances out of many, and the subject of colour and pattern, like the expression of line and form, of which it is a part, is so large and its sides so multitudinous that to deal with the subject fully and illustrate it adequately [281]would need, not ten chapters, but ten hundred, and could only be compassed by the history of art itself.

These are just a few examples out of many, and the topic of color and pattern, like the expression of line and shape, is so vast and has so many different aspects that fully addressing the subject and illustrating it well [281]would require not ten chapters, but a thousand, and could only be covered by the history of art itself.

Conclusion

Conclusion

If anything I have said on the subject, or have been able to show by way of illustration, has served in any way to clear away obscurities, or to lighten the labours of students, or to suggest fresh ideas to the minds of any of my readers in the theory, history, or practice of art, I shall feel that my work has not been in vain, and, at all events, I can only say that I have endeavoured to give here the results of my own thoughts and experience in art.

If anything I've said about this topic, or anything I've illustrated, has helped to clear up confusion, made it easier for students, or sparked new ideas in the minds of my readers regarding the theory, history, or practice of art, I will feel that my work has been worthwhile. Regardless, I can only say that I've tried to share my own thoughts and experiences in art.

[282] Some may look upon art as a means of livelihood only, a handmaid of commerce, or as a branch of knowledge, to be acquired only so far as to enable one to impart it to others; others may regard it as a polite amusement; others, again, as an absorbing pursuit and passion, demanding the closest devotion: but from whatever point of view we may regard it, do not let us forget that the pursuit of beauty in art offers the best of educations for the faculties, that its interest continually increases, and its pleasures and successes are the most refined and satisfying.

[282] Some people see art as just a way to make a living, a sidekick to business, or as a subject to learn enough about to teach others; some view it as a nice pastime; while others see it as a deeply engaging passion that requires total commitment. Regardless of how we look at it, let’s not forget that the pursuit of beauty in art provides an excellent education for our minds, that its appeal keeps growing, and that its joys and achievements are the most sophisticated and fulfilling.


INDEX

  • Adaptability in design, 124-126.
  • Animal forms, use of in design, 106;
  • Architectural mouldings, relief in, 190.
  • Architecture, spaces for sculpture in, 113-116.
  • Ardebil, holy carpet of the mosque of, f126.
  • Athens, the Tower of the Winds, 115-116.
  • Bari, 10;
    • the "Hundred Birds" of, f044.
  • Birds, Japanese drawing of, 68, f044;
    • decorative treatment of, f115.
  • Blake's Book of Job, "The Morning Stars," 19, f014, 152.
  • Border motives, recurrence in, f031, f032, f062.
  • Book decoration, 58, 59, 62;
    • example of page treatment, f041a.
  • Botticelli, frescoes in the Sistine Chapel, 226;
    • rendering of the "Primavera" in tapestry, 240;
    • his "Nativity," 272-275;
    • "Madonna and Child," 275-276.
  • Boundaries, definition of, 2, 3;
    • use of in designing sprays, 38, f027;
    • in designing animal forms, f063a;
    • influence of, 108;
    • relation of design to, f064;
    • decorative spacing of figures in geometric, f063b, 152-156.
  • Brush-work, 65-68.
  • Canterbury, St. Margaret Street, f086.
  • Ceiling decoration, 136.
  • Charcoal drawing, 68, 70.
  • Chartres, carving on the Cathedral, 197, f108, f109.
  • Chiaroscuro, 267-269.
  • Chinese porcelain, 101.
  • Colour, effect of texture on, 244;
    • in stained glass, 252;
    • expression of relief in line and form by, 256, 258;
    • radiation of, 258;
    • complements in, 260;
    • harmony in, 261;
    • colour sense, 261, 262;
    • colour proportions, 262;
    • importance of pure colour, 263.
  • Composition, formal, 152-156;
  • Constantine, Arch of, sketch of, f069.
  • Contrast in design, 101;[284]
    • use of, in pattern design, 166, et seq.;
    • principles of, in black and white, f111a.
  • Corinthian order, Roman treatment of, 192, f105.
  • Counterbalance, 43, 44, 95, f057, f058, 130.
  • Counterchange, in heraldry, 171-174.
  • Crivelli, "The Annunciation," 276-278.
  • Cube, the, 73;
  • Dado, use of the, 234.
  • De Hooghe, Peter, 267.
  • Desiderio di Settignano, relief work of, 202;
    • "Madonna and Child," at South Kensington, by, 202.
  • Design, linear basis of, 35;
    • technical influence on, 58, 59, 62;
    • beauty in, 62, 63;
    • influence of material on, 64;
    • quantities in, 96-101;
    • contrast in, 101;
    • living tradition in, 126;
    • adaptability in, 124-126;
    • extension in, 126-131;
    • geometric structural plans in, 130;
    • essentials of, 138-139.
  • De Wint, brush-work of, 68.
  • Diaper, use of in Middle Ages, 171, 174-175.
  • Donatello, relief work of, 202.
  • Drapery, treatment of by the old masters, f099-186.
  • Drawing in line, methods of, 6, 7;
    • calligraphic method, 8;
    • tentative method, 9;
    • Japanese method, 10;
    • oval and rectangular methods, f008, 12.
  • Dürer, Albert, his "Geometrica," 5;
    • roofs in his engravings, 148;
    • "The Prodigal Son," f083;
    • "St. Anthony," f084;
    • principle in the treatment of drapery, f099, f100.
  • Egyptian sculpture, 192, 194-196.
  • Emotion, linear expression of, 18-21.
  • Emphasis, 54;
    • value of, 56;
    • effects of different emphasis, f038, f039, f040;
    • in relief of form, 180.
  • Equivalents in form, value of, 95, f057.
  • Extension in design, 126-131.
  • Figure composition, 160;
    • expression of repose and action in, f090.
  • Figure design, relief in, 204-207;
    • graphic and decorative treatment of, f114.
  • Figure designs, controlled by geometric boundaries, 152-156.
  • Flaxman's Homer, designs from, f015.
  • Flowers,
    • lines of characterization in design of, 12, 13;
    • forms controlled by inclosing boundaries, 110-112.
  • Foliage, principles of structure in, 143-146.
  • Form, its relation to line, 27;
    • importance of knowledge of, 31;
    • choice of, 73, 79;
    • [285]elementary forms and their relation to forms in nature and art, 73-77;
    • grouping of, 83-87;
    • analogies of, 89-91;
    • typical forms of ornament, 92-95;
    • equivalents in, 95, f057;
    • variation of allied forms, 103;
    • governed by shape of inclosing boundary, f063b, 106, f066;
    • relief of, 165, et seq.;
    • expression of, by light and shade, 205, f112.
  • Frieze, origin of the, 113, 133;
  • Fruit forms, treatment of, f054, 89.
  • Gems, engraved, 200.
  • Geometric forms, elementary, 73;
    • structural plans in surface design, 128-133.
  • Ghirlandajo, 226.
  • Giotto, "Chastity," f119.
  • Gozzoli, Benozzo, 226.
  • Graphic aim, the, in drawing, 29-31, 205, 208-211.
  • Grouping of forms, 83-87.
  • Holbein, "The Ambassadors," f137.
  • Human figure, use of the,
    • in design, 104-107;
    • decorative spacing of
    • within geometric boundaries, 105-106, 107;
    • governed by inclosing boundaries, 110, f066;
    • principles of line in, f081a.
  • Indian ornament, typical, 212, 216;
    • printed cotton designs, 246, f130.
  • Inlay work, choice of forms for, 81-83.
  • Japanese method of drawing with the brush, 10, 68;
    • diagonal pattern, f053;
    • colour prints, 266.
  • Keene, Charles, 190.
  • Landscape, expression of storm and calm in, 158, f089.
  • Lead pencil, 70.
  • Letters, formation of, 4;
    • Dürer's method, f005a.
  • Line, methods of drawing in, 6-12;
    • quality of, 12-14;
    • the language of, 23;
    • comparison of style in, 24;
    • scale of degrees and qualities of, 24, 25;
    • its relation to form, 27;
    • question and answer in, 35, f025;
    • recurring, f031, f032;
    • radiating principle of, 46-50;
    • range and use of, 47-49;
    • choice of, 51;
    • degree and emphasis of, 54;
    • influence of technical conditions on, 58-62;
    • controlling influence of, as a boundary of design, 106, 108-113;
    • value of recurring, 119-124;
    • combinations of, 139;
    • principles of structural and ornamental line, 140-145;
    • selection of, f117a, f117b.
  • Linear expression, of movement, 15, 16, 17;
  • [286] Linear motives and pattern bases, simple, 109-111.
  • Lippi, Filippino, study of drapery by, f101.
  • Lorenzo di Credi, 226.
  • Lysicrates, monument of, 133.
  • Madox Brown, Ford, mural painting at Manchester, 226, 227;
    • "Christ washing Peter's feet," 280, f142.
  • Mantling, treatment of, 170-173.
  • Medals, 200, f110.
  • Memory, importance of, in design, 39.
  • Michael Angelo, ceiling of the Sistine Chapel, 225.
  • Modelling, principle of relief in, 192.
  • Montague, mantling from Garter plate of, f094b.
  • Morris, William, tapestry of, 236, 240.
  • Movement, linear expression of, 15-17;
    • lines of, in a procession, f091a;
    • in a dancing figure, f117a;
    • in water, f118b.
  • Mural decoration, 224, 225;
    • diagram of systems of line governing, f121;
    • scale in, 230;
    • choice of line and form in, 236.
  • Nauplia, Gulf of, coast and mountain lines, f004, f118a.
  • Nerva, Forum of, 192, f105.
  • Nuremberg, ceiling in the Castle of, 136, 137.
  • Olive branch, study of from nature, f020;
    • decorative treatment of, f021.
  • Ornament, typical forms of, 92-94.
  • Ornamental purpose, the, in drawing, 29, 31-33, 210, et seq.
  • Ornamental units, 94;
    • use of intervals in repeating, f065.
  • Outline, origin and function of, 1.
  • Parthenon, the frieze of the, 46;
  • Pattern and picture, difference between, 265;
    • pattern-pictures, 272.
  • Pen, the, compared with brush and pencil, 71.
  • Pencil drawing, 70, 71.
  • Persian carpets, principle of design in, 242;
    • treatment of borders in, f127;
    • white outline in, 260.
  • Persian ornament, typical, 212, f116.
  • Persian rugs, value of different quantities in, 98-101.
  • Perugino, National Gallery triptych, f140.
  • Photograph, influence of the, 55, 56;
  • Picture writing, 27, f019.
  • Pinturicchio, frescoes in the Sistine Chapel, 226;
    • mural painting at Siena, 226, f120;
    • frescoes in the Appartimenti Borgia, 238, f125.
  • Pisano, Vittore, medals of, 198, f110.
  • [287] Poppy, horned study of, f022;
    • adaptation of for needlework, f023;
    • sketch of on different coloured grounds, f132, 258.
  • Prints, principles of design for, 246-251.
  • Procession, lines of movement in a, 160, 162-163.
  • Pyramid, the, 73;
  • Radiating principle of line, the, 46-50.
  • Raphael, study of drapery by, f102.
  • Ravenna, S. Vitale, sketch of apse, f070.
  • Recurring line and form, f031, f032;
    • value of in architecture, 119, 124.
  • Relief, methods of expressing, 165;
    • use of contrast, 166;
    • decorative relief, 171;
    • on diapered ground, 174-175;
    • by simple linear contrasts, 174, 176-178;
    • by linear shading, 176, 178;
    • by diagonal shading, 176, 178-180;
    • value of emphasis in, 180;
    • by light and shade alone, 187-190;
    • principle of in architectural mouldings, 190;
    • modelled, 192;
    • in sculpture, 192-199, f109;
    • Florentine fifteenth-century work, 202;
    • natural principle of, 204, f111b;
    • by colour, 256, 258.
  • Repeating patterns, 36, f026, f077b, f078;
    • method of testing, 38, f028.
  • Rhythm of design, the, 32.
  • Roofs, German, 146-148.
  • Rothenburg, roof-lines in, f085.
  • St. David's Cathedral, carvings in, 122-124;
  • Scale, importance of in mural decoration, 230, 232.
  • Sculpture, relief in, 192;
  • Selection, the test of artistic treatment, 214.
  • Shields, F. J., mural decoration, 228.
  • Silhouette, 2, f010a.
  • Skirting, the, 234.
  • Spaces, decorative, in design, 113;
    • apparent depth or width increased by use of vertical or horizontal lines, 232, f122.
  • Spacing, mural, 230, f121, f123.
  • Sphere, the, 73;
  • Stained glass, principles of design for, 252, 255.
  • Surfaces, linear expression of, 18.
  • Tapestry, 237;
  • Technical influence, the, 58-62.
  • Textile designing, 62;
    • examples of, f041b;
    • value of different qualities in, 97-101;
    • principles of, 241, 242;
    • colour in, 244.
  • [288] Textures, linear expression of, 18.
  • Thebes, sculptured relief at, f106.
  • Titian, "Bacchus and Ariadne," 278-280;
    • "Sacred and Profane Love," 280.
  • Tivoli, Temple of the Sibyls at, 133.
  • Trees, effect of wind upon, f011;
    • general principles of line and form in foliage, etc., 143-145.
  • Typical treatment, 31;
  • Valence, Aymer de, tomb of, f094a.
  • Van Eyck, "Jan Arnolfini and his Wife," 267, f134, 270, 271.
  • Variation of allied forms, 103.
  • Variety in design, 40.
  • Ver Meer, "Lady at Spinet," f135, 270, 272.
  • Veronese, Paul, 280.
  • Visch, Martin de, brass of, f094b, f095.
  • Walberswick Church, f072.
  • Walker, Frederick, 190.
  • Wall, decorative spacing of the, 234, f123.
  • Wall-paper, principles of design for, 36, f026, 246;
    • relation between frieze and field in, 133, 134.
  • Water, lines of movement in, f118b.
  • Watercourse, lines left by a, f091b.
  • Wave lines, f011, f012.
  • Westminster, vaulting of chapter house, f035.
  • Winchelsea, tomb of Gervaise-Alard, f071.

CHISWICK PRESS: PRINTED BY CHARLES WHITTINGHAM AND CO.
TOOKS COURT, CHANCERY LANE, LONDON.




        
        
    
Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!